b.a. (vocational studies) materials management, cbcs · 2018-08-16 · b.a. (vocational studies)...

B.A. (Vocational Studies) Materials Management, CBCS

B.A. (Vocational Studies): Materials Management

Three-Year (6-Semester) CBCS Programme

Basic Structure: Distribution of Courses

1 Ability Enhancement Compulsory Courses

2 Papers of 2 Credit Hrs. each (Total Credit Hrs. 2X2)

04

2 Skill Enhancement Courses 4 Papers of 4 Credit Hrs. each (Total Credit Hrs. 4X4)

(4 Lectures and 1 Tutorial)

16

3 Core Discipline 12 Papers of 6 Credit Hrs. each (Total Credit Hrs. 12X6)


72

4 Elective Courses (Core Discipline)



18

5 Elective Courses (Inter Disciplinary)



18

Total Credit Hrs

128


B.A. (Vocational Studies)Materials Management : Three-Year (6-Semester)

CBCS Programme

Course Structure

B.A. (VS) Materials Management

Semester – I 1.1 Environmental Studies/ Language:

English/Hindi/Modern Indian Language Ability Enhancement Compulsory Course (AECC)

1.2 English/ MIL I Core Discipline

1.3 Materials Management : An Overview Core Discipline

1.4 Principles of Microeconomics Core Discipline

Semester – II 2.1 Language: English/Hindi/Modern Indian

Language/ Environmental Studies Ability Enhancement Compulsory Course (AECC)

2.2 MIL / English I Core Discipline

2.3 Stores Keeping and Stores Accounting Core Discipline

2.4 Macroeconomics Core Discipline

Semester – III 3.1 English/ MIL II Core Discipline

3.2 Purchase Management-I Core Discipline

3.3 Indian Economy – Sectoral Issues Core Discipline

3.4 Computer Concepts and Software Packages Skill Enhancement Course (SEC)

Semester – IV 4.1 MIL / English II Core Discipline


4.2 Purchase Management-II Core Discipline

4.3 Labour and Development in India Core Discipline

4.4 Business Communications Skill Enhancement Course (SEC)

Semester – V 5.1 Inventory System and Control Techniques Elective Core – Discipline Based

5.2 Internship Project / Project Core Discipline

5.3 Financial Accounting

Corporate Laws

Elective Core – Generic

5.4 Productivity Management Skill Enhancement Course (SEC)

Semester – VI 6.1 Material Logistics and Distribution Management Elective Core – Discipline Based

6.2 Globalization

Supply Chain Management

Elective Core – Discipline Based

6.3 Business Law

Materials Planning and Control

Elective Core – Generic

6.4 Quality Management Skill Enhancement Course (SEC)


B.A.(Vocational Studies) Materials Management Semester I

PAPER- 1.3 : Materials Management : An Overview

Objectives

To introduce the student to the concept, functions, objectives and importance of material management function in an organization. Also to give him an elementary idea of material management linkages with other areas of management, supply chain management and production processes.

Unit 1 10

Introduction to Materials Management : Meaning, definition, scope and functions of Materials Management, Objectives and Advantages of Materials Management. Interfaces of Materials Management : Internal and external interfaces. Organisation for Material Management

Unit II 15

Supply Chain Management : Concept, objectives of supply – production and distribution system, Role and Management of flow of material in supply chain management.

Unit III 15

Material Management Linkages : Linkages with other functional areas of Management i.e. Production, Accounting and Finance, Marketing, HRM, IT, TQM. A Brief discussion on the functions of each functional area of Management.

Unit IV 15

Elements of Production Processes: Familiarity with broad categories of production processes used in industries. Commonly used machines and tools in industries.

Unit V 10

Cost Involved in material management : General discussion on concept of costs and cost classification, specific costs associated with Material Management.


Suggested Readings

Dutta A.K., Materials Management: Procedures, Text and cases, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.

Gopalakrishnan, P. and Sundareson, M., Materials Management: An Integrated Approach, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.

Varma, M.M., Essentials of Storekeeping and Purchasing, Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi.

Shah N.M. An Integrated concept of Materials Management, Indian Institute of Materials Management, Baroda Branch, Baroda.

Sharma S.C., Material Management and Materials Handling, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi.

Arnold, Champman and Ramakrishnan, Introduction to Materials Management 5th ed., 2007 Pearson Education, Inc.

Pooler Victor H. Purchasing and Supply Management, Creating the Vision, New York, Chapman & Hall, 1997.

Moore, J.M., Plant layout and Design, Macmillan New York.


B.A.(Vocational Studies) Materials Management Semester I

Paper 1.4 Principles of Microeconomics

Duration: 3 hours Marks: 100 lectures: 65

Objectives: This course intends to expose the student to the basic concepts in Microeconomics, Which is the study of the economic behaviour of small economic groups such as families and firms. The broad subject matter of Microeconomics is making decisions on the allocation of limited resources available with individuals, firms and organizations. Typically, it applies to the markets where goods and services are bought and sold with a goal of maximizing benefits.

Unit- I 15

Introduction: Scarcity, choice, opportunity cost and production possibility frontier;

Demand and supply: law of demand, determinants of demand, shifts of demand curve

versus movements along a demand curve, market demand; law of supply, determinants of

supply, shifts of supply versus movements along a supply curve, market supply, market

equilibrium.

Unit- II 10

Demand and Supply: Applications of demand and supply: price rationing, price floors, consumer surplus, producer surplus.

Elasticity: price elasticity of demand, calculating elasticity, determinants of price elasticity, cross and income elasticity.

Unit- III 10

Consumer Theory: Budget constraint, concept of utility, diminishing marginal utility, indifference curves, Price, income and substitution effects.

Unit- IV 15

Production and Costs: Production: production functions, law of variable proportions, returns to scale, isoquant and isocost lines, producer equilibrium

Costs: costs in the short run, costs in the long run, revenue and profit maximizations, economies and diseconomies of scale,


Unit- V 15

Market Structures

Perfect Competition: theory of a firm under perfect competition, equilibrium of the firm in the short run and long run

Imperfect Competition: Monopoly: short run and long run equilibrium; comparison of perfect competition and monopoly, price discrimination;

Suggested Readings:

Lipsey, R. and Alec Chrystal: Economics, Oxford University Press, Twelfth Edition, 2011

Case, Karl E. & Ray C. Fair: Principles of Economics, Pearson Education, Inc., 8th edition, 2007.


B.A.(Vocational Studies) Materials Management Semester II

Paper 2.3Stores Keeping and Stores Accounting


Objectives:To apprise the students about the store-keeping function and the accounting procedure involved in it.

Unit I 10

Storekeeping : Introduction, objectives and functions of storekeeping, location and layout of stores. Types of stores.

Unit II 25

Receipt of Materials : Receipt procedure, inspection and testing of materials, Rejection and Returns of materials. Forms used in receiving of materials like Material Received Note, Inspection Report, Rejection Report etc. Passing of Bills/invoices for payment.

Codification of Materials : Need for codifications of materials, different methods of codification of materials, suitability criteria.

Unit III 15

Issue of Materials : Issue procedure and documents used, store records like bincard and store ledger, pricing of material issues – different methods like FIFO, LIFO, Simple average, weighted average, standard price, Replacement / market price etc.

Unit IV 5

Material loses: Meaning, accounting treatment and control of different type of material losses (waste, scrap, spoilage, defectives, obsolescence etc.).

Unit V 10

Store Handling Equipments : Advantages of using stores handling equipments, Types of handling equipments: manual and mechanical devices.


Suggested Readings

Dutta A.K., Mateerials Management: Procedures, Text and cases, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.






Menon K.S. (1995) Purchasing and Inventory Control, 3rd Ed. Wheeler Publishing, Allahabad.

Saxena V.K. &Vashisht C.D.: Cot Accounting, Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi.

Maheshwari and Mittal, Cost Accounting : Principles and Practice, Shree Mahavir Book Depot, Delhi-6.

Arora M.N. Cost Accounting, Vikash Publishing House Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi.


B.A.(Vocational Studies) Materials Management Semester II

Paper 2.4 Macroeconomics


Objectives: This course introduces students to the basic concepts in Macroeconomics. In this course the students are introduced to the definition, measurement of the macroeconomic variables. It explains how and why the economy grows and fluctuates over time based on the decisions made, in the aggregate, by consumers, businesses, and governments. As the world is shifting toward a global economy, the study of Macroeconomics helps the student to understand the overall macroeconomic environment under which one has to take economic decisions.

Unit-I 10

Introduction: Basic concepts and issues of Macroeconomics.

Unit-II 15

National Income Accounting: Concepts of GDP and National Income; measurement of national income and related aggregates; nominal and real income; limitations of the GDP concept.

Unit-III 15

Determination of GDP: consumption and saving functions, investment function, equilibrium GDP; concepts of MPS, APS, MPC, APC; Concept of multiplier, fiscal and monetary policies.

Unit-IV 10

IS-LM Analysis: Derivations of the IS and LM functions; effects of fiscal and monetary policies on equilibrium income

Unit-V 15

Balance of Payments and Exchange Rate: Meaning, Factors, current account and capital account, determination of exchange rate.

Suggested Readings:

1. Case, Karl E. & Ray C. Fair, Principles of Economics, Pearson Education, Inc.,8th edition, 2007.

2. Lipsey, R. and Alec Chrystal: Economics, Oxford University Press, Twelfth Edition, 2011


B.A.(Vocational Studies) Materials Management Semester III

Paper 3.2 Purchase Management I


Objectives

The Course equips the students about purchasing and its systems and procedure. It also gives an understanding of price forecasting, special purchase systems, pubic buying and online purchasing.

Unit I 15

Purchase Management: Introduction, importance and functions of purchase Department, Organisation for purchase function, centralized and decentralised purchasing, objectives of purchasing i.e. 6R’s of purchasing.

Unit II 15

Purchase Procedure : Pre-purchase considerations, standard purchase procedure, post-purchase issues. Standard form used in purchasing like purchase requisition, tender / quotation documents, schedule of quotations, purchase order, follow-up order, cancellation of order, Bill of Materials etc.

Unit III 15

Special Purchase Systems – Forward Purchase, Tender purchase, Blanket order, zero stock, Rate contract etc.

Price Forecasting: Price and Pricing impact, price negotiations and fixing. Purchasing under fluctuating prices, purchasing under uncertainty, Negotiations regarding quality, terms of contract, delivery, payment schedule, cash discount, quality considerations, etc.

Unit IV 10

Public Buying : DGS&D Rate contract, Buying from KendriyaBhandars NICSI etc.

Unit V 10

Online Purchasing : Concept, advantages, procedure of online purchasing and current online purchase practices.


Suggested Readings








Lee, L. and Dobler, D.W. (1984), Purchasing and Materials Management, McGraw Hill, New York.

Pertman, K.I. (1990). Handbook of Purchasing and Materials Management, Probus Publishing Company, Chicago.

Willets, W.F. (1969). Fundamentals of Purchasing, Appleton-Century-Crafts, New Delhi.

Saxena V.K. &Vashisht C.D.: Cost Accounting, Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi.



Paper 3.3 Indian Economy – Sectoral Issues


Objectives: This paper provides an overview of the development of the different sectors and their interrelations of the Indian economy. The study of the three broad sectors namely agriculture, industry and services would help the students understand the developments in different policy environment.

Unit-I 15

Agriculture: Trends in production and productivity, land reforms, land tenure system, land distribution. Agricultural labour, wages and employment and issue of under-employment. Capital investment, credit, Irrigation and supply of other inputs.

Unit-II 10

Agricultural Policies- Green revolution, pricing and procurement policies, PDS and support price.

Unit – III 15

Industry: Growth and Structure of industry. Industrial and licensing policies, large, small and cottage industries.

Unit-IV 10

Industrial finance, capital and multinationals. Cost of each source of finance

Unit –V 15

Service Sector: Growth and Structure of service sector – major components, linkages with other sectors, and importance in the national economy, informal sector.

Suggested Readings

Uma Kapila Indian Economy: Performance and Policy: Performance and Policy Dutt&Sundaram - Indian Economy



Paper 3.4 Computer Concepts and Software Packages


Unit I 5

Basic Concepts: Meaning, characteristics and applications of a Computer, Advantages and limitations of a computer, Meaning of Data, Information and Knowledge, Data types, data storage, data representation such as ASCII.

Unit II 5

Components of Computers: Hardware components: input devices, output devices, system unit. Software components: Application software: general purpose packaged software and tailor – made software, System software: operating system, interpreter, compiler, linker, loader.

Unit III 15

Operating System: Need and functions of an Operating System, Graphic user interface and character user interface. Windows environment: application and document, Windows interface such as icons, lists, menus, dialog box, etc. Desktop, control panel, system tools, utilities such as calculator, calendar, etc. Explorer: file types, attributes, names, folders, drives, devices. File functions: create, open, close, delete, rename, move, cut, copy, paste, etc.

Unit IV 10

Introduction to Networks and Internet: Meaning and types of networks - LAN, MAN and WAN, Internet, difference between internet and intranet. Basics: functions, growth, anatomy, Uses, Wireless and wifi, Internet services: ISP, types of accounts, World Wide Web: websites file transfer, browsing, searching.

Unit V 15

Office Applications: Meaning and applications of word processing,

MS-Word – formatting text, writing basic document using Word, Header and Footer, Page formatting, paragraph formatting, saving a document, printing a document. Meaning and applications of spreadsheets.

MS-Excel – creating a workbook, saving a workbook, editing a workbook, creating a series, use of basic formulae in Excel, use of functions in Excel, sorting data, creating simple charts.Meaning and applications of presentation. MS-PowerPoint – creating simple presentation including slide transitions, bullets, etc.


The Theory paper will be based on Units 1-4 only and the practical component will be based on Unit 5 only.

Suggested Readings

Absolute Beginner's Guide to Computer Basics by Michael Miller Fundamental of Computers by AkashSaxena, Kratika Gupta Fundamentals of Information Technology, Alexis and Mathew Computers Today, Donald H. Sanders. Basic Financial Accounting, J.R. Monga Computer Fundamentals, P.K. Sinha Double Entry Book-Keeping, T.S. Grewal and Grewal.

GUIDELINES FOR THE CONDUCT OF PRACTICAL EXAMINATION

Computer Concepts, Software Packages and Computerized Accounting

Time: 60 Minutes Practical 20 Maximum Marks: 25

Ques. No. Description of Question Marks Time Allowed

1 Lab testing of various concepts MS word, PPT and Excel as mentioned in Unit V.

25 60 minutes

Note 1. There will be no internal assessment in Practical component of this Paper.

2. 10 minutes time may be given to the examinees for adjustment of computers

before the practical.

3. Hard Copy of evaluation sheet and question paper will be given to examinees

And they will produce soft copy as answer sheet for evaluation.


B.A.(Vocational Studies) Materials Management Semester IV

Paper 4.2 Purchase Management II


Objectives:

To acquaint the student to ethical, legal, quality and other issues involved in purchase management. Also to give him an understanding of procedure for international purchasing and import substitution.

Unit I 10

Buyer- seller Relationship: Importance of good buyer-seller relationship, Relation with supplier-policies and issues in relationship, Ethical issues in purchasing.

Unit II 20

Legal issues in Purchasing: Law of Contract, Contract of Sale of Goods, Conditions and Warranties, Rules Regarding Transfer of Property. Negotiable Instrument Act, IT Act 2000

Unit III 10

Insurance Buying : Arranging adequate insurance cover and claim management.

Quality Control in Purchasing: Concept of Total Quality Management (TQM), Certification, Role of Material Management in TQM. Value Analysis and Value Engineering.

Unit IV 15

International Purchasing: Need for International Purchase, Direct and Indirect Buying. Procedure, Documentation and Legal-Framework of International Purchasing.

Unit V 10

Import Substitution : Research and Development, Transfer of Technology, Standardization, Problems in Import Substitution.

Suggested Readings




Varma, M.M., Essentials of Storekeeping and Purchasing, Sultan Chand and Sons,

New Delhi.





Bailky, P. and Farmer, D. (1977). Purchasing Principles and Techniques, Pitman, London.

Zenz, G.J. (1981). Purchasing and the Management of Materials, John Wiley, New York.

Combs, P.H. (1976). Handbook of International Purchasiong, Cahners Books, Books, Boston.

Hakansson H. (1982), International Marketing and Purchasing of Industrial Goods, John Wiley, New York.



Paper 4.3 Labour and Development in India


Objectives: The course is intended to equip the students with conceptual, legal, and empirical issues pertaining to labour in India. The focus of the course would be on the changing profile and position of labour in modern India. The role of the state, nation and International labourorganisations will be emphasized.

Unit-I 10

Patterns of development and changing forms of labour in india, Labour, employment and work – Meanings and changing forms .

Unit-II 15

Pre and post-colonial pattern of development –industrialization, planned development-pre and post reforms, Regulation of labour. Workers in unorganized sector-agricultural, Rural, Migrant, Bonded, Child and Women etc. Workers in Organized sectors- Industrial - Blue and White collar workers. Workers in Tertiary sector.

Unit-III 10

Labour protest and Trade Union Movement: Evolution of Trade Union Movement, Trade Union Movement in India. Labour protest and Industrial action

Unit-IV 15

State and Labour: Labour administration- union Govt. and State Govt., Mechanism of wage settlement, National commission on labour

Unit-V 15

International labourOrganisation in India: Role and structure of ILO, India and ILO

Suggested Readings:

Report of second National commission on Labour (2002) SukomalSen, Working Class movement in India Empowering Rural labour in India (ed), 1998, New delhi, R. RadhaKrishna and

A.N Sharma Rehabilitation of Child labour in India V.V Giri National Labour Institute,

NOIDA.



Paper 4.4 Business Communications


Objectives:To equip students of the B.A(VS) course to effectively acquire skills in reading, writing, comprehension and communication, as also to use electronic media for business communication.

Unit I 10

Nature of Communication Process of Communication, Types of Communication (verbal & Non Verbal), Importance of Communication, Different forms of Communication, Barriers to Communication Causes, Linguistic Barriers, Psychological Barriers, Interpersonal Barriers, Cultural Barriers, Physical Barriers, Organizational Barriers

Unit II 10

Business Correspondence: Letter Writing, presentation, Inviting quotations, Sending quotations, Placing orders, Inviting tenders, Sales letters, claim & adjustment letters and social correspondence, Memorandum, Inter -office Memo, Notices, Agenda, Minutes, Job application letter, preparing the Resume.

Unit III 10

Report Writing Business reports, Types, Characteristics, Importance, Elements of structure, Process of writing, Order of writing, the final draft, check lists for reports.

Unit IV 10

Vocabulary Words often confused, Words often mis-spelt, Common errors in English.

Unit V 10

Oral Presentation Importance, Characteristics, Presentation Plan, Power point presentation, Visual aids.

Suggested Readings

Lesikar, R.V. &Flatley, M.E.; Basic Business Communication Skills for Empowering the Internet Generation, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd. New Delhi.

Bovee, and Thill, Business Communication Today, Pearson Education Shirley Taylor, Communication for Business, Pearson Education Locker and Kaczmarek, Business Communication: Building Critical Skills, TMH

Note: Latest edition of text books may be used.


B.A.(Vocational Studies) Materials Management Semester V

Paper 5.1 Inventory Systems and Control Techniques


Objectives:

To apprise the students about inventory systems, valuation of inventories, inventory decisions and other inventory control techniques.

Unit I 10

Inventories : Meaning, types of inventories, definition as per relevant accounting standard, Need and benefit of holding inventories, objectives of inventory management.

Unit II 15

Inventory systems and Valuation of Inventories: Periodic inventory system, Perpetual inventory system including continuous stock taking. Valuation of inventories as per relevant accounting standard under different methods and systems, valuation as per LIFO Method also. Inventory methods with specific reference to different industries

Unit III 25

Inventory Decisions: Types of inventory decisions, relevant costs involved in inventory decisions. Quantity order decision – Economic Order Quantity and its calculation as per tabular, graphical and mathematical approaches, EOQ with quantity discount, Re-order decision : Fixation of Various levels and determination of re-order point, safety stock etc. Q System, P system.

Unit IV 15

Other Inventory Control Techniques: Selective Inventory Control – ABC Analysis, Material, Turnover Ratio: Calculation and Importance, FSN Analysis, JIT Approach, VED Analysis. Management of Process Inventories (WIP). Spares Parts Management


Suggested Readings

Monga J.R. Financial Accounting, Mayur Paperbacks, New Delhi.

Sehgal, Ashok and Sehgal Deepak, Financial Accounting, Taxmann’s New Delhi.

Singh, Surender and Kaur, Rajeev, Basic Financial Management, Mayur Paperbacks, New Delhi.

Saxena V.K. &Vashisht C.D.: Cost Accounting, Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi.

Tulsian PC, Financial Accounting, Pearson Education.

Maheshwari and Mittal, Cost Accounting : Principles and Practice, Shree Mahavir Book Depot, Delhi-6.

Arora M.N. Cost Accounting, Vikash Publishing House Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi.



Paper 5.2 Internship Project/ Project

Marks: 100 lectures: 20

Objectives: to provide basic and hand on understanding of the industry.

Note:

Each student of Vocational Courses shall undergo Practical Internship of four weeks during the vacations after fourth semester in an approved Business/Industrial/Govt./Service organization. The objective of this training is to make the student acquainted with the industrial / business working environment. After completion of the training they will have to submit a training report. The internship/project reports will carry 100 marks. It will be evaluated by two examiners (one internal and one external). The training report is part of the fifth semester. It is to be submitted by the date fixed by the College.

The students will also have to submit a performance certificate from the company where he/she undertook the training. This report will also be considered while evaluating the training report by examiners.

Alternatively, if it is not possible to do industrial internship the students will prepare a project report on a topic assigned to him/ her by the college. The project report will be evaluated as above.



Paper 5.3 Financial Accounting


Objectives:

To make the student familiar with generally accepted accounting principles of financial

accounting and their applications in business organizations excluding corporate entitles.

Unit- I 15

Financial Accounting: Nature and scope, Limitations of Financial Accounting. Basic

Concepts and Conventions, Accounting Standards: Meaning, Significance, Generally

Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP). Accounting Process: From recording of transactions

to preparation of final accounts. Rectification of errors and Bank Reconciliation statement.

Unit- II 15

(i) Consignments: Features, Accounts treatment in the books of the consignor and

consignee.

(ii) Joint Ventures: Accounting procedures: Joint Bank Account, Records Maintained by co-

venturer of (a) all transactions (b) only his own transactions. (Memorandum joint venture

account).

(iii)Inland Branches: Dependent branches only and Ascertainment of Profit by Debtors

method and Stock and Debtors method.

Unit- III 10

Depreciation Accounting: Meaning of depreciation, causes, objects of providing depreciation,

factors affecting depreciation, accounting treatment including provision for depreciation

accounting. Methods of deprecation: straight line method and diminishing balance method.

Accounting for Hire Purchase Transactions, Journal entries and ledger accounts in the books

of Hire Vendors and Hire Purchaser for large value items including Default and repossession.

Unit- IV 10


Partnership: Admission, Retirement, Dissolution of Partnership Firms: Legal Position,

Accounting for simple dissolution.

Unit- V 15

Analysis of financial statements, Common size balance sheet, Ratio analysis, Cash Flow

statement.

List of Reading

1. J.R. Monga, Basic Financial Accounting, Mayur Paper backs, Darya Gang, New Delhi 2. S.N. Maheshwari, Financial Accounting, Vikas Publication, New Delhi 3. P.C. Tulsian, Financial Accounting, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi 4. Ashok Sehgal and Deepak Sehgal, Fundamentals of Financial Accounting, Taxmann,

New Delhi 5. R. NarayanaSwamy, “Financial Accounting” PHI Pvt., New Delhi 6. S.P. Jain and K.L. Narang, Advanced Accounting, Kalyani Publishers New Delhi 7. Ashok Sehgal and Deepak Sehgal, Fundamentals of Financial Accounting, Taxmann,

New Delhi 8. Naseem Ahmed, Nawab Ali Khan, M.L. Gupta, Financial Accounting, Ane Books Pvt.

Ltd. New Delhi

Note: Latest edition of text book may be used.



Paper 5. 3 Corporate Laws


Objectives

The objective of the course is to impart basic knowledge of the provisions of the Companies Laws and the Depository Laws along with relevant case law.

Unit I 15

Introduction: Characteristics of a company, concept of lifting of corporate veil, Types of companies, association not for profit, illegal association, Formation of company – Promoters, their legal position, pre-incorporation contract and provisional contracts. Documents – Memorandum of Association, Articles of Association, Doctrine of Constructive Notice and Indoor Management, Prospectus and Book Building process.

Unit II 15

Share Capital – issue, allotment and forfeiture of share, demat of share, transmission of shares, buyback, share certificate and share warrant, Members and shareholder – their rights and duties. shareholders meetings, kinds, convening and conduct of meetings, AGM, EGM, Class meetings.

Unit III 10

Management – Directors, classification of directors, dis-qualifications, appointment, legal position, powers and duties, disclosures of interest, removal of directors, board meetings, Key managerial personnel and remuneration, Dividend Provisions and issue of bonus shares. Investigations. Audit and accounts

Unit IV 15

Winding up – concept and modes of winding up, Emerging issues in company law: One Person Company (OPC), Small Company, Postal Ballot, Small Shareholders on Board, Director Identity Number (DIN), Corporate Identity Number (CIN), MCA-21, Online Filing of Documents, Online Registration of Company,National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT), Limited Liability Partnership (LLP), Insider Trading,Rating Agencies, Producer Company – concept and formation.


Unit V : 10

Depositories Act 1996: Definitions, Rights and Obligations of Depositories, Participants Issuers and Beneficial Owners, Inquiry and Inspections, Penalty.

Suggested Readings:

Kuchhal MC “Company law ” Mahavir Publications DagarInderjeet and AgnihotriAnurag “Corporate laws” Galgotia publishing company,

New Delhi Sharma J. P, “An Easy Approach to Corporate Laws”, Ane Books Pvt Ltd, New Delhi. Singh Avtar “Company Law” Allahabad Law House Bharat Law House, New Delhi, “Manual of Companies Act, Corporate Laws and SEBI

Guidelines”. Kannal, S., & V.S. Sowrirajan, “Company Law Procedure”, Taxman‟s Allied Services

(P) Ltd., New Delhi (Latest Edn) Charlesworth& Morse, “Company Law”, Sweet & Maxwell”, London, U.K. Gowar, LCB, “Principles of Modern Company Law”, Stevens & Sons, London.



Paper 5.4 Productivity Management


Objectives:

To familiarize students with the different concepts of productivity management and to apply them in business.

Unit I 10

Introduction: Productivity concepts – Macro and Micro factors of productivity, productivity benefit model, productivity cycles.

Value Analysis and Value Engineering: Concept – Procedure – Application and role in Productivity.

Unit II 10

Productivity Models: Productivity Measurement at International, National and organization level, total productivity models. Productivity Management in manufacturing and service sector. Productivity evaluation models, productivity improvement model and techniques.

Unit III 10

Work Study: Importance of work study – Method Study and Work Measurement – Pioneers of Performance Measurement.

Method Study: Method and Method Study – Need for Method Study – Procedure of Method Study – Principles of Motion Economy.

Unit IV 10

Work Measurement: Techniques of Work Measurement including Estimating, Stopwatch Time Study, Predetermined Time Standards, Synthetic Estimates of Work Times, Activity Sampling. Computation of Standard Time – Elements – Types of Elements – Performance Rating – Allowances – Need for Allowances – Types of Allowances

Unit V 10

Business Process Reengineering: Concept of BPR, process of BPR, prerequisites for effective BPR implementation, application of BPR in productivity improvement.

TPM: Meaning and objectives of TPM; Methodology of TPM, gains of TPM.


Suggested Readings:

1. Productivity engineering and management - Sumanth, D.J. - Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi 1990.

2. Organisational transformation and process re-engineering - Edsomwan, J.A.,British Library Cataloging in Pub. data 1996.

3. Productivity Plus: How Today's Best Run Companies Are Gaining the Competitive Edge - John G., Jr. Belcher - Butterworth-Heinemann

4. Business Process Improvement: The Breakthrough Strategy for Total Quality,Productivity and Competitiveness - H. James Harrington - McGraw-Hill

5. Handbook for Productivity Measurement and Improvement - Carl G. Thor - Productivity Press

6. Re-engineering and re-inventing the enterprise - Rastogi, P.N., - Wheeler publications, New Delhi 1995.

7. Productivity Management – Systems approach - Premvrat, Sardana, G.D. and Sahay, B.S. - Narosa Publications, New Delhi, 1998.

8. The new Manufacturing Architecture – Mahadevan

9. Work Study – ILO


B.A.(Vocational Studies) Materials Management Semester VI

Paper 6.1 Material Logistics and Distribution Management


Objectives:

The course acquaints the student to the concept and importance of material logistics and distribution task like transportation and warehousing.

Unit I 10

Material Logistics : Concept and Importance of Material Logistics. Logistic Tasks:Follow-up of Order, Transportation, Warehousing, Inventory Control, Information Monitoring. Logistic Planning: Major Aspects and Factors.

Unit II 15

Transportation: A Brief Study of different modes of transport used for movement of materials, their relative advantages, disadvantages and suitability.

Road Transport: Road System, Role of Road Transport in Movement of Materials, Role of National Highway Authority of India, Limitations of Road Transport System, Consignment Note. Rail transport: India Railway Network and Role in Transportation of Materials and Cargo, Consignment Note. Unit III 15 Air transport : Role of Air Transport in Domestic and International Transportation of Goods. Role of Ministry of Civil Aviation, Airport Authority of India and Directorate General of Civil Aviation, Air Waybill, Contract of Affraightment. Water transport : Inland Water Transport : Role of Inland Water Transport Inland Waterways: Inland Waterways Authority of India. Ocean transport : Role of Ocean Transport in International Trade, Structure of Shipping Services – Liner Shipping and Tramp/Charter Shipping, Conference System and Determination of Rates, Bill of Lading and Charter Party. Unit IV 10 Multi-Model Transport System : Concept and advantages of Multi-Model Transport System. Containerization: Need and Advantages of Containerization, Inland Container Depots (ICDs) and Container Freight Stations (CFSs).

Unit V 15


Warehousing : Concept of Warehousing (Warehouse, Depositor and Warehouseman), Elements and Functions of Warehousing. Role of Warehousing in Economic Development, Types of Warehousing, Advantages of a Public Warehouse, Costs Associated with Warehousing, Warehousing Corporations in India, Objectives and Functions of Warehousing Corporations.

Suggested Readings Dutta A.K., Materials Management: Procedures, Text and cases, Prentice Hall of India

Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. Gopalakrishnan, P. and Sundareson, M., Materials Management: An Integrated

Approach, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. Varma, M.M., Essentials of Storekeeping and Purchasing, Sultan Chand and Sons,

New Delhi. Shah N.M. An Integrated concept of Materials Management, Indian Institute of

Materials Management, Baroda Branch, Baroda. Sharma S.C., Material Management and Materials Handling, Khanna Publishers, New

Delhi. Arnold, Champman and Ramakrishnan, Introduction to Materials Management 5th

ed., 2007 Pearson Education, Inc. Pooler Victor H. Purchasing and Supply Management, Creating the Vision, New York,

Chapman & Hall, 19997. Dutta A.K., Material Management, Inventory Control and Logistics, Jaicoi Publishing

House, Mumbai. Roy Chaudhary, E.K. : Logistics Management Sharma SC: Warehousing and Distribution. Gopalakrishna, P. and Shandilya M.S. : Stores Management and Logistics. Martin Christopher : Logistics – The Strategic Issues.



Paper 6.2 Globalization


Objectives: The Paper is designed to familiarise the students with the concept of globalisation and integration of developing countries with the world economy. The aim of the paper is to provide a critique of globalisation and stress on local/national policies than follow the one-size-fits-all approach.Globalisation Unit I 15

Meaning and contents of globalization- First and second phases of modern economic globalization. Benefits of globalization, expansion of markets, freer movement of goods, services and factors (labour and capital). Unit II 10

Role of globalisation in reducing inequality and poverty. Distribution of benefits of globalisation shared by developed and developing countries Unit III 10

Globalisation and the world economy - production, global value chains - a case of simultaneous integration and segmented production. Unit IV 15

Critique of globalisation – To what extent globalisation implies a rise of neo-liberalism. To understand the decline in the authority of the Nation-sate and reduction of policy space.Major brunt borne by social spending and decline of safety nets. Unit V 15

Global governance - IMF, World Bank and the WTO.Role of the WTO in governing the world trading systems. The way forward - stress on local/regional/national (context-specific) than global economy`

Suggested Readings

Deepak Nayyar, Globalisation Joseph Stiglitz, Globalisation and its discontents



Paper 6.2 Supply Chain Management


Objectives:

To acquaint the student about the production process pertaining to an Industrial unit and also to develop skills in the areas of Supply Chain Management.

Unit I 20

Statistical Presentation: Elements of data representation for (i) Tabulation and cumulative frequency, (ii) histogram, (iii) measures of central Tendency, (iv) Probability Theory (Basic concepts excluding non-conditional and Bayes Theorem)

Unit II 10

Quality Management Concepts: ISO Certification. Methods of Control: Product, Process, Risk, Evolution, Management Approaches, Quality Management Support System. R Chart, P Chart and X charts; Acceptance Sampling & OC Curve in production Control.

Unit III 15

Supply Chain Management: Supply management an organization spanning activity. How purchasing becomes supply management? Supply Management and the Bottom line. The four phases of supply management.(Generation of requirement, sourcing, pricing and post-Award activities). Supply management systems: B2B, Strategic Supply Management.

Unit – IV 20

Enabling Concepts in Supply: Buyer-supplier relationship: Developing and Managing collaboration and Alliance relationship. Cross-functional teams and supply-Management Activities. Challenges and problems with cross functional approach, ERP Systems, Negotiations and Bidding, Information sharing.

Suggested Readings

Vohra N.D., Quantative Techniques in Management, 3rd edition, McGraw Hill

Anderson, Sweeney & Williams, Quantative Methods for Business, South Western Cengage

Render Barry, Stair, Hanna &Badri, Quantative Analysis for Management, 10th Edition, Prentice Hall


SaxenaAnurag&KaushikSircar, Logistics & SCM, Jaico Publishing House.

Fawcelt, Ellram& Ogden, Supply Chain Management, From Vision to Implementation, Pearson education

Chopra S, Meinde P &Kalra D.V. SCM-Strategy Planning & Operation, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education

Bowersox D, Class J. David & Cooker, Supply Chain Logistics Management, McGraw Hill

Chitale A.K, Gupta RC, Material Management-Text & Cases, Eastern Economy Edition

Kulkarni& Ashok Sharma, SCM, Tata McGraw Hill



Paper 6. 3 Business Law


Objectives: The objective of the course is to impart basic knowledge of the important business laws along with relevant case law.

Unit I: The Indian Contract Act, 1872 20

Contract – meaning, characteristics and kinds, Essentials of valid contract - Offer and

acceptance, consideration, contractual capacity, free consent, legality of objects, Void

agreements, Discharge of contract – modes of discharge including breach and its remedies,

Contingent contracts, Quasi contracts

Unit II: The Indian Contract Act, 1872: Specific Contracts 10

Contract of Indemnity and Guarantee, Contract of Bailment, Contract of Agency

Unit III: The Sale of Goods Act, 1930 10

Contract of sale, meaning and difference between sale and agreement to sell, Conditions

and warranties, Transfer of ownership in goods including sale by non-owners, Performance

of contract of sale, Unpaid seller – meaning and rights of an unpaid seller against the goods

and the buyer.

Unit IV: Partnership Law 15

The Partnership Act, 1932: Nature and Characteristics of Partnership, Registration of

Firms, Types of Partners, Rights and Duties of Partners, Implied Authority of a Partner,

Incoming and outgoing Partners, Mode of Dissolution of Partnership

The Limited Liability Partnership Act, 2008: Salient Features of LLP, Difference between

LLP and Partnership, LLP and Company, LLP Agreement, Partners and Designated Partners,

Incorporation Document, Incorporation by Registration, Partners and their Relations,

winding up


Unit V: The Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 10

Meaning and Characteristics of Negotiable Instruments : Promissory Note, Bill of Exchange,

Cheque, Holder and Holder in due Course, Privileges of Holder in Due Course, Negotiation:

Types of Endorsements, Crossing of Cheque, Bouncing of Cheques

Suggested Readings

1. Kuchhal, M.C. and VivekKuchhal, Business Law, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi.

2. DagarInderjeet&AgnihotriAnurag “Business Law” Galgotia Publishing Company, New Delhi

3. Singh, Avtar, Business Law, Eastern Book Company, Lucknow.

4. Sharma JP, KannojiaSunayana, An easy approach to business Law, Ane books pvt.Ltd.

5. Maheshwari&Maheshwari, Business Law, National Publishing House, New Delhi.

6. GoyalBhushan Kumar and Jain Kinneri, Business Laws, International Book House

Note: Latest edition of text books may be used.



Paper 6.3 Material Planning and Control


Objectives: To apprise the student to the concept of material planning and control and various methods and techniques used for the purpose.

Unit I 15

Budgetary Control : Meaning of Budget, Types of Budgets, Budgetary Control System, Material Requirement Planning, Principal Budget Factor, Budget Manual, Preparation of Different Types of Budgets Like Sales, Production, Material Consumption, Purchase Budget etc. Fixed and Flexible Budget.

Unit II 10

Standard Costing : Meaning of standard cost, Standard Costing System, Material Cost Variance Analysis.

Unit III 20

Elements of Marginal costing and Decision making : Marginal Cost, Fixed and Variable Costs (Period and Product Costs), Marginal Costing System, Marginal Cost Equation, Profit – Volume Ratio, Break Even Point, Break Even Chart, Margin of Safety, Cost-Volume Profit Analysis and its Uses, Concept of Relevant Costs in Decision Making. Simple Decision Making Problems including Make or Buy Decision, Domestic versus International Purchase.

Unit IV 10

Computers in Material Management: Use of Computers in Material Planning, Purchase, Store, Issue and Inventory Control. Integrated Information System for Material Management.

Unit V 10

Evaluation of Material Management Function : Meaning and Procedure. Evaluation Tools and Techniques.


Suggested Readings

Maheshwari&Mittal , Management Accounting, Shree Mahavir Book, Depot, New Delhi.

Arora M.N., Management Accounting, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.

Jain IC, Management Accounting, Taxman New Delhi,

Saxena, V.K. and Vashist CD, Cost and Management Accounting, Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi.

Pandey I.M. Management Accounting, Vikas Publishing House (Pvt.) Ltd., New Delhi.

Singh & Gupta, Management Accounting, Pinnacle Learning, New Delhi.


Gopalakrishnan, P. and Sundarson, M., Materials Management: An Integrated Approach, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.




Paper 6.4 Quality Management


Objectives:The basic objective is to provide basic understanding of quality management.

Unit I 10

Quality, Strategic Planning, and Competitive Advantage: Brief History - Modern Developments in Quality - A Race Without a Finish Line. Definitions of Quality.Quality in Manufacturing and Service Systems. Economic Issues - Quality and Price - Quality and Market Share - Quality and Cost - The Taguchi Loss Function.

Unit II 10

Quality & Competitive Advantage.Perspectives on Leadership for Quality - The Balridge View of Leadership.The Deming Management Philosophy – Profound Knowledge – The Impact of Profound Knowledge – Deming's 14 Points for Management. The Juran Philosophy – The Juran Quality Trilogy. The Crosby Philosophy.

Unit III 10

Customer Focus: The Customer-Driven Quality Cycle – Identifying Customer Needs – Achieving Customer Requirements in Production – Implications of the Customer-Driven Quality Cycle.

Unit IV 10

Quality Function Deployment – The Quality Function Deployment Process - Building the House of Quality – Implementing Quality Function Deployment. Designing Quality into Services - Service Needs Identification – Service System Design. Customer Satisfaction Measurement Techniques - Customer Relationship Management Techniques.

Unit V 10

Quality Control and Quality Assurance, Managing and organization for quality: Quality Policy – Quality Objectives, – Leadership for Quality, Quality Management Standards: (Introductory aspects only):

a. The ISO 9001:2000 Quality Management System Standard

b. The ISO 14001:2004 Environmental Management System Standard

c. ISO 27001:2005 Information Security Management System

d. ISO / TS16949:2002 for Automobile Industry


e. CMMI Fundamentals & Concepts

1 | P a g e

M.A. BUSINESS ECONOMICS Course Scheme According to Choice Based Credit System

TO BE IMPLEMENTED FROM 2016-17

Time : 3 Hours

Maximum Marks : 100 Marks

Theory : 80 Marks

Internal Assessment : 20 Marks, Division of Marks as given below:

One Test/Seminar: 50% (For Each Paper)

One Class Test: 25 % (One Period Duration)

Attendance: 25% Marks of Attendance will be given as under:

91% onwards : 05 Marks

81% to 90% : 04 Marks

75% to 80% : 03 Marks

70% to 74% : 02 Marks

65% to 69% : 01 Marks*

*For students engaged in Co-Curricular Activities of the University only /authenticated medical grounds duly approved by the concerned Chairperson.

2 | P a g e

M.A. Business Economics [Course Structure & Syllabi under CBCS] TO BE IMPLEMENTED FROM 2016-17

Scheme of Examination for M.A.Business Economics

1. The M.A. Business Economics Course has been divided into 4 Semesters spread over 2 years. 2. Every Student of M.A. Business Economics Course has to pass 96 Credits (72 Core Courses

Credits + 20 Elective Courses Credits + 2 Credits in Semester-II and 2 Credits in Semester-III from optional Paper offered by other Departments of the Faculty of Social Sciences).

3. The M.A. Business Economics Course is of 176 Credits and every student has to pass 96 Credits to earn the Degree under Choice Based Credit System.

SEMESTER-I

PAPER CODE NOMENCLATURE EXTERNAL INTERNAL TIME CREDITS

CORE PAPERS L T P

MABE 101 MICRO ECONOMIC ANALYSIS 80 20 3 Hrs.

4 ½

Hrs./G -

MABE 102 MATHEMATICAL AND STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES 80 20

3 Hrs. 4

½ Hrs./G -

MABE 103 COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN BUSINESS ECONOMICS

80 20 3 Hrs.

4 ½

Hrs./G -

MABE 104 MANAGEMENT AND ORGANISATIONAL BEHAVIOUR 80 20

3 Hrs. 4

½ Hrs./G -

MABE 105 PUBLIC ECONOMICS 80 20 3 Hrs.

4 ½

Hrs./G -

MABE 106 SEMINARS 50

- ½

Hrs./G 2

Total 550 22

3 | P a g e

SEMESTER-II

PAPER CODE

NOMENCLATURE

EXTERNAL INTERNAL TIME CREDITS

CORE PAPERS

L

T

P

MABE 201

MACRO ECONOMIC ANALYSIS AND POLICY

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G -

MABE 202

FUNDAMENTALS OF ECONOMETRICS

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G -

MABE 203

ACCOUNTING FOR BUSINESS ECONOMICS

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G -

MABE 204

BUSINESS RESEARCH METHODS

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G -

MABE 205

INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G -

MABE 206

COMPREHENSIVE VIVA-VOCE

50 - - ½ Hrs./G 2

OESS-02

Candidate is required to take one Option Elective, other than Economics, from the Common Lists of Papers of Social Sciences (Syllabus enclosed in the end)

50 -

2 Hrs. 2

- -

Total 550 + 50 22 + 2

SUMMER TRAINING

Each student is required to go on 6 weeks summer training in any business organisation after 2nd semester

examinations. He/she has to prepare a training report on the project undertaken in the concerned business

organisation and submit a copy of this report duly certified by the authorised signatory from the same

business organisation. This project report is to be submitted latest by 30th November and will be externally

evaluated in the 3rd semester and carries a weightage of 100 marks.

4 | P a g e

SEMESTER-III

w.e.f. 2017-18

PAPER CODE

NOMENCLATURE


CORE PAPERS L T

P

MABE 301

ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT OF BUSINESS

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 302

ADVANCED MICROECONOMICS

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 303

SUMMER TRAINING REPORT 100 - ½ Hrs./G

4

MABE 304

SEMINARS 50 - ½ Hrs./G

2

OESS-12

Candidate is required to take one Option Elective, other than Economics, from the Common Lists of Papers of Social Sciences of the same Subject as taken in Semester-II (Syllabus enclosed in the end)

50 -

2 Hrs. 2

- -

ELECTIVE PAPERS

CHOOSE ANY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING ELECTIVE GROUPS

GROUP-I

ECONOMICS OF MARKETING

MABE 311

MARKETING MANAGEMENT 80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE INTERNATIONAL 80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G -

5 | P a g e

312 MARKETING

MABE 313

CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR AND MARKETING RESEARCH

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G -

GROUP-II

ECONOMICS OF FINANCE

MABE 321

ECONOMICS OF CORPORATE FINANCE

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 322

INVESTMENT AND PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 323

PROJECT MANAGEMENT 80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

GROUP-III

ECONOMICS OF HUMAN RESOURCES

MABE 331

LABOUR ECONOMICS 80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 332

ECONOMICS OF HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 333

ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

GROUP-IV

ECONOMICS OF AGRICULTURE AND RESOURCES

MABE 341 AGRICULTURE ECONOMICS

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G -

MABE 342 DEMOGRAPHY

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G -

MABE 343

ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G -

GROUP-V

ECONOMICS OF TAXATION

6 | P a g e

MABE 351 DIRECT TAXES-I

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 352 VAT AND SERVICE TAX

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 353 THEORY OF TAXATION

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

Total 650 + 50 26+2

SEMESTER-IV

w.e.f 2017-18

PAPER CODE

NOMENCLATURE


CORE PAPERS

L

T

P

MABE 401

CORPORATE STRATEGY 80

20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 402

INDIA IN THE CONTEMPORARY WORLD ECONOMY

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 403

ECONOMICS OF GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT

100 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 404

COMPREHENSIVE VIVA VOCE 50 - ½ Hrs./G

2

ELECTIVE PAPERS


GROUP-I


MABE 411 MARKETING OF SERVICES

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

7 | P a g e

MABE 412

INTEGRATED PROMOTIONAL MANAGEMENT

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

GROUP-II


MABE 421

FINANCIAL DERIVATIVES AND RISK MANAGEMENT

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 422

FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS AND MARKETS

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

GROUP-III


MABE 431

CROSS CULTURAL AND GLOBAL HRD

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 432

ORGANISATIONAL CHANGE AND DEVELOPMENT

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

GROUP-IV


MABE 441 INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 442

ECONOMICS OF INFRASTRUCTURE

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

GROUP-V


MABE 451 DIRECT TAXES-II

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 452 CORPORATE TAX PLANNING

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

Total 550 22

Total Marks: 2400

Total Credits: 176 GRAND TOTAL = 2400

8 | P a g e

MABE - 1st Semester Paper- MABE 101 (Core) Total Credit : 4 Time : 3 Hrs. Max. Marks : 100 External : 80 Internal : 20

MICRO ECONOMIC ANALYSIS

Note: (i) Nine Questions will be set in all and students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

(ii) Question No. 1 will be compulsory and will consist of 8 short answer type question of 2

marks each spread over the entire syllabus (2*8=16 marks).

(iii) For the remaining four Questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2 questions from each of

the four units (16 marks each).

Course Objective: As a foundation course, in this Paper, student is expected to understand the behavior of

an economic agent, namely, a consumer, a producer, a factor owner and the price fluctuation in a market.

The approach of this paper is to study the behavior of a unit and analysis is generally

static and in partial equilibrium framework. After studying this course the student shall be ready to take

higher courses in micro economic analysis to reach nearer to more practical and real aspects of the

consumers and firms.

Unit I

Consumer behavior: Law of demand, Basic ideas of demand estimation and forecasting; Indifference curve approach to demand: Price, Income and Substitute effects (Hicks); Applications of Indifference Curve Analysis; The Consumer’s Surplus (Marshall and Hicks); Elasticity (Price, cross, income) of Demand and Supply and their applications.

Unit II

Objectives of the firm; Production functions; Law of Variable Proportions; capacity utilization; Estimation of Production and Cost functions; Break Even Analysis; Equilibrium of the firm-single and multi-product firm; Theories of costs – traditional and modern; Analysis of economies of scale.

Unit III

Pricing and output decisions under different forms of market structure - Perfect Competition, Monopoly, Bilateral Monopoly, Price Discrimination and Monopolistic Competition (Chamberlin’s approach)

Unit IV

9 | P a g e

Different models of Pricing- Mark up Pricing, Marginal Cost Pricing, factor Pricing, Peak-Load pricing, Transfer pricing; Oligopoly – Non-collusive Models- Cournot, Bertrand, Chamberlin, Kinked-demand curve and Collusive models - Market sharing cartels, Price leadership models.

Reading List

Jones, Trefor (2004): Business Economics and Managerial Decision Making, USA John Keat,Paul G. and Young Philip K.Y.(1996) , Managerial Economics. : Economic Tools for

Today’s Decision Makers, Prentice Hall. Koutsoyiannis, A. (1979), Modern Microeconomics, (2nd Edition), Macmillan Press, London. Salvatore D(2006), Microeconomics-Theory and Applications, Oxford University Press Varian, H. (2003), Intermediate Microeconomics, East-West Press. Wiley and Sons

Damodaran, Suma,( 2006:. Managerial Economics, U.K.Oxford University Press. Mansfied, Edwin (1997): Applied Microeconomics,USA, W.W. Norton and Co. Pindyck and Rubinfeld (2002): Microeconomics, India, Prentice Hall, Archibald, G.C. (Ed.) (1971), Theory of the Firm, Penguin, Harmondsworth. Baumol, W.J. (1982), Economic Theory and Operations Analysis, Prentice Hall of India, New

Delhi. Boyes.W and Melvin. M , Micro economics, Houghton Mifflin Company Boston Newyork. Collel A.,Whinston and Green (2012), MicroEconomic Theory, Oxford University Press. Da Costa, G. C. (1980), Production, Prices and Distribution, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. Goodwin, Nelson,Ackerman and WeissKopf(2009), Micro Economics in context, PHI Learning

Private Limited. Gravelle,H.and Rees,R.(2008), Micro Economics, Dorling Kindersley. Green H.A.G. (1971), Consumer Theory, Penguin, Harmondsworth. Gupta K.R.(2009), Advanced MicroEconomics, Atlantic Publishers and Distributors LTD Healthfields and Wibe (1987), An Introduction to Cost and Production Functions, Macmillan,

London. Henderson, J.M. and R.E. Quandt (1980), Microeconomic Theory: A Mathematical Approach,

McGraw Hill, New Delhi. Hirshleifer, J. and A. Glazer (1997), Price Theory and Applications, Prentice Hall of India, New

Delhi. Jehle Geoffrey A.and Reny Philip J (2008), Advanced Micro Economic Theory, Dorling

Kindersley (India) Kreps, David M. (1990), A Course in Microeconomic Theory, Princeton University Press,

Princeton. Krugman, Paul and Robin Wells, (2008): Microeconomics,USA, Worth Publishers Layard, P.R.G. and A.W. Walters (1978), Microeconomic Theory, McGraw Hill, New York. Lipsey and Chrystal(2014), Economics, Oxford University Press Mankiw(2006),Principles of Microeconomics,Cengage Learning Mansfield Edwin, Applied MicroEconomics, W.W.Norton ,New York London. Sen, A. (1999), Microeconomics: Theory and Applications, Oxford University Press, New

Delhi. Sen,A.(2007), Micro Economics: Theory and applications. Oxford University Press. Varian, H. (2000), Microeconomic Analysis, W.W. Norton, New York.

10 | P a g e

MABE - 1st Semester Paper- MABE 102 (Core) Total Credit: 4 Time : 3 Hrs. Max. Marks: 100 External : 80 Internal : 20

MATHEMATICAL AND STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES

Note: (i) Nine Questions will be set in all and students will be required to attempt 5questions.





Course Objective: In order to understand economic problems clearly, the knowledge of quantitative

techniques in the area of mathematics and statistics is very essential. The students in this direction are

expected to have knowledge of concept of arithmetic and geometric progressions, matrix algebra, functions,

differential and integral calculus. Further, in the field of statistics, techniques of simple correlation and

regression, theory of index numbers and time series and knowledge of the concept of probability and

theoretical distribution should be clearly understood by the student. This course is meant to train the student

in a direction that one can use various statistical procedures for data analysis.

Unit I

Arithmetic Progression (A.P.) and Geometric Progression (G.P.): Definition, sum of A.P. and G.P. series, Arithmetic and Geometric means, Application of A.P. and G.P. in solving business problems

Determinants and Matrices: Determinants of second and third order, properties of determinant, simple problems, solutions of simultaneous equations and solutions of business problems involving simultaneous equations by Cramer’s rule, Definition of Matrices over real numbers, Types of Matrices, matrix operations, Transpose of a square matrix, Inverse of a matrix through adjoint, Application of matrices in solving business problems.

Unit II

Differential Calculus: Concepts of function, Limit and Continuity, Definition of derivative, Rules for differentiation, Derivative of a function of a function, Second order derivative, Maximum and Minimum of functions involving one variable only, Concept of partial derivative.

11 | P a g e

Integral Calculus: Rules for integration, Integration by substitution and by parts, concept of definite integral

Unit III

Correlation and Regression: Karl Pearson’s Coefficient of Correlation, Rank Correlation, Regression lines, Regression equations, Regression coefficients.

Index Numbers: Uses and Types, Tests for consistency, Base shifting, Splicing and Deflating of index numbers. Probability Theory: Probability–Classical, Relative, and subjective probability; Addition and Multiplication Probability models. Probability Distributions: Binomial. Poisson, and Normal distributions; their characteristics and applications

Unit IV

Types of Data and Statistical Analysis Procedures: Univariate, Bivariate and Multivariate (only overview); Sampling:Basic concepts, Random and Non-Random sampling.

Hypothesis Testing: Procedure based on Z, t, x2 and F-test and one-way ANOVA.

Reading List

Business Mathematics, and Statistics, R.K. Ghosh, S. Saha, New Central Book Agency (Pvt.) Ltd.Mathematics for Economics –Dowling E.T. –Schawn Series, McGraw Hill,

London. Mathematics for Business studies –J.K. Thukural –Mayoor Paperbacks. Mathematics and Statistics –Goel, Ajoy and Aloka, Taxman Allied Servies (P) Ltd.

Speigal, M. R. Theory and Prodblems of Statistics, McGraw Hill Book, London

Croxton, F. E., D. . Cowden and S. Kliein, Applied General Statistics, Prentice Hall, New Delhi.

Gupta S.C. and V.K. Kapoor, Fundamentals of Applied Statistics, S. Chand and Sons New Delhi.

Gupta S. C. Fundamentals of statistics, Himalaya Publishing house, New Dehlhi.

Gupta S.P. and Gupta M. P. Business statistics, Sultan chand and sons, New Delhi.

Quantitative Methods for Business and Economics by Adil H. Mouhammed, PHI, New Delhi, 2003.

Taro Yamane, Mathematics for Economists, PHI, 1973.

Black, J. and J.F. Bradley (1973), Essential Mathematics for Economists, John Wiley and Sons

12 | P a g e

MABE - 1st Semester Paper- MABE 103(Core) Total Credit: 4 Time : 3 Hrs. Max. Marks : 100 External : 80 Internal : 20

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN BUSINESS ECONOMICS






Course Objective: The growth and spread of computer and its invasive presence in every sphere of

intelligent human activity is forcing every educational system and discipline to adopt and integrate its

fundamentals into course curricula. It is to produce computer literate and well-educated post graduates who

can get not only employment but also create work and produce value added output in the society, for which

present syllabus is being designed. We believe this will make our new graduates more proficient, suitable

and fit to face the future challenges in society. The students will learn to solve problems with spreadsheets.

They will have fairly good knowledge of the e-commerce and e-governance.

Unit I

Introduction to Computer Fundamentals: History and Evolution of Computers; Classification of Computers and their applications; Hardware, Software and Types of Software; Operating System- Meaning and Functions; Types of memory; Input-Output Devices.

Application Softwares: Windows based operating system; Word Processing – Document Management and Formatting; Main Features of MS Access and Presentation software.

Unit II

Problem Solving with Spreadsheets; Spreadsheet as DBMS; Arithmetic & Geometric Progressions; Solution of Simultaneous Equation with Matrices; Mathematical, Statistical & Financial Functions; Graphical Analysis in Economics; Time-path of economic variables.

Unit III

13 | P a g e

Statistical Processing Techniques and Methods: Summarizing and analysis of data, Descriptive Statistics; Calculation of Mean, Correlation and Regressing analysis, Estimation of Growth Rates, Trends Forecasting; Construction of Index numbers; Moving Averages.

Unit IV

E-commerce-meaning, basis, scope; Electronic Transactions and security issues; E- governance in India; Use of IT for development; Information System for a business organization; Information flow and requirements; information system design approaches; Decision Support Systems; Data mining and analytics.

Reading List

Sinha, P.K. , Computer Fundamental, BPB Publications, New Delhi. Rajaraman, V. Fundamentals of Computers, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. Parameswaranm R. Computer Applications in Business, S. Chand and Company, New Delhi. Sudalaimuthu, S. and Anthony Raj S, Computer Applications in Business, Himalays Publishing

House, New Delhi. Goel, Sushil, Computer Application to Business & E-Commerce, Natraj Publishing House,

Karanl. Madan, Sushila, Information Technology, Taxman Allied Services, New Delhi. P.T. Joseph, S.J. , E- Commerce : An Indian Perspective, PHI Learning , New Delhi. Lipschultz, M.M. and S. Lipschultz , Theory and Problems of Data Processing, Schaum's

Outline Series, McGraw Hill, New York. David Whiteley, E-Commerce: Strategy, Technologies and Applications, Tata McGraw Hill,

New Delhi.

14 | P a g e

MABE Ist Semester Paper-MABE 104 (Core)

Total Credit:4 Time : 3 Hrs. Max. Marks : 100

External : 80 Internal : 20

MANAGEMENT AND ORGANISATIONAL BEHAVIOUR





the four units (16 marks each).students will attempt 1 out of 2 questions from each of the

four units (16 marks each).

Course Objective: The objective of this course is to familiarize the student with basic management

concepts and aspects of human behavior so that one can be prepared to take up the leadership roles

in one’s future career. The student will be able to perceive the organizational cultures in more

rational, positive and objective manner.

Unit I

Meaning, Nature and Importance of Management; Management Functions; Co-Ordination; Principles of Management; Major School of Management Thought: An Overview; Planning: Importance of Planning, Types of Plans, Planning and Decision Making Process.

Unit II

Process of Organizing and Control; Introduction to Organizational Behaviour in Management; Foundations of Individual Behaviour –Personality, Perception, Learning; Values; Attitudes

Unit III

Motivation; Job Design and Goal Setting; Group: Foundations of Group Behaviour; Communication and Group Decision Making; Interactive Conflict and Negotiation; Occupational Stress.

15 | P a g e

Unit IV

Leadership: Power and Politics; Organizational Theory and Design; Organisational Culture: Meaning, Importance and Characteristics of Organization Culture; Organisation Change: Significance, Forces and Resistance.

Reading List

Luthans, Fred, Organizational Behaviour, 7 th ed., McGraw-Hill, New York. Koontz, Harold, Cyril ‘O’ Donnell, And Heinz Weihrich, Essentials of Management,Fourth

Edition, McGraw-Hill, Singapore. Cook, Curtis, Phillip Hunsaker and Robert Coffey, Management and Organisation

Behaviour, McGraw Hill Co., New York, 2000. Griffin, Ricky W., Organisational Behaviour, Houghton Mifflin Co., Boston. Hellreigel, Don, John W. Slocum, Jr., and Richard W. Woodman, Organizational

Behaviour, South Western College Publishing, Ohio.

Hersey and Blanchard, Management of Organisational Behaviour: Utilising Human Resources, 7th ed., Prentice Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi.

Ivancevich, John and Michael T. Matheson, Organisational Behaviour and Management, Business Publication Inc., Texas.

Koontz, Harold, Cyril ‘O’ Donnell, And Heinz Weihrich, Essentials of Management, Fourth Edition, McGraw-Hill, Singapore.

Luthans, Fred, Organizational Behaviour, 7 th ed., McGraw-Hill, New York. Nelson, Debra L. and James Campbell Quick, Organizational Behaviour, West

Publishing Company, St. Paul.

Newman and Warren, The Process of Management: Concepts, Behaviour and Practice, Prentice Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi.

Newstrom, John W. and Keith Davis, Organizational B ehaviour: Human Behaviour at Work, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1997.

Rendolph, Bobbitt, H., Organisational Behaviour, 7 th ed., Prentice Hall, New Jersey. Robbins, Stephen P., Organizational Behaviour, 7 th ed., Prentice Hall, New Jersey. Robbins, Stephen P. and Mary Coutler, Management, 5 th ed., Prentice Hall of India Private

Ltd., New Delhi. Sharma, R.A., Organizational Theory and Behaviour, Tata McGraw -Hill, New Delhi. Steers, Richard M. and J. Stewart Black, Organizational Behaviour, Harper Collins College

Publishers, New York. Stoner and Wankel, Management, 10 th Ed Prentice-Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi.

16 | P a g e

MABE Ist Semester Paper-MABE 105 (Core)

Total Credit: 4 Time : 3 Hrs. Max. Marks : 100


PUBLIC ECONOMICS






Course Objective: This paper provides the core theories of public economics drawing its roots

from welfare economics. Role and functions of the Government in an economy have been changing with

the passage of time. Therefore, this paper goes ahead of ‘Public Finance’ which is traditionally been applied

to the package of those policies and operations which involve the use of tax and expenditure measures. While

budgetary policy is an important part to understand the basic problems of use of resources, distribution of

income, etc. There are vast array of fiscal institutions — tax systems, expenditure programmes, budgetary

procedures, stabilization instruments, debt issues, levels of government, etc., which raise a spectrum of issues

arising from the operation of these institutions. Further, the existence of externalities, concern for adjustment

in the distribution of income and wealth, etc. require political processes for their solution in a manner which

combines individual freedom and justice. This paper combines a thorough understanding of fiscal institutions

with a careful analysis of the issues which underline market efficiency, public choice, taxation and policies

for public enterprises.

Unit I

The Efficient Markets; The Problem of Externalities and their Internalisation; The Coase Theorem; Rent Seeking Costs and Political Process; Efficient Provision of Public Goods; Samuelson Model; Wagner Hypothesis; Thompson Mechanism; Clarke Mechanism; Lindahl- Wicksell Mechanism; Theory of Club Goods.

17 | P a g e

Unit II

Public Choice – Rational Voter Hypothesis; Characteristics of Majority Voting Rule; Buchanan and Tullock Model; Bowen-Black Model; Arrow’s Impossibility Theorem; Downs Model on Demand And Supply of Government Policy; Models of Bureaucratic Behaviour- Niskanen, Tullock, Breton- Brennan- Buchanan, Voting and the Leviathan Hypothesis.

Unit III

Efficiency and Equity Principles of Taxation; Tax Incidence – Partial and General Equilibrium Analysis; Excess Burden of Tax And its Measurement; Burden Controversy of Public Debt; Fiscal Federalism- Tiebout Model; Theory of Intergovernmental Grants.

Unit IV

Public Enterprises –Pricing Policy of Public Enterprises; Theory of Second Best; Capacity Constraints and Peak Load Problem; Social Cost Benefit Analysis- Measuring Economic Benefits and Costs, Determining Shadow Prices, Decision Criteria, Problem of Risk and Uncertainty.

Reading list

Boadway, Robin, “Public Sector Economics”, Cambridge, Winthrop Publishers Bruce, Neil, “Public Finance”, Addison- Wesley Educational Publishers, Inc. Jones. Philip and Cullis, Jones, “Public Finance and Public Choice- Analytical

Perspectives”, Oxford University press Stiglitz, Joseph, “Economics of the Public Sector”, W.W.Norton and Company, new

York/London Rosen, H.S., “Public finance”, Tata McGraw Hill McNutt, P.A., “The economics of Public Choice”, Edward Elgar Publishing Inc. Mueller, D.C., “Public Choice- I,II,III” Cambridge university Press, Cambridge Downs, A., “An Economic Theory of Democracy”, Harper and Row, New York Musgrave R.A and Peacock A.T., “ Classics in the Theory of Public Finance”, Mcmillan

18 | P a g e

SEMESTER-II

PAPER CODE NOMENCLATURE EXTERNAL INTERNAL TIME CREDITS

CORE PAPERS L

T

P

MABE 201

MACRO ECONOMIC ANALYSIS AND POLICY 80 20

3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G -

MABE 202

FUNDAMENTALS OF ECONOMETRICS 80 20

3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G -

MABE 203

ACCOUNTING FOR BUSINESS ECONOMICS 80 20

3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G -

MABE 204

BUSINESS RESEARCH METHODS 80 20

3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G -

MABE 205

INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS 80 20

3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G -

MABE 206

COMPREHENSIVE VIVA-VOCE 50 - - ½ Hrs./G 2

OESS-02

Candidate is required to take one Option Elective, other than Economics, from the Common Lists of Papers of Social Sciences (Syllabus enclosed in the end)

50 -

2 Hrs. 2

- -

Total 550 + 50 22 + 2

SUMMER TRAINING

Each student is required to go on 6 weeks summer training in any business organisation after 2nd semester

examinations. He/she has to prepare a training report on the project undertaken in the concerned business

organisation and submit a copy of this report duly certified by the authorised signatory from the same

business organisation. This project report is to be submitted latest by 30th november and will be externally

evaluated in the 3rd semester and carries a weightage of 100 marks.

19 | P a g e

MABE 2nd Semester Paper- MABE 201(Core)



MACRO ECONOMIC ANALYSIS AND POLICY






Course Objective: On account of the growing influence and involvement of the State in economic fields,

macroeconomics has become a major area of economic analysis in terms of theoretical, empirical

as well as policy-making issues. Macroeconomics has an extensive, substantive as well as methodological

content. It deals with the functioning of the economy as a whole, including how the economy’s total output

of goods and services and employment of resources is determined and

what causes these totals to fluctuate. The canvass of the study is the whole rather than the part because what

is true of parts is not necessarily true of the whole. This Paper is designed to make the student aware of the

basic theoretical framework underlying the field of macroeconomics.

Unit I

National Income and Accounts

Circular Flow of Income in two, three and four-sector economy.

Consumption function

Keynes’ Psychological law of consumption and implications of the law; Empirical evidence on consumption function; Reconciliation of short run and long run consumption function – Absolute Income, Relative income, Permanent Income and Life Cycle Hypotheses.

Investment Theories

Investment Function; The Marginal Efficiency of Capital Approach.

20 | P a g e

Unit II

Demand for Money

Classical and Keynesian approach (The Regressive Expectations model); Post Keynesian approaches to demand for money - Tobin (Portfolio balance approach), Baumol (Inventory approaches).

Supply of Money

Measures of Money Supply; Instruments of Monetary control; Mechanism of Monetary Expansion and Contraction (Deterministic and Behavioural models).

Neo-classical and Keynesian Synthesis

The Basic IS-LM model, Extension of IS-LM model with government sector, Labour market and Variable price level.

Unit III

Open Macro Economics

Mundell-Fleming Model under fixed and flexible exchange rates.

Theory of Inflation

Classical, Keynesian and Monetarist approaches; Structuralist theory of inflation; Philips curve analysis – Short run and long run Philips curve; Natural Rate of Unemployment hypothesis; Tobin’s modified Philips curve.

Unit IV

Theory of Business Cycles

Business Cycle Theories of Schumpeter, Kaldor, Samuelson and Hicks; Control of business cycles – Relative efficacy of Monetary and Fiscal policies.

Macro Economic Policy

Monetary and Fiscal Policy- Targets and instruments; The Great Depression; Lags in the effects of policies; Expectations and Reactions; Uncertainty and Economic Policy; Economic Policy - Rules vs Discretion .

Reading List

Ackley, G. (1978), Macroeconomics: Theory and Policy, Macmillan, New York. Blackhouse, R. and A. Salansi (Eds.) (2000), Macroeconomics and the Real World (2 Vols.),

Oxford University Press, London.

21 | P a g e

Branson, W.A. (1989), Macroeconomic Theory and Policy, (3rd Edition), Harper and Row, New York.

Dornbusch, R. and F. Stanley (1999), Macroeconomics, Irwrin McGraw Hill, Inc. New York, 7th Edition.

Heijdra, B.J. and V.P. Fredericck (2001), Foundations of Modern Macroeconomics, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Jha, R. (1991), Contemporary Macroeconomic Theory and Policy, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi.

Romer, D.L. (1996), Advanced Macroeconomics, McGraw Hill Company Ltd., New York. Shapiro, E. (1996), Macroeconomic Analysis, Galgotia Publications, New Delhi. Dernburg , T.F.and D. M.Mc Dougall, Macroeconomics, McGraw Hill International Book

Company. Frisch, H. (1983), Theories of Inflation, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

John Wiley and Inc, USA.

Lucas, R. (1981), Studies in Business Cycle Theory, MIT Press, Cambridge, Masscechusetts. Mankiw, N. Greogory (2000), Macroeconomics Macmillan Worth Publishers 4th Edition Mankiw, N. Greogory (2000), Macroeconomics Macmillan Worth Publishers 4th Edition Mankiw, N.G. and D. Romer (Eds.) (1991), New Keynesian Economics, (2Vols.), MIT Press,

Cambridge. Ruggles R. and N. Ruggles (1956), National Income Accounts and Income Analysis Mc Graw

Hill, Newyork. Sheffirin, S.M. (1996), Rational Expectations, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge. Taylor, L. (1983), Structuralist Macroeconomics, Basic Books, New Longman. Turnovsky, S.J. (1977), Macroeconomic Analysis and Stabilization Policy, Cambridge

University Press, Cambridge. Veniers, Y.P. and F.D.Sebold, (1977) Macroeconomics; Models and Policy

22 | P a g e

MABE 2nd Semester Paper- MABE 202 (Core)



FUNDAMENTALS OF ECONOMETRICS






Course Objective: Applications of economic theory need a reasonable understanding of economic

relationships and relevant statistical methods. The econometric theory thus becomes a very powerful tool for

understanding of applied economic relationships and for meaningful research in economics. This paper

accordingly is devoted to equip the students with basic theory of econometrics and relevant applications of

the methods. The topics covered in the course include application of single equation models to various

economic problems.

Unit I

Nature and scope of Econometrics; Types of Econometric Models; Nature of Regression Analysis; Classical Linear Regression Model; Test of significance of models; Functional forms of regression models.

Unit II

Nature, Tests, Consequences and Remedial Steps of problems of Heteroscedasticity; Multicollinearity and Auto-Correlation; Problems of Specification error; Errors of measurement.

Unit III

Dummy variable technique – Testing structural stability of regression models comparing two regressions, interaction effects, seasonal analysis, Piecewise linear regression, regression with dummy dependent variables; The LPM, Logit and Probit models – Applications.

23 | P a g e

Auto-regressive and distributed lag models – Koyak Model, Partial adjustment model, Adaptive Expectations; Almon’s Approach to distribute-lag models; Causality test, Granger test and Sim’s test.

Unit IV

Stationarity, unit root, co-integration, spurious regression, Dickey-Fuller test, Engle-Granger test, Random walk model, Forecasting with ARIMA modelling; Box-Jenkins methodology; Panel data techniques – Random and fixed effects model.

Reading List

Gujarati, D.N. (2010), Essentials of Econometrics (4th Edition), McGraw-Hill, New Delhi. Gujarati, D.N. (1995), Basic Econometrics (2nd Edition), McGraw-Hill, New Delhi. Pindyck, R.S. and D.L. Rubinfield (1976), Econometric Models and Economic Forecasts,

McGraw Hill Kogakusha, Tokyo. Amemiya, T. (1985), Advanced Econometrics, Harvard University Press, Cambridge, Mass. Baltagi, B.H. (1988), Econometrics, Springer, New York. Dougherty, C. (1982), Introduction to Econometrics, Oxford University Press, New York. Goldberger, A.S. (1998), Introductory Econometrics, Harvard University Press, Cambridge. Hill R.C., E.G. William and G.G. Judge (1997), Undergraduate Econometrics, Willey, New

York. Kennedy. P. (1998), A Guide to Econometrics (4th Edition), MIT Press, New York. Kmenta, J. (1997), Elements of Econometrics (Reprint Edition), University of Michigan Press,

New York. Koutsoyiannis, A. (1977), Theory of Econometrics (2nd Edition), The Macmillan Press Ltd.,

London. Krishna, K.L. (Ed.) (1997), Econometric Applications in India, Oxford University Press, New

Delhi. Maddala, G.S. (Ed.) (1993), Econometrics Methods and Application (2 Vols.), Aldershot U.K. Theil, H. (1981), Introduction to Econometrics, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. Croxton, F.E., D.J. Cowden and S.Klein (1973), Applied General Statistics, Prentice Hall, New

Delhi. Intrilligator, M.D. (1978), Econometric Methods, Techniques and Applications, Prentice Hall

Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey. Johnston, J. (1991), Econometric Methods, McGraw Hill Book Co., London. Chow, G.C. (1983), Econometrics, McGraw Hill, New York. Fanses, P.H. (1998), Time Series Models for Business and Economic Forecasting, Cambridge

University Press, New York. Hamonda, O.F. and J.C.R. Roley (1997), Time Series Model, Casuality and Exogeneity,

Cheltenham, U.K. Hansen, P.R. and S. Johanson, (1998), Workbook on Cointegration, Oxford University Press,

New York. Harvey, A.C. (1981), Econometric Analysis of Time Series, Phillip Allen, London. Dhrymes, P.J. (1970), Econometrics – Statistical Foundations and Applications, Harper and

Row Publishers, New York. Draper, N.R. and H. Smith (1966), Applied Regression Analysis, John Wiley, New York.

24 | P a g e

MABE 2nd Semester Paper-MABE 203 (Core)



ACCOUNTING FOR BUSINESS ECONOMICS






Course Objective: This is an important paper to bridge the knowledge gaps between business and

economics. This shall help integrating the concepts in financial and management accounting so that

the students can analyze the firm level data for business decisions. The paper involves theory and

practical techniques.

Unit I

Basic Accounting Theory: Accounting Concept and Conventions, Double Entry System, Accounting Equation, Journal, Ledger, Trial Balance, Trading & Profit And Loss Account & Balance Sheet, Understanding the Financial Statements of an Organization with Special Reference to Companies (Requirements of Schedule VI of Companies Act.)

Unit II

Concept of Marginal Cost, Marginal Costing and Absorption Costing; Cost Volume Profit Analysis; Break-Even Analysis, Assumption and Practical Applications of Break-Even Analysis, Decisions Relating Sales Mix, Make or Buy Decisions and Discontinuation of a Product Line.

Unit III

Standard Costing and Variance Analysis : Standard Costing as a Control Technique, Setting of Standards and their Revision. Variance Analysis – Meaning and Importance, Kinds of Variances and Their Uses Computation of Material, Labour and Overhead Variances.

Unit IV

25 | P a g e

Financial Statement Analysis: Tools for Financial Statement Analysis: Cash Flow Analysis, Ratio Analysis- Liquidity Ratios, Solvency Ratios, Activity Ratios, Profitability Ratios.

Reading list

I.M.Pandey, “Management Accounting”, Vikas Publications, , Noida R.L.Gupta, “Advanced Accountancy- Vol.1” , Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi Anthony A. Atkinson,Rajiv D. Banker,Robert S. Kaplan,S. Mark Young,

“Management Accounting”, Prentice-Hall of India Ashok Banerjee, “Financial accounting- a Managerial emphasis”, Excel books Asish K. Bhattacharyya, “Financial accounting for Business Managers”, Prentice-

Hall of India B.Lev, “Financial Statement Analysis : A New Approach”, Prentice Hall Inc.,

Englewood Cliffs, N.J., 1978 B.M. Lall Nigam,I.C. Jain, “Cost Accounting: An Introduction”, Prentice-Hall of

India B.M.Lall Nigam,I.C.Jain, “Cost Accounting: Principles and Practice”, Prentice-Hall

of India C.F.Lee, “Financial Analysis and Planning: Theory and Application”, Addison-

Wesley, Reading, Mass, 1985 Charles T. Horngren,Srikant M. Datar,George Foster, “Cost Accounting: A

managerial Emphasis”, Prentice-Hall of India Duncan Williamson, “Cost and management accounting”, Prentice-Hall of India Dutta, “Cost Accounting: Principles and Practice”, Pearson Education E.A.Helfert, “Techniques of Financial Analysis”, Richard d. Irwin Inc., Homewood,

Ill. 1977 G.Foster, “Financial Statement Analysis”, Prentice Hall Inc., Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,

1990 H. Thomas Johnson, “Relevance Lost- The Rise and fall of Management

accounting”, Harvard Business Hilton, Ronald W., “Management Accounting- Creating Value in a Dynamic

Business environment” Tata McGraw-Hill Horngren, “Cost Accounting: A managerial Emphasis”, Pearson Education J Sizer, “Insights into Management accounting”, Penguin Books J.C.T.Mao, “Quantitative Analysis of Financial Decisions”, Macmillan, New York,

1971 Jawaharlal, “Cost Accounting”, Tata McGraw-Hill Kaplan, “Advanced Management Accounting”, Pearson Education Khan, M.Y., “Cost Accounting”, Tata McGraw-Hill Kulshrestha, N.K., “Management Accounting- Concepts and cases”, Tata McGraw-

Hill Lynch, Richard M., “Accounting for Management Planning and control”, Tata

McGraw-Hill M. Bendrey, R. Hussey, “Essentials of Management accounting in Business”, Ane

Books Meigs, Robert F., “Accounting the basis for business decisions”, Tata McGraw-Hill Nitin Balwani, “Accounting and Finance for managers”, Excel Books Peter Atrill,Eddie Mclaney, “Accounting and Finance for non- specialists”, Prentice-

Hall of India

26 | P a g e

R. Narayanaswamy, “Financial accounting- a Managerial Perspective”, Prentice-Hall of India

R.S.Kaplan, “Advanced Management Accounting”, Prentice Hall Inc., Englewood Cliffs, N.J., 1982

Robert S. Kaplan,Anthony A. Atkinson, “Advanced Management Accounting”, Prentice-Hall of India

T.H.Naylor, “Corporate Planning Models”, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Mass, 1979

27 | P a g e

MABE 2nd Semester Paper- MABE 204(Core)



BUSINESS RESEARCH METHODS






Course Objective: This paper has been taken in this course so that the business economics students

can take up market surveys during their summer training and later in their career can opt for

business research. After studying this paper, the students will be able to design appropriate business

research methodology for taking managerial decisions. They will be able to collect & analyze data

by using suitable statistical procedures to write the research reports.

Unit-I

Meaning, Objectives and Motivation in research; Types of research; Research Process; Validity and

Reliability in research; Research Design: Features of a good design, Types of Research Design;

Basic principles of Experimental Design.

Unit-II

Sampling Design: Steps in Sample Design; Characteristics of a good sample design; Random

Samples and Random Sampling Design;Measurement and Scaling Techniques; Errors in

Measurement; Tests of sound measurement; Forecasting Techniques;Time Series Analysis.

28 | P a g e

Unit-III

Methods of data collection: Primary Data; Questionnaire and Interviews; Collection of Secondary

Data; Cases and Schedules; Testing of Hypotheses: Procedure for Hypotheses Testing; Use of

Statistical Techniques for testing of hypotheses;Sampling Errors.

Unit-IV

Testing of samples; Sampling Distributions, Sampling Theory: Determining size of the sample,

codification level; Internal Estimation; Chi-square Test - Analysis of Variance and Co-variance;

Interpretation of Data and Report Writing.

Reading list

1. Research Methodology - C.R.Kothari

2. Methodology and Techniques of Social Research - Wilkinson, Bhandarkar

3. Research Methodology - Dr. V.P.Micahel

4. Research Design & Methods - Kenneth S. Bordens

5. Business Research Methods - Donald R. Cooper

29 | P a g e

MABE. 2nd Semester Paper- MABE 205 (Core) Total Credit: 4 Time : 3 Hrs.

Max. Marks : 100 External : 80 Internal : 20

INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS






Course Objective: This course provides the students a thorough understanding and deep knowledge about

the basic principles that tend to govern the free flow of trade in goods and services at the global level. The

contents of the Paper, spread over various modules, lay stress both on theory and applied nature of the

subject covering benefits of trade, impact on balance of payments, foreign exchange position, international

monetary systems & institutions. The contents prepare the students to know the impact of free trade and

tariffs on the different sectors of the economy as well as at the macro level. The students would also be well

trained about the rationale of recent changes in the export-import policies of India. This paper has become

relatively more relevant from the policy point of view under the present waves of globalization and

liberalization.

Unit I

Theory of International Trade

Classical Theory of International Trade – Theory of Absolute Advantage, Comparative Advantage and Opportunity Costs, Empirical testing of Theory of Comparative Advantage.

Heckscher-Ohlin Model, Factor Price Equalization Theorem, Intra Industry Trade: Emergence and Measurement; Trade under Imperfectly Competitive Markets.

30 | P a g e

Unit II

Measurement of Gains from International Trade

Measurement of gains from trade; Concepts of terms of Trade, their uses and limitations; Hypothesis of secular deterioration of Terms of trade and its policy implications for less developed countries; Effects of Tariffs, Quotas and Non-tariff Barriers (NTBs).

Trade and Growth- Trade as an engine of economic growth; Import substitution v/s Export Push; The effects of growth on small and large countries.

Unit III

Foreign Exchange and Balance of Payments

Foreign Exchange Market: Meaning, Nature and Concepts; The Determination of Floating Exchange Rate; Expenditure-Switching Policies and Direct Controls; Determination of national income in an open economy.

Meaning and components of Balance of payments; Equilibrium and Disequilibrium in the Balance of payments; Process of adjustment of BOP under Gold Standard, Fixed Exchange Rates and Flexible Exchange Rates.

Unit IV

The International Monetary System and Trade Policies in India

WTO, UNCTAD, IMF, World Bank and Asian Development Bank: Functions, achievements and relevance to India.

Foreign Trade problems and Foreign Trade policies in India after liberalization; Working and Regulations of MNCs in India; FDI impact on Sectoral Growth in India; Recent Export and Import Policy of India.

Reading List

Chacholiades, M. (1990), International Trade: Theory and Policy, McGraw Hill, Kogkusha, Japan.

Cherunilam, F. (2008): International Economics, The Tata McGraw-Hill Companies, New Delhi. 5th Ed.

Dunn R.M. and J.H. Mutt (2000), International Economics, Routledge, London. Kindlberger, C P (1991): International Economics, R D Irwin, Homewood.8th Ed. Krugman, P.R. and Obstfeld, M. (1994), International Economics: Theory and Policy,

Glenview, Foresman.

31 | P a g e

Mishra, S.K. and Puri, V.K. (2012), Indian Economy- Its Development Experience, Himalaya Publishing House. 30th Revised Ed.

Salvator, D L (2001): International Economics, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle Rover, New York. Soderston, Bo. (1999), International Economics, The Macmillan Press Ltd. London. Yarbough, R.J. (1999), International Economics, International Thompson Publishing, New

York. Bhagwati J. (1988), Protectionism, Cambridge University Press, Mass. Brahmananda, P.R. and V.R. Panchmukhi (Eds.) (1987), The Development Process of the

Indian Economy, Himalaya Publishing House, Bombay. Dana, M.S. (2000), International Economics: Study, Guide and Work Book, (5th Edition),

Routledge Publishers, London. Goldsten, M. (1998), The Asian Financial crisis: causes cure and systematic implications,

Institute of International Economics, Washington D.C. Hufbauer G.C. and K.A. Elliott (1994), Measuring the Costs of Protection in the United States,

Institute for International Economics. Jackson, J. (1989),The World Trading System, Cambridge University Press, Mass. Joshi, V. and I.M.D. Little (1998), India’s Economic Reforms, 1999-2000, Oxford University

Press, New Delhi. King, P.G. (1995), International Economics and International Economic Policy: A Reader,

McGraw Hill International, Singapore. Maggi, G. and A. Rodriguez-Clare (1998), “The Value of Trade Agreements in the Presence of

Political Pressures,” Journal of Political Economy, 106, 574-601. Mishkin, S.F. (1998), The Economics of Money, Banking and Financial Markets, (5th Edition),

Harper Colins Publishers, New York. Panagariya, A. (2000), “Preferential Trade Liberalization: the Traditional Theory and new

Developments,” Journal of Economic Literature, 38, 287-331. Panchamukhi V.R. and R. Tandon (1987), Money and Finance in World Economic Order (RIS),

Indus Publishing Co. Delhi. Panchmukhi, V.R. (1978), Trade Policies of India–A Quantitative Analysis, Concept Publishing

Company, New Delhi. Patel, S. J. (1995), Indian Economy Towards the 21st Century, University Press Ltd., India. Pomfert, R. (1988), Unequal Trade: The Economics of Discriminatory International Trade

Policies, Blackwell Publishers, Oxford. Satyanarayan, B. (1986), India’s Trade with Asia and the Far East Countries, B.R. Publishing

Corp., New Delhi. Vanderbussche, H. and M. Zanardi (2006), “The Global Chilling Effects of Antidumping

Proliferation, “CEPR Discussion paper. 5597.

32 | P a g e

SEMESTER-III

w.e.f. 2017-18

PAPER CODE

NOMENCLATURE


CORE PAPERS

L T

P

MABE 301


80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 302

ADVANCED MICROECONOMICS

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 303

SUMMER TRAINING REPORT 100 - ½ Hrs./G

4

MABE 304

SEMINARS 50 - ½ Hrs./G

2

OESS-12

Candidate is required to take one Option Elective, other than Economics, from the Common Lists of Papers of Social Sciences of the same Subject as taken in Semester-II (Syllabus enclosed in the end)

50 -

2 Hrs. 2

- -

Elective Papers


GROUP-I


MABE 311

MARKETING MANAGEMENT 80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G -

MABE 312

INTERNATIONAL MARKETING

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G -

MABE 313


80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G -

33 | P a g e

GROUP-II


MABE 321


80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 322


80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 323

PROJECT MANAGEMENT 80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

GROUP-III


MABE 331

LABOUR ECONOMICS 80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 332


80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 333


80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

GROUP-IV


MABE 341 AGRICULTURE ECONOMICS

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G -

MABE 342 DEMOGRAPHY

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G -

MABE 343


80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G -

GROUP-V


MABE 351 DIRECT TAXES-I

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 352 VAT AND SERVICE TAX

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE THEORY OF TAXATION 80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ -

34 | P a g e

353 Hrs./G

Total 650 + 50 26 + 2

MABE 3rd Semester Paper- MABE 301 Total Credit: 4 Time : 3 Hrs.






(iii)For the remaining four Questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2 questions from each

of the four units (16 marks each).

Course Objective: This course provides the students a basic understanding and knowledge about

various components of economic business environment. They will be able to perceive possible

emerging opportunities and threats by analyzing the changes in economy, social-political setup,

legal-administrative systems & institutions, various policies in their proper context to formulate

business strategies.

Unit-I

35 | P a g e

Concept of business environment: Significance and nature, the interaction matrix of different

environment factors, the process of environmental scanning; Politico-legal environment:

Relationship between business and Government of India; Introduction to some important business

laws: Industrial (development and regulation) Act 1951, FEMA, SEBI Act, Consumer Protection

Act; Changing dimensions of these laws and their impact on business.

Unit-II

Economic environment: Philosophy and strategy of planning in India; Problem of poverty; Concept

of mixed economy: the public sector and the private sector, their changing roles; Industrial policy in

India in recent years; Policy with regard to small scale industries and labour; The monetary policy,

fiscal policy and union budget as an instrument of growth and their impact on business. Financial

institutions and their relevance to business operations; Multinational corporations (MNC).

Unit-III

Technological and socio-cultural environment: Policy for research and development in India;

Problem of selecting appropriate technology; Multinationals as source of technology; foreign

collaborations and joint ventures; Impact of culture and values: Salient features of Indian culture

and values and their implications for industrialisation and economic growth; Social responsibility

and Indian business.

Univ-IV

Liberalisation in India: The New Economic Policy; Globalisation; Policy changes for liberalisation-

Industrial policy; Exim policy; Banking policy; FDI policy; Reforms in capital market; Structural

reforms; Impact of reform measures, Salient Features of WTO.

Reading List

1) Adhikari M- Economic Environment of Business (Excel Books), 2000, 8th ed, Sultan Chand.

2) Ghosh- Economic Environment of Business (Vikas), 2004.

3) Morrison J- The International Business Environment (Palgrave, 2003).

4) Agarwal R- Business Environment (Excel Books), 2002.

36 | P a g e

5) Bedi S K- Business Environment (Excel Books), 2004.

6) George A and Steiner G A- Business, Government and Society (Macmillan)

7) Francis Cherunilam - Business Environment: Text & Cases (Himalaya Publishing House)

37 | P a g e



ADVANCED MICRO ECONOMICS




(iii) For the remaining four Questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2 questions from each


Course Objective: This paper shall broaden the thinking of the students to understand more

realistic models of the firm who have earlier studied the firm with Neo-classical marginalistic

approach. It will help them to analyze all the markets together in a general equilibrium sense. It also

bridges the theoretical gap between micro and macro economics to some extent. Finally, the course

focuses on newer concepts related with risk and uncertainty.

Unit I

Critical evaluation of marginal analysis; Average cost pricing model; Bain’s limit pricing theory; Baumal’s sales revenue maximization model(all four static models); Marris model of managerial enterprise; Williamson’s model of managerial discretion.

Unit II

Pricing of factors of production (perfect and imperfect market); Elasticity of technical substitution and factor shares, technical progress and factor shares; Factor pricing and income distribution; Product Exhaustion Theorems.

Unit III

The Walrasian and Input –output approaches to general equilibrium; Maximization of social welfare; Market failure; Externalities, Public goods, asymmetric information.

Unit IV Inter-temporal choice in consumption; Economics of Uncertainty - Decision rules under uncertainty; Individual behaviour towards risk: Risk, gambling, insurance decisions. Economics of information – search costs, market signaling.

38 | P a g e

Reading List Koutsoyiannis, A. (1979), Modern Microeconomics, (2nd Edition), Macmillan Press, London. Salvatore D(2006), Microeconomics-Theory and Applications, Oxford University Press Varian, H. (2003), Intermediate Microeconomics, East-West Press. Varian, H. (2000), Microeconomic Analysis, W.W. Norton, New York. Archibald, G.C. (Ed.) (1971), Theory of the Firm, Penguin, Harmondsworth. Baumol, W.J. (1982), Economic Theory and Operations Analysis, Prentice Hall of India, New

Delhi. Borch, K.H. (1968), The Economics of Uncertainty, Princeton University Press, Princeton. Boyes.W and Melvin. M , Micro economics, Houghton Mifflin Company Boston Newyork. Broadway, R.W. and N. Bruce (1984), Welfare Economics, Basil Blackwell, London. Collel A.,Whinston and Green (2012), MicroEconomic Theory, Oxford University Press. Diamond and Rothschild (Eds.) (1978), Uncertainty in Economics, Academic Press New York. Goodwin, Nelson,Ackerman and WeissKopf(2009), Micro Economics in context, PHI Learning

Private Limited. Graff, J. De. V. (1957), Theoretical Welfare Economics, Cambridge University Press,

Cambridge. Gravelle,H.and Rees,R.(2008), Micro Economics, Dorling Kindersley. Gupta K.R.(2009), Advanced MicroEconomics, Atlantic Publishers and Distributors LTD Hirshleifer, J. and A. Glazer (1997), Price Theory and Applications, Prentice Hall of India, New

Delhi. Jehle Geoffrey A.and Reny Philip J (2008), Advanced Micro Economic Theory, Dorling

Kindersley (India) Lipsey and Chrystal(2014), Economics, Oxford University Press Mankiw(2006),Principles of Microeconomics,Cengage Learning Mansfield Edwin, Applied MicroEconomics, W.W.Norton ,New York London. Quirk, J. and R. Saposnik (1968), Introduction to General Equilibrium Theory and Welfare

Economics, McGraw Hill, New York. Sen, A. (1999), Microeconomics: Theory and Applications, Oxford University Press, New

Delhi. Sen,A.(2007), Micro Economics: Theory and applications. Oxford University Press.

39 | P a g e

MABE 3rd Semester Paper- MABE 311 (Elective) Total Credit: 4 Time : 3 Hrs.


MARKETING MANAGEMENT






Course Objective: This course has been organized in a way that the student can understand the

consumers, their behavior, market opportunity and accordingly can take decisions to exploit this

opportunity. The student will learn to take decisions related with products, prices, and required

communication.

Unit I

Marketing: Meaning, Nature, Scope, Evolution and Importance. Modern concept of marketing. Ethics in marketing. Role of Information Technology in marketing. Challenges before marketers.

Unit II

Marketing Mix and STP ( Segmentation, Targeting and Positioning) Marketing Information System: Concept and Components of a marketing information system. Marketing Research: meaning, scope and techniques. Consumer Behaviour: meaning and importance, buying motives, buying process, factors influencing consumer behaviour.

Unit III

Product decisions: concept, classification, product-line decisions. New product development process, product life cycle, Packaging and Branding decisions. Pricing Concepts: objectives, policies and procedures, factors affecting pricing, pricing strategy and product life cycle, price changes and organizational strategies, product line pricing.

Unit IV

Integrated Marketing Communication: Promotion-Mix; Advertising, sales promotion, public relations, personal selling and direct marketing. Web-advertising; Use of social media in promotion;

40 | P a g e

Channels of distributions: Concept, types and factors affecting channel selection. Recent developments in marketing. Social, ethical and legal aspects of marketing. Marketing and information economy; Direct and online marketing.

Reading List

1 Michael J. Etzel, Bruce J. Walker and William J. Stanton; Marketing Concepts and Cases, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited.

2 Ajay Pandit, Michael R.Czinkota and Masaaki Kotabe; Marketing Management, Thomson, South Western.

3 Philip Kotler and Kevin lane Keller; Marketing Management, Pearson Prentice-Hall.

4 Dhru Greqal and Michael Levy; Marketing, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited.

5. V.S. Ramaswamy and S. Nama Kumari; Marketing Management, Macmillan Publisher India Ltd.

6. Rajan Sexena; Marketing Management, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited.

7. Ramaswami, V.S. and Namakumari, S.; Marketing Management; MacMillan India Ltd.

8. Grewal, Dhruv and Michael Levy; Marketing; Tata McGraw Hill.

9. Etzel, Michael J, Bruce J. Walker, William J. Stanton and Ajay Pandit; Marketing Concepts and Cases; McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

10. Kotler, Philip, Kevin Lane Keller, Abraham Koshy and Mithileshwar Jha; Marketing Management; Pearson Education.

11. Lancaster, Geoff and Lester Massingham; Essentials of Marketing; McGraw Hill International Ed.

12. Cundiff, Still and Govoni; Fundamentals of Marketing Management; Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.

13. Luck, David J. and Ferrell, O.C.; Marketing Strategy and Plans-Systematic Marketing Management; Prentice Hall of India , Private Limited, New Delhi.

14. Saxena, Rajan; Marketing Management; Tata McGraw Hill.

15. Raju, M S and Dominique Xardel; Marketing Management; Tata McGraw Hill

41 | P a g e

MABE 3rd Semester Paper- MABE 312



INTERNATIONAL MARKETING






Course Objective: The nature of this paper is applied and functional and it has its theoretical

foundation in International Economics already studied by the students in Semester II. The basic

purpose is to enable the students to understand many times complex international business

environment as compare to the local one. The understanding of WTO framework will help them to

develop differentiated marketing strategies simultaneously for many countries. They will learn to

cope with fast changing communication methods and global issues.

Unit I

International Marketing: Definitions, nature, scope and benefits; reasons and motivations underlying International Trade; Process of International Marketing; Domestic Marketing versus International Marketing, basic modes for entry. Introduction to theories of international trade.

Unit II

International Marketing Environment; Factors influencing International market selection and segmentation, Selection strategies. International Marketing Planning and Control. Tarrif and Not Tarriff Barriers to Trade; Trading in WTO regime; Environmental and Labour Issues.

Unit III

International Marketing Mix: International product policy and planning: International product mix, Product life cycle, product standardization and adaptation, and organization of product warranties and services. Branding, labeling, packaging, International pricing policies. Terms of payment in international transactions, dumping, counter trade, transfer pricing and grey marketing.

42 | P a g e

International Advertising: International advertising strategy, elements of advertising strategy, media strategy.

Unit IV

International Distribution Management: International Distribution Channels, International distribution policy, selecting distribution channels. Emerging issues in international marketing: Global e-marketing- Targeting the individual customers, relationship marketing, The role of information and communication technology . Reading List Vern Terpestra and Ravi Sarthy : International Marketing, Thosmson. Simon Majaro : International Marketing. John, Fayerweather : International Marketing. R. L. Varshney and B. Bhattacharya : International Marketing; Sultan Chand Publication, N.

Delhi. Sak Onkvisit and John Shaw : International Marketing ( Analysis and Strategy), PHI, N. Delhi. Rakesh Mohan Joshi: International Marketing, Oxford University Press.

43 | P a g e










Course Objective: This paper derives its theoretical inputs from behavioural subjects like

psychology, sociology, social psychology, economics and marketing management. It helps the

students to use the concepts from multiple disciplines to understand the consumer behavior. In

many ways, it is an application based paper relying on the theory of other papers. Further, it will

sharpen the marketing research skills particularly related with consumer behavior, communication,

sales, markets and products which were acquired in Semester II.

Unit I

Consumer Behaviour: Meaning, Nature, Scope and Significance; Consumer Research: Role and Process. Consumer Decision Making Process. Psychological Factors Influencing Consumer Behaviour. Theories and Principles of Perception, Learning, Motivation, Personality & Self Concept and Attitude and their Marketing Implications.

Unit II

Group Influences on Consumer Behaviour- Family and Reference Groups. Impact of Culture, Subculture and Social Class on Consumer Behaviour. Opinion Leadership and Diffusion of Innovation along with their Marketing Implications.

Unit III

Introduction to Marketing Research, Importance, nature and scope of marketing research; marketing information system and marketing research; Marketing research process, Ethical issues in MR. Problem Identification and Research Design: Problem identification and definition: Development of a research proposal: Types of research designs. Data Resource: Secondary data sources and usage;

44 | P a g e

Online data sources; Primary data collection methods - Questioning techniques, online surveys, observation method; Questionnaire preparation. Attitude measurement and scaling techniques - elementary introduction to measurement scales.

Unit IV

Sampling Plan: Universe, sample frame and sampling unit; Sampling techniques; Sample size determination. Data Collection : Organisation of field work and survey errors - Sampling and non - sampling errors. Data Analysis: Hypothesis testing, tests of significance (Parametric & non - parametric) Univariate, bivariate and multivariate data analysis; Report preparation and presentation. Marketing Research Applications: Product research; Advertising research; Sales and Market research.

Readings List

Boyd. H.W. Ralph Westfall and S.F. Starsh : Marketing Research: Text and Cases, Richard D. Irwin, Boston.

Chisnall, peter M: The Essence of Marketing Research, Prentice Hall, New Delhi. Churchill, Gilbert. A : Basic Marketing Research, Dryden Press, Boston. Green Paul E. Donald S. Tull and Gerald Albaum : Research for Marketing Decision, Prentice

Hall, New Delhi. Luck, D.J.: Marketing Research, Prentice Hall, New Delhi. Tull, Donald and Hawkin, Del : Marketing Research : Measurement and Method, Prentice Hall,

New Delhi. Beri, G.C.: Marketing Research, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

Schiffman, LG and LL Kanuk, Consumer Behaviour, Pearson Education Blackwell, RD, PW Miniard and JF Angel, Consumer Behaviour, Cengage Learning India

Pvt. Ltd. Peter, JP and JC Olson, Consumer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy, McGraw Hill. Handerson, S, Consumer Behaviour in Theory and Action, John Wiley and Sons. Assel,H: Consumer Behaviour- A Strategic Approach, Houghton Miffin. Loudon and A Della, Consumer Behaviour, Tata McGraw Hill. Hawkins, DL, DL Mothersbaugh and Amit Mookerjee, Consumer Behaviour: Building

Marketing Strategy, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., 11th Edition. Solomon, Michael R, Consumer Behaviour, Prentice Hall, 10th Edition, 2012.

45 | P a g e









Course Objective: The basic purpose of this course is to acquaint the students with broad

framework of financial decisions of a business corporation. It focuses on capital budgeting,

working capital management, dividend and cash management decisions. The students will become

better resource managers after going through this course.

Unit I

Nature and Scope of Financial Economics; Goals of Finance; Economics of capital Budgeting- Investment Criteria, Estimation of project Cash Flows, Risk Analysis in Capital Budgeting, Computation of Cost of Capital.

Unit II

Economics of Capital Structure and Firm Value- Net Income Approach, Net Operating income Approach, Modigliani and Miller Approach; Analysis of Optimal Capital structure – EBIT & EPS Analysis, ROI & ROE Analysis, Operating and Financial Leverage.

Unit III

Economics of Dividends- Walter Model, Gordon Model, Modigliani and Miller Model; Economics of Working Capital- Estimation of Working Capital, Financing of working Capital.

46 | P a g e

Unit IV

Economics of Cash – Cash Budgeting and its Simulation, Optimal Cash balance, Baumol Model, Miller and Orr Model; Economics of Receivables; Economics of Inventory – EOQ Model, Pricing of Raw materials, Monitoring and Control of Inventories.

Base Text Book

I.M.Pandey, “Financial management”, Vikas Publications, Noida. Reading List

Prasana Chandra, “Financial Management”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi

Khan and Jain, “Financial management- text, Problems and cases”, McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi

A.C.Shapiro, “Modern Corporate Finance”, Macmillan Publishing Co., New York,1991

Brealey, Myers and Allen, “Principles of Corporate Finance”, McGraw Hill, Inc., New York, 8th Edition.

D.R.Mehta, “Working Capital Management”, Prentice Hall Inc., Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,1974

E.I.Altman and M.G.Subrahmanyam (ed.), “Recent advances in corporate Finance”, Richard D.Irwin, Inc., Homewood, Ill., 1985

H.Bierman,Jr. and S. Smidt, “The Capital Budgeting Decision”, The Macmillan Company, New York, 1988.

J. Harold Mulherin, “Mergers and Corporate Governance”, Edward Elgar Publishing, 2004. ISBN10: 1843764210

J.A.Brittain, “Corporate Dividend Policy”, Brookings Institution, Washington D.C., 1966

J.C.Van Horne, “Financial Management and Policy”, Prentice hall, New Delhi, 1995

Jean Tirole, “The Theory of Corporate Finance”, Princeton University Press, 2006. ISBN10: 0691125562

Joel M. Stern, “Revolution in Corporate Finance”, Blackwell Publishing, 1997. ISBN10: 1577180445

47 | P a g e


Total Credit: 4 Time : 3 Hrs.








Course Objective: This course builds the necessary foundation required to understand investment

decisions across various asset classes. It will help them to understand the most important aspects of

stock market, mutual funds, debt and money markets. It will also form the basis for investment

banking and insurance sectors. The theories and their practical applications provided in this paper

will enable the students to work in financial markets confidently.

Unit I

The Investment Environment and Asset Classes; Risk- Return Analysis; Risk Aversion and Capital

Allocation to Risky Assets; Bond Prices and Yields; Term Structure of Interest Rates, Managing

Bond Portfolio

Unit II

Portfolio Analysis; Markowitz Model, Sharpe Index Model, Capital Asset Pricing Model, Arbitrage

Pricing Theory; Equity Valuation Models; Equity Portfolio Management Strategies

Unit III

Macroanalysis and Micro Valuation of Stock Market; Industry Analysis; Company Analysis;

Technical Security Analysis; Efficient Market Theory.

48 | P a g e

Unit IV

Economics of Mutual Funds- Sharpe, Treynor and Jensen Performance Index.;Investment

Companies- Organization and Management; Hedge Funds; Evaluation of Portfolio Performance.

Base Text Book

Bodie, Kane, Marcus and Mohanty, “Investments”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, New Delhi.

Reading List

Reilly and Brown, “Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management”, Cengage Learning, New Delhi

Bodie, Kane, Marcus and Mohanty, “Investments”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, New Delhi Bolten, Steven E., “Security Analysis and Portfolio Management: An Analytical Approach

to Investments”, N.Y.Holt, Rinehert and Winston, 1972 Carr, J.L., “Investment Economics”, Sage Pub., California, 1969 Chance D.M., “An Introduction to Options and Futures”, Dryden press, Orlando,FL,1989 Chance, D., “An Introduction to Derivatives”, New York, Dryden, 1998. Curley, Anthony J. and Bear Robert M., “Investment Analysis and management”, N.Y.,

Harper & Row, 1979 David G. Luenberger, “Investment Science”, Oxford University Press,1997. ISBN10:

0195108094 Fama, E.F. and Miller, M.H., “Theory of Finance”, N.y.Holt, Rinehert and Winston, 1972 Figlewski, S., W. Silber and M. Subrahmanyam, “Financial Options, : From Theory to

Practice”, Homewood, Illinois, Business One Irwin, 1990, ISBN 1556232349. Hull, J., “Options, Futures and Other Derivative Securities”, Upper Saddle River, N.J.,

Prentice Hall, 6th edition,2006, ISBN 013149908-4, Jarrow, R.A. and S. Turnbull, “Derivative Securities”, Cincinnati, Ohio, South-Western,

1996. McDonald, R., “Derivatives Markets”, Boston, MA, Addison-Wesley Publishing, 2002,

ISBN: 0201729601 Robert W. Kolb, “Financial Derivatives”, Blackwell Publishing, 1996. ISBN10:

1557869308 Robert W. Kolb, James Overdahl, “Understanding Futures Markets”, Blackwell Publishing,

2006. ISBN10: 1405134038

49 | P a g e



PROJECT MANAGEMENT






Course Objective: The study of project management has become very important in India as

economy is developing very fast and need to complete the business & infrastructure projects within

stipulated time is very pressing and urgent. This paper integrates the existing knowledge of market

research, finance, general management, environment and human behavior. It shall enable the

students to conduct feasibility studies, risk analysis, learn managerial techniques and related

concepts so that they can become important aide in new business projects.

Unit I

Generation and Screening of Project Ideas; Capital Expenditure; Importance and Difficulties;

Market and Demand Analysis; Technical Analysis. Financial Estimates and Projections; Financing

of Projects;

Unit II

Investment Criteria. Analysis of Project Risk : Firm Risk and Market Risk; Social Cost and Benefit

Analysis; Multiple Projects and Constraints.

Unit III

Network Techniques for Project Management; Project Review and Administrative Aspects.

Unit IV

50 | P a g e

Assessment of the Tax Burden; Environment Appraisal of Projects; Human aspects of Project

Management. Project Financing: BOT, PPP and consortium financing.

Reading List

W. Ahuja, G.K. & Gupta, Ravi : Systematic Approach to Income Tax, Allahabd, Bharat Law Hose, 1997.

Bhalla, V.K. : Financial Management and Policy, 2nd ed., New Delhi, Anmol, 1998. Chandra, Prasanna : Projects : Preparation, Appraisal, Budgeting and Implementation, 3rd ed.,

New Delhi, Tata McGraw Hill, 1987. Dhankar, Raj S.: Financial Management of Public Sector Undertakings. New Delhi, Westville,

1995.

51 | P a g e

MABE 4th Semester Paper- MABE 331 Total Credit: 4 Time : 3 Hrs.


LABOUR ECONOMICS




(iii) For the remaining four Questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2questions from each of


Course Objective: The issues pertaining to the labour market, wage theories, employment policies,

trade unions and collective bargaining in the globalized economy have become vitally important for

developing countries. In a country like India where the bulk of the labour force is in the

unorganized sector and the organized sector is witnessing “jobless” growth, the importance of

issues such as employment and unemployment as well as livelihood and social security for the

growing millions continues to assume significance. This Paper exposes students to theoretical as

well as empirical issues relating to the labour market with special reference to India.

Unit I

Labour Market: Concept and characteristics, Labour Markets in India; Theories of Labour Market: Classical, Neo-Classical and Theories of Dual Labour Markets.

Unit II

Trade Unions: Functions and Role, Problems of Trade Unions in India, Measures to strengthen trade union movement in India, Trade Union Act 1926.

The Concept of Wages: Theories of Wages - Classical, Neo-Classical, Bargaining, Minimum, Fair and Living Wages, Minimum Wages Act, Problems in Application, Payment of Wages Act.

Unit III

Industrial Relations: Constitutional framework, plans and industrial relations.

Industrial Disputes: Causes and consequences, Industrial Disputes act 1947, various provisions; Work Committees conciliation, Court of Enquiry, Adjudication and Voluntary arbitration

52 | P a g e

Unit IV

Social Security – Social assistance, social insurance and social security policy in India. Labour Welfare: State policies with respect to labour welfare in India; Labour market reforms in India - exit policy and measures to make labour market flexible; Second National Commission on labour. Globalization and labour markets.

Reading List

Datar, B.N. : Labour Economics Dobb, Maurice (1932): Wages, Macmillar, London Dunlop J.T. (ed) : Theory of Wages Determination. Dunlop, J.T. : Wages Determination under Trade Unionism. Dunlop, J.T. : Industrial Relations Systems. Government of India : Indian Labour Year Book, 1967. Labour Investigation Committee,

Main Report, 1946. Report of the Fair Wages Committee, 1949, Report of the National

Commission on Labour in India, 1969.

Hajela, P.D. (1998), Labour Restructuring in India : A Critique of the New Economic Policies, Commonwealth Publishers, New Delhi.

I.L.O. : Approaches to Social Security. Lester, R.A. (1964), Economics of Labour, (2nd Edition), Macmillan, New York. Reynolds, L.G., Labour Economics and Labour Relations. Srivastava, S.C., Industrial Relations and Labour Law. S.D.Tripathi and P.P.Aryas : Trade Union Management Relations in India. Papola, T.S., P.P.Ghosh and A.N.Sharma (eds) (1993) : Labour Employment and Industrial

Relations in India, B.R.Publishing Corp., New Delhi.

Charles, A. Mayers & Kanappan, S., Industrial Relations in India. Dunlop, J.T.(1932), The Theory of Wage Determination, Macmillan, London. McConnell, C.R. & S.L. Brue (1986) : Contemporary Labour Economics, McGraw- Hill,

New York. McCormick, B. & Smith (eds.) (1968) : The Labour Market, Penguin, Harmondsworth.

53 | P a g e









Course Objective: Higher education is a catalyst in shaping the development of human resources

and in human capital formation. With the broadening of the concept of ‘capital’, the possibility of

using expenditure on higher education as an ‘investment’ towards promoting growth through better

quality human capital is well accepted. At the same time, with ever growing awareness, the criteria

of ‘quality and relevance’ of higher education has also attracted attention from all the quarters in

the country. The present course assumes that the human resource development is possible through

provision of education and health with a macro-country level approach. The students will be able to

analyze our human resource development policies with appropriate targeting in an economy which

is becoming more and more dependent on market based solutions.

Unit I

Concept, scope and relevance of Human Resource Development. Human capital vs. physical capital, components of human capital- Food security, education, health and nutrition; Indicators of development — PQLI, Human Development Index (HDI), gender development indices; Concept of intellectual capital; Role of Human capital in economic growth. Approaches to HRD.

Unit II

Education as an instrument for economic growth; Growth accounting equations of Schultz and Denison; Determinants of demand for education-private and social demand; Social & Private Costs- Benefits of education; Production function models, Manpower requirements approach, programming and input-output models.

54 | P a g e

Unit III

Educational financing — Resource mobilization and utilization, pricing and subsidies and effects of educational financing on income distribution. Education and labour market — Effects of education, ability and family background on earnings, poverty and income distribution, education and employment; Educational planning in developing countries with special emphasis on India. Problems of basic, higher education, training & skill development.

Unit IV

Health Economics-Health dimensions of development; Determinants of health — poverty, malnutrition and environmental issues; Economic dimensions of health care — demand and supply of health care; Financing of health care and resource constraints; The concept of human life value; Theory and empirical studies of production of health care; Inequalities in health — class and gender perspectives; Institutional issues in health care delivery.

Reading List

Baru, R. V. (1998), Private Health Care in India: Social Characteristics and Trends, Sage Publications, New Delhi.

Blaug, M. (1970), An Introduction to Economics of Education, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

Cohn, E. and T. Gaske (1989), Economics of Education, Pergamon Press, London. Klarman, H.E. (1965), The Economics of Health, Columbia University Press, New York. Panchmukhi, P.R. (1980), Economics of Health: A Trend Report in ICSSR, A Survey of

Research in Economics, Vol. VI, Infrastructure, Allied Publishers, Delhi.

Schultz, T.W. (1963), Economic Value of Education, Columbia University Press, New York.

Beman, P. and M.E. Khan (1993), Paying for India’s Health Care, Sage Publications, New Delhi.

Cooms, P.H. and J. Hallak (1988), Cost Analysis in Education, John Hopkins University Press, Baltimore.

Woodhall, M. (1992), Cost-Benefit Analysis in Educational Planning, UNESCO, Paris. World Bank (1993), The World Development Report, 1993: Investing in Health, Oxford

University Press, New York.

55 | P a g e









Course Objective: The present paper has been introduced to change the mind set of students from

employment seeker to employment provider. While learning economic and business management

skills, it is also important that some students also decide to become entrepreneurs. The present

course gives necessary inputs for setting up new businesses. It has become more relevant

considering new policy initiatives like Make in India, Start-up India and Skill India.

Unit I

Entrepreneurship- introduction, meaning, types & functions; Entrepreneurial Mindset: Decision Making; Leadership, Innovation and Creativity; Entrepreneurial Intentions - Social and Corporate Entrepreneurship; Women Entrepreneurs in India; Family Business; Environmental Factors affecting success of a new business; Reasons for the failure and visible problems for business. Stages in entrepreneurial process.

Unit II

Creative problem solving: Heuristics, Brainstorming, Synectics, Value Analysis. Source of New Idea, Ideas into Opportunities. Entrepreneurial Strategy: Generating and Exploiting New Ideas; Identifying and Analyzing Domestic and International Opportunities; Project Report – Financial, market & Technical Feasibility; Legal Issues for the Entrepreneur-Intellectual Property Rights. Business Planning Process: Meaning of business plan, Business plan process, Advantages of business planning, Marketing plan, Final project report with feasibility study, Economic, Technical, Financial and Managerial Feasibility of Project. Preparing a model project report for starting a new venture.

Unit III

56 | P a g e

The Product Concept and Commercial Opportunities. Market Segmentation, Customer Adoption Process; Venture Team Building and Organizational Plan; The Financial Plan- Sources of Capital, Informal Risk Capital, Venture Capital, and Going Public; Facilitators and Inhibitors of Business; Role of E-commerce and M-commerce.

Unit IV

Business Creation: Methods and procedures to start and expand one's own business. Managing growth: Using external parties to help grow a business, franchising, advantages and limitations, investing in a franchise, joint ventures- types, Acquisitions and mergers. Entrepreneurship Development Programmes; Role of government and various institutions in developing entrepreneurship in India (A brief description only).

Reading List

Cases in Entrepreneurship, by Eric Morse, Ronald K. Mitchell, Sage, 2008 Developmental Aspects of Entrepreneurship by Shivganesh Bhargava, Sage, 2007 Entrepreneurial Policies and Strategies - The Innovator's Choice, by Mathew J Manimala, Sage,

1999 Small Business and Industry - A Handbook for Entrepreneurs by J C Verma, Gurpal Singh,

Sage, 2002 Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship By Mohanty, Sangram Keshari, PHI. Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship, NANDAN, H. PHI, Third Edition Entrepreneurship : New Venture Creation, Holt, David H., PHI Entrepreneurship In Action--Second Edition, Coulter Mary, PHI Essentials of Entrepreneurship and Small Business Management by Scarborough, Norman M.,

Wilson, Doug , Zimmerer, Thomas W., PHI Managing New Ventures : Concepts And Cases In Entrepreneurship by RAICHAUDHURI,

ANJAN, PHI Foundation course in Business, Entrepreneurship and Management, 1/eUniversity of Delhi

2014 Pearson Education Entrepreneurship: Creating and Leading an Entrepreneurial Organization, 1/eArya Kumar 2012

Pearson Education Preparing Effective Business Plans: An Entrepreneurial Approach, 1/e Bruce R. Barringer 2014

Pearson Education Entrepreneurship Development and Small Business Enterprise: For VTU, 1/e Poornima M

Charantimath 2011Pearson Education Entrepreneurship Development and Small Business Enterprises, 2/e Poornima M Charantimath

2014 Pearson Education Technology Strategy for Managers and Entrepreneurs, 1/e Scott A. Shane 2014 Pearson

Education India Land of a Billion Entrepreneurs, 1/e Upendra Kachru 2011 Pearson Education Desai, A.N.: "Entrepreneur & Environment". 1990. Ashish, New Delhi. Drucker, Peter : "Innovation and Entrepreneurship", 1985 Heinemann, London. Pareek, Udai and Venkateswara Rao, T.: "Developing Entrepreneurship - A Handbook on

Learning Systems", 1978, Learning Systems, Delhi. Shankar, Raj: "Entrepreneurship", Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, New Delhi Desai, Vasant: "Dynamics of Entrepreneurship Development & Management", Himalaya

Publishing House.

57 | P a g e



AGRICULTURE ECONOMICS






Course Objective: The importance of agriculture in the Indian economy hardly needs to be

emphasized. The paper on agricultural economics highlights important aspects of the agricultural

development and planning in India. The paper is split into many modules; each module discusses an

aspect of Indian agriculture. It particularly focuses on rural unemployment, poverty, agriculture

credit and important problems of this sector.

Unit I Introduction Agricultural Economics: Definition, Nature and Scope; Role of Agriculture in Economic Development; Inter- Sectoral Linkages of Agriculture (Backward and Forward Linkages and Feedback Effects), Role of Agriculture in Haryana and Indian Economy, Farming as a business or way of life, Risks and Uncertainties in Agriculture.

Unit II Rural Unemployment and Poverty in India

Rural Unemployment : Nature, Magnitude, Causes and Suggestions to solve unemployment problem; Problems and Measures to improve the conditions of Agricultural Labourers, Rural Poverty, Inequalities in income distribution, Concept of Poverty Line and Measures to eradicate Poverty in India.

58 | P a g e

Unit III Agricultural Credit

Role of capital and rural credit; Organized and unorganized capital market; Rural savings and capital formation; Characteristics and Sources of rural credit- Institutional and non institutional; Reorganization of rural credit- cooperatives, commercial banks, regional rural banks; Role of the NABARD.

Unit IV Recent Agricultural Problems in India

Issues in liberalization of domestic and international trade in agriculture, Impact of the World Trade Organization on Indian Agriculture; Agriculture and Environment- Sustainable Development, Food Security and International Trade – Concept, Threat, Indicators and Mechanism to Food Security.

Reading List

Black, J.D. (1945), Introduction to Economics of Agriculture. MacMillan, New York. Bruce L., Gardener and Gordon C., Rausser (Eds.), Handbook of Agricultural Economics,

Vol.1A, Agricultural Production, Amersterdam, Elsevier Science B.V. Bruce L., Gardener and Gordon C., Rausser (Eds.), Handbook of Agricultural Economics, Vol.

2B, Agricultural and Policy, Amsterdam, Elsevier Science B.V. Bruce L., Gardener and Gordon C., Rausser (Eds.),Handbook of Agricultural Economics,

Vol.1B, Marketing, Distribution and Consumption, Amersterdam, Elsevier Science B.V. Bruce, L., Gardener and Gordon C., Rausser (Eds.), Handbook of Agricultural Economics,

Vol.2A, Agricultural and Its External Linkages, Amsterdam, Elsevier Science B.V. Cohen, R.L. (1948), Economics of Agriculture, Nishet, London. Dantwala, M.L. et. al (1991), Indian Agricultural Development Since Independence, Oxford &

IBH, New Delhi. Drummond H. Evan and Goodwin W. John (2006), Agricultural Economics, Pearson Education,

New Delhi. Eicher Carl and Lawrence Witt (Eds.) (1964), Agriculture in Economic Development, New

York, McGraw Hill Co. Forster, G.W. and Leoger, M.C. (1959), Elements of Agricultural Economics, Prentice Hall. Ghatak Subrata and Ken Ingersent, Agriculture and Economic Development, Harvestor Press

Ltd., London. Goodwin, H.G. (1977), Economics of Agriculture, Reston Publiching Co. Gulati, A. and T. Kelly (1999), Trade Liberalisation and Indian Agriculture, Oxford University

Press, New Delhi. Halcrow, H.G.(1981), Economics of Agriculture, McGraw Hill International Book Agency. Meier, G.M. (1995), Leading Issues in Economic Development, Oxford University Press, New

Delhi. Metcaff, D. (1969), Economics of Agriculture, Harmondsworth, Penguin Books. Nicholls, W.H. (1964), “The Place of Agriculture in Economics Development”, in Eicher, C.

and Witt, L.(ed) 1964, Agriculture in Economics Development, Vora & Co. Publishers Pvt. Ltd, Bombay.

Ojala, E.M.(1950), Agriculture and Economic Progress, Oxford University Press, London.

59 | P a g e

Rao, C.H. Hanumantha (1994), Agricultural Growth, Rural Poverty and Environmental Degradation in India, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Rudra, A. (1982), Indian Agricultural Economics: Myths and Reality, Allied Publishers, New Delhi.

Southworth Herman and Bruce Johnston (eds.) (1968), Agricultural Development and Economic Growth, Cornell University Press, New York.

Taylor, H.C.(1949), Outlines of Agriculture Economics, MacMillan, New York.

Additional Reading List

Bilgrami, S.A.R. (1996), Agricultural Economics, Himalaya Publishing House, New Delhi. Harque, T. and A.S. Sirohi (1986), Agrarian Reforms and Institutional Changes in India,

Concept Publishing Company, Delhi. Kumar, Rajesh (2010), India’s Export in Processed Food Products : Status & Potential, an

Unpublished Thesis of the Department of Economics, K.U.K. Lekhi, R.K. and Singh, Joginder (2010), Agricultural Economics, Kalyani Publishers, New

Delhi. Rana, Sarita (2002), Global Marketing in Floricultural Products : Challenges and Prospects for

India, an Unpublished Thesis of the Department of Economics, K.U.K. Rani, Vandna (2004), Economics of Mushroom Cultivation in Haryana, an Unpublished Thesis

of the Department of Economics, K.U.K. Sadhu and Singh (1991), Agricultural Problems in India, Himalaya Publishing House, New

Delhi. Sadhu and Singh (2002), Fundamentals of Agricultural Economics, Himalaya Publishing

House, New Delhi. Singh, Kuldeep (2006), “Indian Agriculture Trade in Pre and Post WTO Regime : A

Comparative Study”, K.U.R.J.( Arts & Humanities), Vol. XL, Jan- Dec., 2006. Singh, Kuldeep (2010), “Agricultural Trajectories and Environment Dilemma : Some Evidence

from Haryana”, Agricultural Situation in India, Vol. LXVII, No. 3, June, 2010. Soni, R.N. (1995), Leading Issues in Agricultural Economics, Arihant Press, Jalandhar. Sundaram I. Satya (2009), Rural Development, Himalaya Publishing House , New Delhi.

60 | P a g e

MABE 4th Semester Paper- MABE 342 Total Credit: 4 Time : 3 Hrs. Max. Marks : 100 External : 80 Internal : 20

DEMOGRAPHY






Course Objective: The modules incorporated in this paper educate the students about the inter-

relationship between economic development and population, along with an exposition of the

established theories of population. Issues relating to demographic techniques and basic sources of

demographic data in the Indian economy have also been included. Aspects of population policy and

study of its social characteristics are other important components of the modules of this paper.

Unit I

Introduction to Demography: Meaning and scope of demography, components of population growth and their interdependence; Sources of population data; Theories of population –Malthus, Optimum theory of population; Theories of demographic transition; Population and Development; Population trends since the twentieth century; International aspects of population growth and distribution; Age and Sex structure in more developed and less developed countries; determinants of age and sex structure.

Unit II

Fertility: Importance of the study of fertility-Total fertility rate, Gross reproduction rate and Net reproduction rate. Levels and trends in developed and developing countries; Factors affecting fertility.

Nuptiality: Concept and analysis of marital status; Trends in age at marriage, widowhood and divorce.

Mortality: Basic Concepts, Levels and trends in mortality in developed and developing countries; Factors leading to decline in mortality in recent past.

61 | P a g e

Unit –III

Migration: Basic concept and definitions; importance of migration, Types of migration; factor affecting migration. Theories of migration related to internal migration.

Urbanization: Meaning & Trends, growth and distribution of rural-urban population in developed and developing countries with special reference to India.

Unit IV

Population and Development with reference to India: Population information collected in India with special reference to 2011 Census, National Family Health Surveys; Evolution of Population Policy in India The shift in policy from population control to family welfare, to women empowerment; Family planning strategies and their outcomes; Tasks before the National Population Commission, Latest population policy in India.

Reading List

Agarwal S.N. (1972), India,s Population Problem, Tata McGraw- Hill Co., Bomby. Bose, A. (1996), India’s Basic Demographic Statistics, B.R. Publishing Corporation, New

Delhi. Bogue, D.J. (1971), Principle of Demography, John Wiley, New York. Chenery H. and T.N. Srinivasan (Eds.)(1989), Hand Book of Development Economics, Vol. 1

& 2 Elsevier, Amsterdam. Choubey, P.K. (2000), Population Policy in India, Kanishka Publications, New Delhi. Coals, A.J. and E.M. Hoover (1958), Population Growth and Economic Development in Low

income Countries: A Case Study of India’s Prospectus, Princeton University Press, Princeton. Gulati, S.C (1988), Fertility in India: An Econometric Study of a Metropolis, Sage, New Delhi.

Additional Reading List

Agnihotri, S. B. (2000), Sex ration in Indian Population: A fresh Exploration, Sage New Delhi. Amsden, A. H. (Ed.) (1992), Form of Production and Women’s Labour, Gender Aspects of

Industrialization in India and Mexico, Sage, New Delhi. Boserup,E. (1970), women’s role in Economics Development, George Allen and Unwin,

London. Chiang, C.L. (1974), Life Tables and Mortailty Analysis, W.H.O., Geneva. Gupta, Jj.A. (2000), New Reproductive Technogies, Women’s Health and Autonomy, Indo

Dutch Studies on Development Alternatives, Sage, New Delhi. Jhabwala,R. and R.K. Subramanya (2000) (Eds.), The Unorganized Sector: Work Security and

Social Protection, sage, New Delhi. Krshnaji M., R.M. Sudarshan and A. Shariff (1999), Gender Population and development,

Oxford University Press, New Delhi. King M. and M.A. Hill (Eds.)(1993), Women’s Education in Developing Countries: Barriers,

Benefits and Politics, John Hopkins, Baltimore. Lewis (Ed.)(1989), Strengthening the poor: What Have We Learnt, OECD, Paris. Mishra S. (2000), Voluntary Action in Health and Population: The Dynamics of Social

Transition, Sage, New Delhi.

62 | P a g e

Mitra, A. (1979), Implications of Declining Sex Ration in India’s Population, Allied, New Delhi.

Novell, C. (1988), Methods and Models in Demography, Belhaven Press, London. Seth M. (2000), Women and Development: The Indian Experience, Sage, and New Delhi. Simon, J.L. (1992), Population and Development in Poor Countries, Princeton University Press. Srinivasan, K. (1998), Basic Demographic Techniques and Applications, Sage, New Delhi. Srinivasan, K and A. Shariff (1998), India: Towards Population and Demographic Goals,

Oxford University Press, New Delhi. Sryrock, H. et.al. (1973), The Methods and Materials of Demography, US Department of

Commerce,Washington,D.C. Sudarshan and A. Shariff (1999), Gender Population and Development, Oxford University

Press, New Delhi. United Nations (1973), The determinants and consequences of Population Trends, Vol. 1 UNO

Publications, New York.

63 | P a g e









Course Objective: This course is meant to provide some insights into the application of economic

theory in the design and implementation of public policy related to the management of environment

sector. The course finds roots in welfare economics, national income accounting, macroeconomic

policies and trade and development. Modules incorporated in this paper are devoted to issues of

environmental economics and its services and the problem of valuation of these services, and

designing of instruments and institutions for the management of environment. The models of

optimal use of natural resources, macroeconomic issues, sustainable development, environmental

resource problems in India constitute the other areas of the modules of this paper.

Unit I

Pareto optimality and perfect competition; External effects in production and consumption; Market failure in case of environmental goods - incomplete markets, externalities, non-exclusion; non-rivalry; non-convexities and asymmetric information.

Measures of economic value of environment WTP and WTAC; contingent valuation method; travel cost method; hedonic market methods; averting behaviour approach - household health production function method.

Unit II

Economic approaches for environmental protection; Price & Quantity rationing - pollution charges, ambient charges, product charges, subsidies; Liability rules - non-compliance fees, deposit refund system, performance bonds; marketable pollution permits; Evaluative criteria of and practical

64 | P a g e

conditions for use of the economic incentives; Estimation of marginal cost of pollution abatement for designing the pollution tax; Mixed instruments; Choice among policy instruments; Coase’s bargaining solution and collective action; New Environment Policy.

Unit III

Natural resources: types, classification and scarcity; Elementary capital theory; Economics of sustainable development - sustainability rules, Common-Perrings model; The Solow-Hartwick approach to sustainability and green GDP. Management of common property resources. System of integrated environmental and economic accounting (SEEA).

Unit IV

Environmental policy framework in India - problems of command & control regime; Development and degradation; Poverty, population and political economy; Water and air pollution and existing pollution control mechanisms; Land and forest degradation and the strategy for regeneration; Wetlands; International environmental issues – climate change; Trade and environment in WTO regime.

Reading List

Henderson, J.M. and R.E. Quandt (1980), Microeconomic Theory: A Mathematical Approach, McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

Hanley, N., J.F. Shogern and B. White (1997), Environmental Economics in Theory and Practice, Macmillan.

Cropper, Maureen (1999), Valuing Environmental Benefits, Edward Elgar. Sankar, U. (Ed.) (2001), Environmental Economics, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. James, A.J., M. N. Murty and Smita Misra (1999), Economics of Water Pollution – The Indian

Experience, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. Chary, S.N. and Vyasulu, Vinod (2000), Environmental Management - an Indian Perspective,

Macmillan, New Delhi. Painuly, J P, Economic Instruments: Application to Environmental Problems, Working paper no

3, by UNEP from IGIDR, Bombay, 1995. Hussen, A.M. (1999), Principles of Environmental Economics, Routledge, London. Jeroen. C.J.M. van den Berg (1999), Handbook of Environmental and Resource Economics,

Edward Elgar Publishing Ltd., U.K. Pearce, D.W. and R. Turner (1991), Economics of Natural Resource Use and Environment,

John Hopkins University Press, Baltimore.

65 | P a g e



DIRECT TAXES-I






Course Objective: This is a highly functional and specialized course. The students choosing this

stream will be acquainted with practical knowledge of direct taxes mainly focusing on income tax.

They shall be able to assess the impact on tax incidence according to residential status, type of

income or type of deductions. The purpose is that they learn to file the income tax return of any

entity/person –legal, actual or firm.

Unit I

Income Tax- Basic Concepts; Previous Year, Assessment Year, Assessee, Income; Agricultural Income, Casual Income, Person, Average Rate, Marginal Rate, Capital and Revenue Receipts and Expenditure; Return Of Income.

Unit II

Residential Status and Tax Incidence; Scope of Income; Individual, HUF, Firms, Association of Persons, Body of Individuals, Companies, Other Persons; Gross Total Income, Total Income, Exempted Incomes.

Unit III

Clubbing of Income; Set Off and Carry Forward of Losses; Agricultural Income- Tax Treatment of Agricultural Income; Tax Deducted at Source

Unit IV

66 | P a g e

Deductions from Gross Total Income; Income from other sources– Dividends, Interest on Security; Deduction of Tax at Source; Grossing Up; Bond Washing Transaction; Deductions; Filing of Return of Income.

Base Text Book

V.K. Singania: Direct Taxes Law & Practice, Taxman. Reading List

Mehrotra and Goyal: Income Tax Law & Practice, Sahitya Bhavan. V.K. Singania: Direct Taxes Law & Practice, Taxman. Bhagawati Prasad: Income Tax Law & Practice. Manoharan T.N.: Income Tax Law & Practice. Income Tax Act 1956 and Finance Act of the relevant year

67 | P a g e



VAT AND SERVICE TAX






Course Objective: The present course aim at providing specialization in VAT & Service Taxes.

The students will learn about procedures and complexities related with various types of value added

and service taxes.

Unit I

Introduction to Service Tax: Basic Terms, CENVAT Credit related to Service Tax; Taxable

services; exemptions from service tax.

Unit II

Provisions related to following Taxable Services and Computation of Tax Liability: Courier,

Clearing and Forwarding Agent, Construction Services, Event Management services, Advertising

Services, Architect’s Services, Payment of Service Tax & Filing of return ; Interest & Penalty.

Unit III

Value Added Tax: Concept of value added. Input Goods and Services for CENVAT; Capital

Goods for CENVAT; Exempted Final Products / Output Services.

Unit IV

68 | P a g e

Input Tax Credits and Composition Scheme for Small Dealers; VAT Procedures.

Base Text Book

V.S. Datey, Indirect Taxes Law & Practice, Taxman Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.

Reading List

V.S. Datey, Indirect Taxes Law & Practice, Taxman Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.

V.K.Sareen and Ajay Sharma, Indirect Tax laws, Kalyani Publications, New Delhi.

S. S. Gupta: Service Tax (Taxmann)

R. Mohan Lavis : Service Tax (Bharat Publishers, New Delhi)

69 | P a g e



THEORY OF TAXATION






Course Objective: The present paper provides the theoretical foundations of taxes from economics

giving important principles. We also study the impact of taxes on macro-economic conditions,

black economy and various outcomes.

Unit I

Principles of Taxation; Theories of Taxation; Taxable Capacity and its measurement; Tax Burden and Economic Efficiency

Unit II

Tax Incidence- Partial and General Equilibrium Analysis; Keynesian Short Run Model; Dynamic

Tax Incidence

Unit III

Income V/S Excise Tax; Optimal Taxation; Tax Evasion and the Black Economy; Impact of Taxes on Individual Decisions

Unit IV

Impact of Excise Tax on Market Outcomes; Impact of Income Tax on Labour Supply, Savings and Portfolio Choice; Economic Effects of Corporation Income Tax.

70 | P a g e

Base Text Book

Boadway, Robin, “Public Sector Economics”, Cambridge, Winthrop Publishers

Reading List

Bruce, Neil, “Public Finance”, Addison- Wesley Educational Publishers, Inc. Jones. Philip and Cullis, Jones, “Public Finance and Public Choice- analytical Perspectives”,

Oxford University press Stiglitz, Joseph, “Economics of the Public Sector”, W.W.Norton and Company, new

York/London Rosen, H.S., “Public finance”, Tata McGraw Hill McNutt, P.A., “The economics of Public Choice”, Edward Elgar Publishing Inc. Mueller, D.C., “Public Choice- I,II,III” Cambridge university Press, Cambridge Downs, A., “An Economic Theory of Democracy”, Harper and Row, New York Musgrave R.A and Peacock A.T., “ Classics in the Theory of Public Finance”, Mcmillan

71 | P a g e

SEMESTER-IV

w.e.f 2017-18

PAPER CODE

NOMENCLATURE EXTERNAL INTERNAL TIME CREDITS

CORE PAPERS

L

T

P

MABE 401

CORPORATE STRATEGY 80

20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 402


80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 403


100 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 404

COMPREHENSIVE VIVA VOCE 50 - ½ Hrs./G

2

ELECTIVE PAPERS


GROUP-I


MABE 411 MARKETING OF SERVICES

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 412


80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

GROUP-II


MABE 421


80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 422

FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS AND MARKETS

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

GROUP-III


72 | P a g e

MABE 431


80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 432


80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

GROUP-IV


MABE 441 INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 442


80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

GROUP-V


MABE 451 DIRECT TAXES-II

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

MABE 452 CORPORATE TAX PLANNING

80 20 3 Hrs. 4 ½ Hrs./G

-

Total 550 22

Total Marks: 2400

Total Credits: 176 GRAND TOTAL = 2400

73 | P a g e

MABE 4th Semester

Paper- MABE 401

Total Credit : 4 Time : 3 Hrs. Max. Marks : 100


CORPORATE STRATEGY






Course Objective: The present paper prepares the students to think at apex level of big

corporations. They will learn to analyze the internal and external environments for the highly

diversified corporations to find opportunities & threats for designing and implementing appropriate

business policies. This paper integrates the knowledge from functional areas with more outward

focus instead of small tactical decisions.

Unit-I

Definition, nature, scope and importance of strategic management; Process of strategic

management; Defining strategic intent: Vision, Mission, Business definition, Goals and Objectives;

Internal Appraisal – The internal environment Methods and techniques used for organizational

appraisal (Value chain analysis, Financial and non financial analysis, historical analysis, Industry

standards and benchmarking, Balanced scorecard and key factor rating); Identification of Critical

Success Factors (CSF).

Unit-II

Environmental Appraisal—Concept of environment, components of environment (Economic, legal,

social, political and technological); Environmental scanning techniques- ETOP, QUEST and

74 | P a g e

SWOT (TOWS); Corporate level strategies — Stability, Expansion, Retrenchment and

Combination strategies.

Unit-III

Strategic Analysis and choice—Corporate level analysis (BCG, GE Nine-cell, Hofer’s product

market evolution and Shell Directional policy Matrix). Industry level analysis ; Porters’s five forces

model. Qualitative factors in strategic choice.

Unit-IV

Strategy implementation: Resource allocation, Projects and Procedural issues; Organization

structure and systems in strategy implementation; Leadership and corporate culture, Values, Ethics

and Social responsibility; Strategic control and operational Control; Organizational systems and

Techniques of strategic evaluation.

Reading List

1. Business Policy – Azhar Kazmi –S.Chand &Co. New Delhi

2. Strategic Management : Concepts & Cases – Upendra Kachru, Excel Books.

3. Strategic Planning: Formulation of Corporate strategy – V.S. Ramaswamy, S. Namakumari-

Macmillan Publishing House Ltd.

4. Management Policy & Strategic Management – R.M.Shivastava, Himalaya Publishing House,

Mumbai.

5. Creating Excellence – Craig R. Hickman & Michael A. Silva – London Univeral Book Stall,

New Delhi.

6. Organizational Behaviour- Stephen P. Robbinson – PHI, New Delhi.

75 | P a g e









Course Objective: The present paper is a core functional and applied paper. It addresses the

problems, issues and policies of Indian Economy with an aim that the students shall apply the

economic theories, tools, market instruments, public policy instruments to analyze the problems of

poverty, unemployment, growth, structural changes, development, fiscal management, institutional

reforms, globalization and international trade. The paper is more of an empirical nature.

Unit I

Brief economic history and major features of Indian Economy in present times. Role of State and Market in economic development. Role of Pressure groups in Indian economy. Role of regulatory agencies in India; Objectives and strategy of Indian planning; Achievements and failures of five year Plans. Structural changes in Indian economy.

Unit II

Broad demographic features of Indian population; Rural-urban migration; Urbanization and civic amenities; Poverty and Inequality. Approaches for employment generation and poverty alleviation. Energy; Social infrastructure – education and health; Environment; Regional imbalance; Issues and policies in financing infrastructure development.

Fiscal federalism – Centre-state financial relations; Finances of Central Government; Finances of State Governments; Parallel economy; Problems relating to fiscal policy; Fiscal sector reforms in India.

76 | P a g e

Unit III

Institutional Structure – land reforms in India; Problems & prospects of Indian agriculture; Pricing of agricultural inputs and output; Issues in food security; Policies for sustainable agriculture. Industrial policy; Public Sector enterprises and their performance; Privatization and disinvestment debate; Growth and pattern of industrialization; Small-scale sector; Exit policy – issues in labour market reforms.

Unit IV

Globalisation of Indian economy; WTO and its impact on the different sectors of the economy; Need for and issues in good governance.

Structure and direction of foreign trade; Balance of payments; Issues in export-import policy; Exchange rate policy and FEMA; Foreign capital and MNCs in India. Analysis of price behaviour in India; Review of monetary policy of RBI; Money and capital markets.

Reading List

Ahluwalia, I.J. and I.M.D. Little (Eds.) (1999), India’s Economic Reforms and Development (Essays in honour of Manmohan Singh), Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Bardha, P.K. (9th Edition) (1999), The Political Economy of Development in India, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Brahmananda, P.R. and V.R. Panchmukhi (Eds.) (2001), Development Experience in the Indian Economy: Inter-State Perspectives, Bookwell, Delhi.

Datt, R. (Ed.) (2001), Second Generation Economic Reforms in India, Deep & Deep Publications, New Delhi.

Government of India, Economic Survey, (Annual), Ministry of Finance, New Delhi. Government of India, Planning Commission; Five Year Plan Development. Jalan, B. (1992), The Indian Economy – Problems and Prospects, Viking, New Delhi. Jalan, B. (1996), India’s Economic Policy- Preparing for the Twenty First Century, Viking,

New Delhi. Kapila Uma Indian Economy Academic Foundation New Delhi Latest Edition. Mishra S.K.and Puri V.K, Indian Economy, Himalya Publication House, Latest Edition. Monga G.S.and Goel M.M. (2001) Wage Goods Approach and Development Deep and Deep

New Delhi. Parikh, K.S. (1999), India Development Report – 1999-2000, Oxford University Press, New

Delhi. Reserve Bank of India, Report on Currency and Finance, (Annual). Rudar Dutt and Sundram; Indian Economy S Chand and Company Latest Edition Sen, R.K. and B. Chatterjee (2001), Indian Economy: Agenda for 21st Century (Essays in

honour of Prof. P.R. Brahmananda), Deep & Deep Publications, New Delhi.

77 | P a g e









Course Objective: Modules incorporated in this Paper would enable the students to know about

concepts, theories and approaches to growth & development, sectoral aspects of development,

investment criteria, allocation of resources, interrelations of international trade and development.

Issues relating to the relationship between state agency and development also find their due place

in this paper.

Unit I

Concepts and Measurement of Economic Development

Economic growth, economic development and sustainable development; Structural Diversity and common characteristics of developing nations.

Measuring Development: Income Measures, Basic Needs Approach, PQLI, HDI and Capabilities Approach; Poverty, Inequality and Development: Measurement, Impact and Policy options.

Unit II

Theories of Economic Development: Contributions of Ricardo, Karl Marx and Schumpeter,

Growth Models: Harrod & Domar; Solow and Joan Robinson

Unit III Approaches to Development

Balanced and Unbalanced Growth; Big push theory; Critical Minimum Efforts Theory; Low Income Equilibrium Trap.

78 | P a g e

Sectoral Aspects of Development

Role of Agriculture and industry in Economic Development; Services Sector in Developing Economies: Role, growth and sustainability, Infrastructure and its importance.

Unit IV Trade and Development Experience

International Trade as an Engine of Growth: Static and Dynamic gains from Trade; Prebisch-Singer Hypothesis vis-à-vis Free Trade experience of Developing Countries; Trade Policy Debate: Export promotion, Import Substitution and Economic Integration; WTO and Developing Countries.

State and Economic Development

Market Failure and Rationale of State in economic development; State Capacity and State Failure; Good economic governance.

Reading List

Adelman, I. (1961), Theories of Economic Growth and Development, Stanford University Press, Stanford.

Barro, R. and X. Salai- Martin, Economic Growth, McGraw Hill, New York. Behrman, S. and T.N. Srinivasan (1995), Handbook of Development Economics, Vol. 3,

Elsevier, Amsterdam. Bhagwati, J. and P. Desai (1970), India: Planning for Industrialization, Oxford University

Press, London. Brown, M. (1966), On the Theory and Measurement of Technical Change, Cambridge

University Press, Cambridge, Mass. Chakravarti, S. (1982), Alternative Approaches to the Theory of Economic Growth, Oxford

University Press, New Delhi. Chakravarti, S. (1987), Development Planning: The Indian Experience, Clarendon Press,

Oxford. Chenery, H. and T.N. Srinivasan (Eds.) (1989), Handbook of Development Economics,

Vols. 1 & 2, Elsevier, Amsterdam. Dasgupta, P. (1993), An Enquiry into Well-being and Destitution, Clarendon Press, Oxford. Ghatak, S. (1986), An Introduction to Development Economics, Allen and Unwin, London. Gillis, M., D.H. Perkins, M. Romer and D.R. Snodgrass (1992), Economics of

Development, (3rd Edition), W.W. Norton, New York. Grossman, G. and E. Helpman (1991), Innovation and Growth in the Global Economy, MIT

Press, Cambridge, Mass. Higgins, B. (1959), Economic Development, W.W. Norton, New York. Hirschman, A.O. (1958), The Strategy of Economic Development, Yale University Press,

New York. Jones, HG.(1975), An Introduction to Modern Theories of Economic Growth, Nelson,

London. Kindleberger, C.P. (1977), Economic Development, (3rd Edition), McGraw Hill, New York. Lewis, W.A. (1955), The Theory of Economic Growth, George Allen and Unwin, London.

79 | P a g e

Meier, G.M. and J.E.Rauch (2005), Leading Issues in Economic Development, (8th Edition), Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Nayyar, D. (Ed.) (1994), Industrial Growth and Stagnation: The Debate in India, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Sen, A. (1992), Inequality Reexamined, Oxford University Press, Oxford. Sen, A.K. (Ed.) (1990), Growth Economics, Penguin, Harmondsworth. Sen,A. (1983), Poverty and Famines, Oxford University Press, Oxford. Thirlwal, A.P. (1999), (6th Edition), Growth and Development, Macmillan, U.K. Todaro, M.P. and S.C. Smith (2003), (8th Edition), Economic Development, Pearson

Education, Delhi.

80 | P a g e



MARKETING OF SERVICES






Course Objective: The present paper has become highly relevant with a large share of services in

GDP offering great potential for job creation. The paper aims at developing core skills for wide

variety of services. It is an application based functional paper focusing on differentiating the goods

marketing from service marketing. The student shall learn to design strategies and marketing mix

for services.

Unit I

Services and the Economy - The growing influence of services in the economies of the countries

around the globe. Services and the Indian Economy: Contribution and Reasons for Growth of

Services in India.

Services marketing - Unique Characteristics of Services and Problems Associated with Services

Marketing. Overcoming Challenges Associated with Services Marketing. Goods-Service

Categorization. Types of Services- Core and Supplementary.

Unit II

Service Marketing Environment And Mix - Prominent Environmental Factors Influencing

Service Marketing. A Bird’s Eye-View of Service Marketing Mix - Product, Price, Place,

Promotion, Process, People, Physical Evidence and Productivity.

81 | P a g e

Service management triangle - An Introduction to the Concept and its Variants viz. Internal

Marketing, External Marketing and Interactive Marketing.

Unit III

Service Quality, Productivity And Recovery - Service Quality - concept, dimensions & models;

Service Productivity- Measurement and Productivity Enhancement Strategies. Relationship

between Service Quality and Productivity. Service Recovery - Significance. Recovery Techniques.

Unit IV

Service Value Enhancement - Service Differentiation - Significance and Techniques. Service

Positioning- Ways. Relationship Marketing - Significance and Tools.

Reading List

Jauhari. Vinnie and Dutta, Kirti : Services-Marketing, Operations and Management, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. Lovelock, C.H. Services Marketing, Pearsons, New Delhi Payne, A: The Essence of Services Marketing, Prentice Hall, New Delhi. Ravi Shankar: Services Marketing – The Indian Perspective, Excel Books, New Delhi. Rao, K. Rama Mohana, Services Marketing, Pearson Education, Delhi. Shankar, Ravi: Services Marketing -The Indian Perspective, Excel Books, New Delhi. Zeithaml, V.A., Bitner, M.J.: Services Marketing, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi Zeithaml, V.A, D.D Gremler, M.J Bitner and A Pandit, Services Marketing, Tata McGraw Hill,

4th Special Indian Edition. Hoffman, K.D and JEG Bateson, Marketing of Services, Cengage Learning, Indian Edition. Lovelock, Christopher, Services Marketing, Pearson Education, 7th Edition. Woodruff, H.E, Services marketing, Longman Group. Payne, D, The Essence of Services Marketing, Prentice Hall of India. Verma, Harsh V, Services Marketing- Text and Cases, Pearson Education. Kotler, Philip and Gary Armstrong, Principles of Marketing, Prentice Hall of India. Journal of Services Marketing, Emerald Publications

82 | P a g e









Course Objective: The present course comes under functional domain of marketing strategy. Instead of dealing separately with each component of promotion mix i.e. advertising, sales promotion, personal selling, public relation management, social media tools or web-communication, it offers a comprehensive integrated communication management to reach to target audience. The students will be acquainted with all forms of communication by a firm to consumers.

Unit I

The communication process- The nature of communication, A basic model of communication, Role of IMC in Marketing Process. IMC Planning Model, Developing IMC Plan. Elements, Features and Determinants of Marketing Communication Mix, Measuring Effectiveness of Various Elements of Marketing Communication Mix.

Unit II

Creative Strategy Planning and Development: Creativity techniques, Creative execution in advertising: Message, Appeals and execution styles, Celebrity endorsements in advertisement. Creative Execution in Print Advertising, Layout, Headlines, Copy, Visuals. Creative Execution on Television; Creative execution online: Internet and integrated marketing communication- Advertising and sales promotion on the internet.

Unit III

Advertising : concepts, types, forms and Role; Advertising planning and objective setting: Dagmar approach. Determination of target audience; Building of advertising programme; campaign planning; Media planning and Budgeting; Measuring the effectiveness of the promotional program- Market testing, pre testing, post testing, laboratory tests, field tests, Advertising agency; types, functions and structure of advertising agency.

83 | P a g e

Unit IV

Meaning and Importance of Direct Marketing, Prominent Direct Marketing Tools, Direct Marketing Decisions and Strategies. Meaning, Importance and Principles of personal selling, Designing Sales Force, Managing the Sales Force.

Reading List

Belch and Belch, Advertising and Promotions- IMC Perspectives, Tata McGraw Hill. Clow and Baack, Integrated Advertising, Promotion, and Marketing Communications, Pearson

Education. O Guinn and Allen Semenik, Advertising and Integrated Brand Promotion, Cengage Learning. Murthy, S N and U Bhojanna, Advertising- An IMC Perspective, Excel Books. Batra, Meyers and Aaker, Advertising Management, PHI Publications. Kotler, P and Kevin L Keller, Marketing Management, Prentice Hall India, 12th Edition.

Journal of Marketing Communication, American Marketing Communication Belch, George E and Belch, Michael A. : Introduction to Advertising and Promotion, 3rd ed, Chicago, Irwin, 2002. Arens and Bovee : Contemporary Advertising, Irwin, 1995. Sandage and Fryberger : Advertising, AITBS, Delhi, 2000. Batra, Rajeev, Myers, johan G. and Aaker, David A. Advertising Management, 4th ed., New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India, 2002. O, Guinn : Advertising & Integrated Brand Production, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi. Kleppner, Otto : Advertising Procedure, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, Prentice Hall Inc.,1986. Wells, William, Burnett, Johan & Moriarty Sandara, PHI, 2002.

Kruti Shah and Alan D'Souza - Advertising & Promotion an IMC perspective

Books of advertising Management

84 | P a g e









Course Objective: The present course is one of a higher specialization in investment and portfolio

management. This has become essential with increased need for managing hedge funds facing risk

from all directions. The students will learn to manage risk in financial markets using Futures and

Options.

Unit I

Investors and risk management; measuring and managing VaR and CaR; Introduction to Derivative

Markets; The Basis and Spreads; Models of Futures Prices- Cost-of-Carry Model, Expectations

Model; Price Discovery, Speculation and Hedging Functions of Futures Markets; Interest Rate

Futures and their Hedging Applications.

Unit II

Stock Index Futures - Pricing and Hedging Strategies; Foreign Exchange Futures- Pricing,

Speculation and Hedging; The Options Market; Options Pay-Offs

Unit III

Option Pricing – Binomial Model, Black - Scholes Model; Option Price Sensitivities – Delta,

Gamma, Vega, Rho, Delta Hedging

Unit IV

85 | P a g e

Option Trading Strategies – Building Blocks of Derivatives; Directional Strategies; Volatility

Strategies; Horizontal Spreads; Ratio and Black Spreads; Swaps – Motives, Pricing and Hedging

Base Text Book

Stulz, Rene M, “ Risk management and Derivatives”, Cengage learning. Robert W. Kolb, James Overdahl, “Futures, Options and Swaps”, Blackwell Publishing S.S.S.Kumar, “Financial Derivatives”, Prentice Hall

Reading List

Bodurtha, J. and Courtadon G., The Pricing of Foreign Currency Options, New York, Salomon Brothers Center, New York University, 1987-4/5. Bolten, Steven E., “Security Analysis and Portfolio Management: An Analytical Approach to Investments”, N.Y.Holt, Rinehert and Winston, 1972 Bowyer, John, W., “Investment Analysis and Management”, Illinois, Irwin, 1972. Carr, J.L., “Investment Economics”, Sage Pub., California, 1969 Chance D.M., “An Introduction to Options and Futures”, Dryden press, Orlando,FL,1989. Chance, D., “An Introduction to Derivatives”, New York, Dryden, 1998. Conrad Michael Mattern, “ Handbook of Investment Research: Economic and Financial Indicators as Market Movers”, Palgrave Macmillan, 2002. ISBN10: 0333968697 Cox, J. and M. Rubinstein, “Options Markets”, Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall, 1985,ISBN0136382053. Curley, Anthony J. and Bear Robert M., “Investment Analysis and management”, N.Y., Harper & Row, 1979 David G. Luenberger, “Investment Science”, Oxford University Press,1997. ISBN10: 0195108094 David King, “Financial Claims and Derivatives”, Thomson Learning, 1998. ISBN10: 186152448X Fama, E.F. and Miller, M.H., “Theory of Finance”, N.y.Holt, Rinehert and Winston, 1972 Figlewski, S., W. Silber and M. Subrahmanyam, “Financial Options, : From Theory to Practice”, Homewood, Illinois, Business One Irwin, 1990, ISBN 1556232349. Frank Milne, “Finance Theory and Asset Pricing”, Oxford University Press, 2003. ISBN10: 0199261075 Hull, J., “Options, Futures and Other Derivative Securities”, Upper Saddle River, N.J., Prentice Hall, 6th edition,2006, ISBN 013149908-4, Jarrow, R.A. and A. Rudd, “Option Pricing”, Homewood, Illinois, Dow Jones-Irwin, 1983, ISBN 0870943782. Jarrow, R.A. and S. Turnbull, “Derivative Securities”, Cincinnati, Ohio, South-Western, 1996. McDonald, R., “Derivatives Markets”, Boston, MA, Addison-Wesley Publishing, 2002, ISBN: 0201729601 Richard T. Baillie, “The Foreign Exchange Market” Cambridge University Press, 1990. ISBN10: 0521396905 Robert W. Kolb, “Financial Derivatives”, Blackwell Publishing, 1996. ISBN10: 1557869308 Robert W. Kolb, James Overdahl, “Understanding Futures Markets”, Blackwell Publishing, 2006. ISBN10: 1405134038 Thomas A. Ho, Sang Bin Lee,”Securities Valuation: Applications of Financial Modeling”, Oxford University Press, 2005. ISBN10: 0195172752

86 | P a g e



FINANCIAL INSTITUTION AND MARKETS


(ii) Question No. 1 will be compulsory and will consist of 8 short answer type question of

2 marks each spread over the entire syllabus (2*8=16 marks).



Course Objective: This paper has been introduced so that the students can comprehend all players,

processes, functions, components and instruments of Indian Financial Market as one inter-related

and interdependent system. The paper shall help the students to specialize in financial markets

providing broader knowledge.

Unit I Financial System And Interest Rate Meaning and Rationale of studying Financial System; Risk management in Financial Institutions; Terms structure of Interest rate and Yield curve;

Commercial And Central Banking System Meaning, Functions and Types of Commercial Banks. Central Banking in India; Conduct of monetary policy in India.

Unit II Money Market Introduction, Meaning and main introductory characteristics of Money Market segments- Call Money Market, Treasury bill market, Commercial Papers Market, Certificate of Deposit Market, Gilt- edged Securities Market, Repo Market.

Capital Market Meaning, Objectives, Importance and Functions of Capital Market; Financial instruments in primary capital Market.

Unit III Insurance Market

87 | P a g e

Meaning, Types and Principles of Life Insurance and General Insurance; Rationale for opening up of the Insurance to Private Sector. International Finance Foreign Exchange Rate- Meaning, Types; Foreign Exchange market- Importance, Trading and Participants.

Unit IV

Financial Institutions Functions and Importance of Merchant Bankers, Functions and Types of Mutual Funds, Main features of Working of UTI. Meaning and Functions of NBFC’s - Credit Unions, Savings and Loan Associations, Pension Funds, Finance Company, Investment Trusts, Common Trusts Fund.

Reading List

Bhasin, N. (2007), Banking and Financial System India 1947-2007, New Century Publications.

Gupta,S.K , Aggarwal,N. and Gupta,N. (2005), Financial Institutions and Markets, Kalyani Publishers.

Khan, M.Y. Indian Financial System.

Mishkin, F.S and Eakins,S.G.(2009) Financial Markets and Institutions, (5th Edition) Dorling Kindersley.

Bhole, L.M. and Mahakud, J.(2009), Financial Institutions and Markets-Structure, Growth and Innovations, Tata Mcgraw Hill.

Madura, J.(2006) Financial Institutions and Markets (7th Edition), CENGAGE Learning.

Fabozzi, F.J, Modigliani, F. Jones,F.J.and Ferri,M.G.(2009), Foundations of Financial Markets and Institutions, Dorling Kindesley.

Mishkin, (2013) ‘ The economics of Money, Banking and Financial Markets’. 7e, Pearson Publications.

Cecchetti, S.G. and Schoenholtz, K.L.(2013) , ‘Money , Banking and Financial Markets’ . 3rd edition. Tata McGraw Hill Company Ltd

Bhole, L.M. (1999), Financial Institutions and Markets, Tata McGraw Hill Company Ltd., New Delhi.

Karampal, Bodla,B.S. and Garg,M.C.(2007), ‘Insurance Management : Principles and Practices’ Deep and Deep

Bhole, L.M. (2000), Indian Financial System, Chugh Publications, Allahbad. Johnson, H.J. (1993), Financial Institutions and Markets, McGraw Hill, New York. Machiraju, M.R. (1999), Indian Financial Systems, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi. Ohlson, J.A. (1987), The Theory of Financial Markets and Institutions, North Holland,

Amsterdam.

88 | P a g e

Prasad, K.N. (2001), Development of India’s Financial System, Sarup & Sons, New Delhi. Smith, P.F. (1978), Money and Financial Intermediation: The Theory and Structure of

Financial System, Prentice Hall, Englewood-Cliffs, New Jersey. Chandra, P. (1997), Financial Markets, (4th Edition), Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. Machiraju, H.R. (1997), International Financial Markets in India, Wheeler Publishing,

Allahbad. Bhatt, R.S. (1996), Unit Trust of India and Mutual Funds: A Study, UTI Institute of Capital

Markets, Mumbai. Sahadevan, K.G. and M.T. Thiripalraju (1997), Mutual Funds, Prentice Hall of India, New

Delhi. Goss, B.A. and B.S. Yamey (1978), The Economics of Futures Trading, Macmillan, London Gupta, L.C. (Ed.) (1999), India’s Financial Markets and Institutions, Society for Capital

Research and Development, Delhi.

Crocker, A. (1982), International Money; Issues and Analysis, The English Language Book Society, Nelson, London.

Niehans, J. (1994), International Monetary Economics, John Hopkins University Press, New York.

Official websites of IMF, RBI,UTI, LIC, FMC, SEBI, PFRDA, IRDA, SIDBI, NABARD, EXIM, NHB

89 | P a g e







(iii) For the remaining four Questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2questions from each of


Course Objective: In the present highly liberalized world, either the firms will have to go global or

perish. It has become very important for the present managers to understand differences in cultures

across countries and continents. The present paper addresses a large number of issues to prepare

global executives who can take decisions related with global organizational design and industrial

relations in more complex international world to be ready to become proactive instead of a coping

one.

Unit I

Core concepts in managing human resources in the global business environment; Understanding and managing the Culture factor in GHRM. Approaches to Understanding & Managing Cultural Diversity. The Contingency Matrix approach to GHRM. Cross Cultural Differences and Managerial Implications; Cross Cultural Research Methodologies and Hofstede’s Hermes Study; Structural Evolution of Global Organisations; Cross Cultural Leadership and Decision Making; Cross Cultural Communication and Negotiation.

Unit II

Global organisation design. Global staffing and staff flow practices. Learning, training & development of global employees. Human Resource Management in Global Organisations; Selection, Sourcing, Selection Criteria for International Assignment; Compensation and Appraisal in Global Perspective. Performance management in MNCs. Global compensation and benefits.

90 | P a g e

Unit III

MNCs and industrial relations trends. Emerging global HRM practices. Industrial Relations in a Comparative Perspective. Emerging Trends in Employee Relations and Employee Involvement. International Labour Standards. HR/IR issues in MNCs and Corporate Social Responsibility.

Unit IV

Ethics in International Business; Western and Eastern Management Thoughts in the Indian context. Technology & HRD. Organizational and HR Implications of Technological Change. Technological Innovation: Concept and Process, Role of HR in supporting innovation programme in an organisation. Process of measuring the outcome of an Innovation in organisation. Technology and Culture; Process of transition from Reactive to Proactive culture, Steps in technology transition process.

Reading List

Adler,NJ. International Dimensions of Organizational Behaviour. Boston, Kent Publishing, 1991.

Bartlett,CandGhoshal, S.TransnationalManagement:Text, Cases and Readings in Cross Border Management. Chicago, Irwin, 1995.

Dowling. P J. etc. International Dimensions of Human Resource Management 2nd ed. California,Wadsworth, 1994.

Hofstede,G. Cultures Consequence: International Differences inWork Related Values. London, Sage, 1984.

Marcic, D and Puffer, S M. Management International: Cases, Exercise and Readings. St. Paul,West Publishing, 1994.

Mead, R. International Management: Cross Cultural dimensions. BlackWell, Camb., Mass., 1994.

Mendenhall, M. etc., Global Management. Cambridge Massachusetts.,Blackwell, 1995. Bhattacharya, Deepak Kumar; Technological Change and Manpower Development, Excel

Publications 2010. Aggarwala, Tanuja; Strategic HRM Oxford University Press.2010. Mankin, David; Human Resource Development, Oxford University Press.2012 Haldar, Udai; Human Resource Development, Oxford University Press.2010 Dessler, Garry & Varakkey, Biju;Human Resource Management , 12th Edition, Pearson

Education 2012. Clark, Jon; Human Resource Management and Technology Change, Sage, London, 1993. Gampbell, A & Warner, M.; New Technology, Skills, and Management, Routledge, London,

1992. Rastogi, P.N.; Management of Technology and Innovation, Sage, New Delhi, 1995. Gupta, S.C.; International HRM, Macmillan India.2012. Ray and French; International HRM, University Press, 2010 Bartlett, Cand Ghoshal, S.; Transnational Management: Text, Cases and Readings in Cross

Border Management. Chicago, Irwin, 1995. Hofstede, G.; Cultures Consequence: International Differences in Work Related Values.

London, Sage, 1984. Mead, R.; International Management: Cross Cultural dimensions. BlackWell, Camb., Mass.,

1994.

91 | P a g e

Evans, Pucik and Barsoux; The Global Challenge- framework for international human resource management, Tata McGraw-Hill Irwin.

Dowling, Peter J and Welch, Denice E.; International Human Resource Management- Cengage Learning 2010

Aswathappa, K.; International Human Resource Management, McGraw Hill 2009 Tayeb, Monir H.; International Human Resource Management, Oxford University Press – 2005 Rao, P.L.; International Human resource Management, Excel Books, 2009.

92 | P a g e









Course Objective: Change has become imperative in modern organizations. They have to

continuously adapt to changing technologies, consumer preferences, social-political-legal-

administrative conditions. The present paper aims to teach management of change and development

process in the organizations.

Unit I

Human relations and organizational behavior; Background, definitions and related concepts - organisatinal change, Organisational development, organizational health, organizational effectiveness; Objectives of OC & OD; Mapping of Organisational climate; Organizational Design - Various organizational structures and their effects. Approaches to OC & OD.

Unit II

Organizational Change: Nature, meaning and types of organizational Change; Resistance to Change; Managing resistance to change; Implementing Change. Conflict Management. Forces for organizational change; Models of organizational Change- Lewin’s Model and System Model of change; Building support for change.

Unit III

Organizational Development: Steps in OD Process, General Competencies for OD Professionals; Values, Assumptions and beliefs in O.D; Ethics of O.D. Professionals; O.D. Interventions- An overview, Nature, major families of O.D. interventions- Interpersonal, Team, Intergroup, Third party & System Interventions, Sensitivity training; Confrontation meeting; Transactional analysis; Contemporary OD Interventions - Learning Organizations, Organization Restructuring, Employee Involvement and Work Design; Future of Organization Development.

93 | P a g e

Unit IV

Quality Philosophies Concept of Quality, Quality as the basis of market competition, Historical review, Quality philosophy of Deming, Juran, crossby etc., Obstacles, Integrating productivity and Quality. Organization of Quality; Introduction to TQM; Benchmarking, Taquchi's Quality Engineering, Total productive maintenance, SQC, Kaizen, Six sigma concept. Introduction to ISO 9000 & ISO 14000; Quality Audit. Reading List Bosterfied el al.; Total Quality Management, Pearson Education, India, 2001. Johan Bank; The Essence of Total Quality Management, Prentice Hall of India, 2000. Logothelis; Managing for Total Quality, Prentice Hall of India, 2000. Sundra Raju; Total Quality Management, Tata Mcgraw Hills, Publishing Company, 1997. K.C. Arora, S.K. Kataria; TQM and ISO 9000. French and Bell; Organizations Development. Prentice Hall of India. New Delhi, 1991. French, W L. et al.; Organization Development theory, Practice and research 3rd ed. Universal

Book Stall, New Delhi, 1990. Singh, Kavita; Organizational Change & Development, Excel Books.2010 Robbins ,Judge and Vohra; Organisational Behaviour, Pearson Education India 2011 Kinicki and Krietner; Organisational Behaviour, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 2011

Newstrom; Organisational Behaviour at Work, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 2011.

Baron and Greenberg; Behaviour in Organisations, PHI, 2011.

Jones and Mathew; Organisation Designs, Theory and Change, Pearson Education, 2011

Pareek, Udai; Understanding Organisational Behaviour, Oxford University Press,2012.

Huse, F E. and Cummings, T G.; Organizations, Development and Change. 3rd ed. New York, West, 1985.

94 | P a g e

MABE 4th Semester Paper- MABE 441



INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS






Course Objective: In the contemporary world with globalization and liberalization more and more

attention is being given to industry. This course intends to provide knowledge to the students on the

basic issues such as productivity, efficiency, capacity utilization and debates involved in the

industrial development of India. The objective is to provide a thorough knowledge about the

economics of industry in a cogent and analytical manner, particularly in the Indian context.

Unit-I Concept and Organization of a firm – ownership, control and objectives of the firm; Growth of the firm –Theory and evidence, constraints on firm’s growth; Productivity, efficiency and Capacity utilization – concept and measurement; Theories of industrial location – Weber and Sargent theories.

Unit-II Sellers’ concentration; Product differentiation; Entry conditions; Market structure and profitability; Product pricing – theories and evidence. Methods of project evaluation; Ranking of Projects – NPV and IRR; Theories and empirical evidence on Mergers and Acquisitions (M & A’s).

Unit - III

Industrial Policy in India – evolution and paradigm shift; Recent trends in Indian industrial growth; National manufacturing Policy 2011.Regional industrial growth in India; Industrial economic concentration and remedial measures; Development of Cottage and Small Scale industries; Recent Policy Measures.

95 | P a g e

Unit-IV Industrial Finance; Sources of short term and long term finance; Industrial Financial Institutions: Role and functioning in India; Corporate securities; Ownership and creditorship securities. Structure of Industrial labour; Globalization and labour ; Industrial legislation – Industrial Disputes Act ,1947 and Factories Act, 1948 . Industrial relations – Worker’s participation in management and Collective Bargaining; Exit policy and safety nets.

Basic Reading List

Ahluwalia, I.J. (1985), Industrial Growth in India, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. Arun Monappa- Industrial Relations,Tata Mcgraw Hill,1997. Barthwal, R.R. (2000), Industrial Economics, Wiley Eastern Ltd. New Delhi. Cherunilam, F. (1994), Industrial Economics: Indian Perspective (3rd Edition), Himalaya

Publishing House, Mumbai. C.S. Venkata Ratnam-Industrial Relations ,Oxford University Press,2008. Chadha, V. and G.S. Bhalla (1999), Industrial Development in India: The Post Reform Scene, Kalyanai Publishers, New Delhi.

Desai, B. (1999), Industrial Economy in India (3rd Edition), Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai.

Hajela, F.D. (1998), Labour Restructuring in India : A Critique of the New Economic Policies, Commonwealth Publishers, New Delhi.

Government of India, Economic Survey (Annual). Kuchhal, S.C. (1980), Industrial Economy of India (5th Edition), Chaitanya Publishing House,

Allahbad. Mishra &Puri-Indian Economy, Himalaya Publishing House ,2008 Reserve Bank of India, Report on Currency and Finance (Annual). Ratna Sen-Industrial Relations in India Shifting Paradigms,Mcmillan,2005 Website of Labour Ministry (Government of India) Additional Reading List

Bains, J.S. (1996), Industrial Organization, Cheltanham, U.K. Bagchi, A. and M. Banerjee (Eds.) (1979), Change and Choice in Indian Industry, Bagchi

Publications, Calcutta. Brahmananda, P.R. and V.R. Panchmukhi (Eds.) (1987), The Development Process of the

Indian Economy, Himalaya Publishing, Bombay. Chakravarty, S. (1987), Development Planning: The Indian Experience, Oxford University

Press, New Delhi. Chandra, Prasanna (1995), Projects: Planning Analysis, Selection, Implementation and Review,

Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi Harndeen, J.B. (1975), The Economics of Corporate Economy, Dunellen Publishers, New York. Joshi, V. and I.M.D. Little (1999), India: Macro Economics and Political Economy: 1964-1991,

Oxford University Press, New Delhi. Jalan, B. (1996), India’s Economy Policy, Viking, New Delhi.

96 | P a g e

Kemien, M.T. and N.L. Schwartz (1982), Market Structure and Innovation, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

Kelkar, V.L. and V.V. Bhnoji Rao (Eds.) (1996), India Development Policy Imperatives, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

Mamoria and Mamoria (2000), Dynamics of Industrial Relations in India (15th Edition), Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai.

Sen, R. and B. Chatterjee (2001), Indian Economy: Agenda for the 21st Century (Essays in honour of Professor P.R. Brahmananda), Deep and Deep Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.

97 | P a g e









Course Objective: The important role infrastructure plays in a country’s development need not be

reiterated. In case of developing countries, lack of adequate infrastructure has been held as a major

obstacle to growth. Of the various categories of infrastructure, the category of social overhead

capital has gained particular prominence. The contents of the paper ‘Economics of Infrastructure’

exposes the student wholly to issues involved in development of infrastructure in developing

countries like India.

Unit I

Infrastructure – Physical & Social Infrastructure; Infrastructure as a public good; Role of infrastructure in economic development; Issues & policies in financing of infrastructure; Theory of natural monopoly. The peak load-off load problem; Pricing of infrastructure.

Unit II

Components of a transport system - road, rail, air and water transport. Characteristics, advantages and disadvantages of each, Economic analysis of transport: Transport as an economic activity, cost of transport, pricing of transport services, transport policy and development in a changing environment.

Unit III

Energy economics – Primacy of energy in the process of economic development. Factors determining energy demand. Effects of energy shortages. Energy conservation, Renewable and non conventional sources of energy. Current Electricity Policies, and programmes.

Unit IV

98 | P a g e

Education and Economic Growth, Approaches to Educational Planning - Social Demand, Rate of Return and Manpower Balance Approaches. The Case for Universal, Free, Primary Education; The issues & challenges in Indian higher education.

Health Dimensions of Development; Determinants of Health Poverty, Malnutrition, Illiteracy and Lack of Information; Economic Dimensions of Health Care Demand and Supply of Health Care; Financing of Health Care and Resource Constraints.

Reading List

Aronofsky, J., A. Rao and M. Shakeen (Eds.): Energy Policy Baru, R.V.: Private Health Care in India: Social Characteristics and Trends. Blaug, M. (Ed.): Economics of Education, Vol. I & II. Centre for Monitoring Indian Economy: India: Energy Sector. Crew, M A and P R Kleindorfer (1979): Public Utility Economics, Macmillan, London. Indian Council of Social Science Research (ICSSR) (1976): Economics of Infrastructure

Vol. VI, New Delhi. McCrakis, M.S. (Ed.): Energy: Demand Conservation and Institution Problems McMohan, W W : Education and Development: Measuring the Social Benefits, Oxford

University Press, Oxford. Misra and Puri, Indian Economy : Himalaya Publishing Co., Mumbai. Munty, D. (Ed.): Transport: Selected Readings. National Council of Applied Economic Research (NCAER) (1996): India Infrastructure

Report: Policy Implications for Growth and Welfare, NCAER Nelson, J.R.: Marginal Cost Pricing in Practice. Nordhaus, W.D. (Ed.): International Studies of the Demand for Energy. Norton, H.S. Modern Transport Economics. Pachauri R K (ed) : Energy Policy for India, Macmillan Co. of India. Panchamukhi, P R : Economics of Health: A Trend Report in ICSSR, A Survey of Research

in Economics, Vol. VI, Infrastructure, Allied Publishers, Delhi. Panchamukhi, P.R.: Economics of Health: A Trend Report in ICSSR, A Survey of Research

in Economics, Vol. VI, Infrastructure, Allied, Delhi. Parikh J (ed) : Energy Models for 2000 and Beyond, Tata McGrw Hill, New Delhi. Parikh K S : India Infrastructure Report 2012, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. Parikh KS : India Development Report 2009, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. Phillips, A. and O.E. Williamson (Eds.): Prices: Issues in Theory, Practice and Public

Policy. Tata Energy Research Institute (1995): Environmental Considerations and Options in

Managing India's Long Term Energy Strategy, Mumbai. Turvey, R. and D. Anderson: Electricity Economics. Woodhall M : Cost benefit Analysis in Educational Planning, UNESCO, Paris.

99 | P a g e



DIRECT TAXES-II






Course Objective: The present paper is remaining part of the Direct Taxes studied in Sem III by

the students. It will help them to compute income taxes for salaries, property income, business

income or capital gains.

Unit I

Computation of Income under the Head Salaries – Salaries and Allowances, Valuation of Perquisites, Deductions.

Unit II

Computation of Income under the Head House Property: Valuation of Property; Annual Value; Deductions.

Unit III

Profits and Gains of Business or Profession – Deductions, Expressly Allowed and Disallowed; Depreciation.

Unit IV

Capital Gains – Transfer; Chargeability; Short-Term and Long-Term Capital Gains; Cost of Acquisition; Capital Gains Exempt from Income Tax.

Base Text Book

V.K. Singhania: Direct Taxes Law & Practice, Taxman.

100 | P a g e

Reading List

Mehrotra and Goyal: Income Tax Law & Practice, Sahitya Bhavan. V.K. Singhania: Direct Taxes Law & Practice, Taxman. Bhagawati Prasad: Income Tax Law & Practice. Manoharan T.N.: Income Tax Law & Practice. Income Tax Act 1956 and Finance Act of the relevant year

101 | P a g e



CORPORATE TAX PLANNING






Course Objective: The basic objective of this course is to acquaint the students with implications

of tax structure and corporate tax planning in operational as well as strategic terms.

Unit I

Concept of tax planning ; Tax avoidance and tax evasions; Methods of tax planning; justification of

tax; Computation of income for joint stock company including house property, Business and

profession, capital gain and income from other sources.

Unit II

Tax Planning and Financial Management Decisions : Tax planning relating to capital structure

decision, dividend policy, Inter- corporate dividends and bonus shares.; Tax Planning and

Managerial Decisions : Tax planning in respect of own or lease, sale of assets used for scientific

research, make or buy decisions; Repair, Replace, renewal or renovation and shutdown or continue

decisions.

Unit III

Tax Planning and Compensations Package; Double taxation avoidance agreements; Tax Planning

and non-residents; Tax provisions relating to free trade zones, backward area and Infrastructure

sectors.

102 | P a g e

Unit IV

Tax issues relating to amalgamation, merger and acquisition; Tax payment, tax deduction and

collection at source, advance Payment of Tax.

Base Text Book

Ahuja, Girish and Ravi Gupta. Corporate Tax Planning and Management. New Delhi: Bharat Law House, n.d.

Reading List

Taxman’s students guide to income tax by Dr. Vinod K. Singhania. Systematic approach to income tax and central sales tax by Ahuja and Gupta. Income tax ready reckoner by V. G. Mehta. Service tax law, practice, and procedures by C. Parthasarthy and Agarwal. Acharya, Shuklendra and M.G. Gurha. Tax Planning under Direct Taxes. Allahabad:

Modern Law Publication, n.d.

Ahuja, Girish and Ravi Gupta. Corporate Tax Planning and Management. New Delhi: Bharat Law House, n.d.

Goyal, S.P. Direct Tax Planning. Agra: Sahitya Bhawan, n.d. Mittal, D.P. Law of Transfer Pricing. New Delhi: Taxmann, n.d. Pagare, Dinkar. Direct Tax Planning and Management. New Delhi: Sultan Chand and Sons,

n.d. Singhania, Vinod K., Kapil Singhania and Monica Singhania. Direct Taxes Planning and

Management. New Delhi: Taxmann, n.d.

103 | P a g e

Dean, Faculty of Social Sciences Kurukshetra University Kurukshetra

(Establishment by the State Legislature Act XII of 1956)

Syllabus of Optional Elective Papers, Faculty of Social Sciences (Choice Based Credit System)

w.e.f. 2016-2017

Semester – II

Course No.

Name of the Subject/Paper No. of Credit

Teaching Scheme

(Hrs/Week)

Examination Scheme (Marks)

L T P (Sem. Theory Exam)

Internal Assess-ment

Total

OESS-01 Indian Security Concerns 2 - - - 50 -- 50 OESS-02 Introduction of Economics 2 - - - 50 -- 50 OESS-03 Modern World 2 - - - 50 -- 50 OESS-04 Human Rights in India 2 - - - 50 -- 50 OESS-05 Indian Polity 2 - - - 50 -- 50 OESS-06 Understanding Psychology 2 - - - 50 -- 50 OESS-07 Indian Constitution, Social

Justice and Administration 2 - - - 50 -- 50

OESS-08 Basic of Social Work 2 - - - 50 -- 50 OESS-09 General Sociology 2 - - - 50 -- 50 OESS-10 Women Studies Some

Contemporary Issues 2 - - - 50 -- 50

104 | P a g e

OESS-01, Indian Security Concerns

Maximum Marks – 50 (Two Credits) Time – 2 Hours

Objective: The paper is aimed at to acquaint the student about the basic concepts and challenges

to Indian Security. Note: Attempt any four questions out of the eight questions. All questions carry equal

marks. Unit-I Key Concepts of Security : National Power and National Security, Balance of

Power, Regional Security, Collective Security, Comprehensive Security, Common Security, Equal Security, Non Alignment, Neutrality.

Unit-II Problems of India’s Security: The Conceptual Framework- Global, Regional and

Local environment and its impact on Security thinking. –National Security Objectives: Core Values, National Interests.

Unit –III Challenges to Indian Security: Individual, Sub – National; National, Regional and

International Levels. Unit- IV National Security Organizations in India: Higher Defence Structure in India,

National Security Council, Para – Military and Civil Defence. Suggested Readings

Gautam Sen Conceptualizing Security for India in the 21st Century, Atlantic Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi ,2007.

Prabhakaran Paleri National Security: Imperatives and Challenges, : Tata McGraw-Hill Pub. Co.New Delhi 2008.

J. N. Chaudri India's Problems of National Security, United Service Institution of India, 1973

K. Subramaniam India's Security perspectives,ABC Publishing House, 1982 Kanti P. Bajpai & India's National Security: A Reader (Critical Issues in Harsh V. Pant (Author, Editor) Indian Politics), Oxford 2013 Rahul K.Bhonsle India- Security Scope 2006: The New Great Game Kalpaz

Publication, (Delhi 2006) R.S. Yadav Bharat Ki Videsh Niti (In Hindi), Pearson, New Delhi, 2013 R.S. Yadav & India’s Foreign Policy: Contemporary Trends, New Delhi,

Shipra, 2009 R.S. Yadav (ed.) India’s Foreign Policy Towards 2000 A.D., New Delhi. Deepak & Shrikant Paranjpe (ed.) India' s Internal Security : Issues and Perspectives (Kalinga,

New Delhi,2009) Sujeet Samaddar. Defence Development and National Security: Linkages in the

Indian Context. (Gyan Publishing House. New Delhi 2005)

105 | P a g e

OESS – 02, Introduction to Economics


Objective: Paper aims to acquaint the student about the basic concepts of Economics. Note: Attempt any four questions out of the eight questions. All questions carry equal

marks. Unit-I Micro and Macro Economics; Central Economic Problems; Features of Capitalist

Economy, Socialist Economy and Mixed Economy; Role of Government in a Market Economy; Demand and Factors Affecting Demand; Supply and factors Affecting supply.

Unit-II Factors of Production; Cost Concepts; Revenue Concepts; Market Forms and their

Features. Unit-III Concept of Economic Growth and Economic Development; Human Development

Index (HDI); Gender Development Index (GDI); Budget and Fiscal Deficits; Types of Unemployment; Concepts of Saving and Investment.

Unit-IV Current Account and Capital Account; Balance of Payment and Balance of Trade;

Concept of Exchange Rate. Suggested Readings

1. Thomas Sowell, “Economics – A Common Sense Guide to the Economy”, Basic Books Publishers, ISBN 978-0-465-05684-2.

2. D. Begg, R. Dornbusch and S. Fischer, Economics, McGraw Hill.

3. James D. Gwartney, Richard L. Stroup and Dwight R. Lee, “Common Sense Economics: What Everyone Should Know About Wealth and Prosperity N. Gregory Mankiw , “Principles of

Economics”, Cengage Learning, USA.

106 | P a g e

OESS – 03, Modern World


Objective: Paper aims to acquaint the student about major events of world history. Note: Attempt any four questions out of the eight questions. All questions carry equal

marks. Unit – I Renaissance and its Impact; Reformation and its Impact; Enlightenment and

Scientific Revolution; Rise of Capitalism: Mercantile Revolution; Early Colonial System and Its Consequences.

Unit-II American Revolution – Nature and Impact; French Revolution–Nature and Impact;

Growth of Capitalism: Industrial Revolution; Imperialism: Origins and Consequences.

Unit – III World War-I: Origins and Consequences; Socialism and Bolshevik Revolution in

Russia; Paris Peace Settlement and its Consequences; Working of League of Nations.

Unit-IV Economic Depression and its Effects; Rise of Fascism: Italy and Germany; World

War-II: Origins and Consequences; United Nations Organization and World Peace; The Cold War: Origins, and Phases

Suggested Readings:

Carr, E.H. 1917 : Before and After Chauhan, D. S. Europe Ka Itihas (Hindi) Chauhan, D. S. Samkalin Europe (Hindi) Dorpalen, Andreas Europe in the 20th Century Fisher, H.A.L. A History of Europe Hobsbawm, E.J. Age of Extremes : The Short Twentieth Century (1914-

1991) Joll, James Origins of the First World War Parks, H.B. The United States of America Parry, J.P. The Age of Renaissance Porter, Andrew European Imperialism 1860-1914 Rabb, Theodore K. The Struggle for Stability in Early Modern Europe Roberts, J.M. Europe 1880-1945 Roth, J.J. (ed.) World War II : A Turning Point in Modern History Soboul, Albert History of the French Revolution, 2 Volumes Taylor A.J.P. The Struggle for Mastery in Europe Thompson, David Europe Since Napoleon Wiskemann, E. Europe of the Dictator Wood, Anthony History of Europe 1915-1960

107 | P a g e

OESS - 04, Human Rights in India

Maximum Marks – 50 (Two Credits)

Time – 2 Hours Objective: The paper aims at analyzing the Provisions of Human Rights in the Indian System. Note: Attempt any four questions out of the eight questions. All questions carry equal

marks. Unit I Historical Developments of Human Rights in India, Human Rights and Indian

Constitution, Human Rights Declaration and Implications for India. Unit II Human Rights Violence in Society; In Family; Among Caste and Religious Groups. Unit III Role and Working of National Human Rights Commission and State Human Rights

Commissions. Unit IV Protection of Human Rights of Women, Children, Minorities etc. Suggested Readings:

1. Bajwa, G.S., Human Rights in India: Implementation and Violations. Anmol publications : Delhi, 1995.

2. Mehta P.L., Human Rights under the Indian Constitution, Deep and Deep

publications: New Delhi, 2002. 3. Venkataramiah E.S. (Ed), Human Rights in a Changing World, International Law

Association: New Delhi, 1988. 4. Hingorani R.C., Human Rights in India Oxford: University of Michigan, 1985. 5. Shankar Sen, Human Rights in a Developing Society, Sage Publications: New Delhi,

2009.

108 | P a g e

OESS –05, Indian Polity


Objective: Paper aims to acquaint the student about the basic features of Indian constitution

along with its institutional arrangements. Note: Attempt any four questions out of the eight questions. All questions carry equal

marks.

Unit-I Constitutional Foundations: Basic Features of the Indian Constitution, Preamble, Fundamental Rights, Directive Principles of State Policy.

Unit-II Union Executive and Legislature: President, Prime Minister, Council of Ministers,

Parliament. Unit –III State Executive and Legislature: Governor, Chief Minister, State Legislature. Unit- IV Judiciary: Supreme Court, High Courts, Judicial Review, judicial Activism.

Suggested Readings

G. Austin The Indian Constitution Cornerstone of a Nation, OLIP , Oxford, 1966

S. Kaviraj Politics in India, OUP, Delhi, 1998

A. Kholi, (ed.) The Success of India’s Democracy, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge,

2001

R. Kothari Politics in India, Orient Longman, New Delhi, 1970

WH Morris Jones Government and Politics in India, BI Publications, Delhi, 1974

Neera Chandoke Contemporary India,Pearson, New Delhi, 2012

PR Brass Politics of India since Independence, Cambridge University Press,

Cambridge, 1994.

M V Pylee An Introduction to the Constitution of India, Vikas Publications, New Delhi,

1998

B. Chakrabarty & Indian Government and Politics, Sage, New Delhi, 2008. R K Pandey MP Singh & Indian Politics: Constitutional Foundations and Institutional R. Saxena Functioning, PHI, New Delhi, 2011.

109 | P a g e

OESS – 06, Understanding Psychology


Objective: To provide the basic understanding about various psychological concepts and

methods. Note: Attempt any four questions out of the eight questions. All questions carry equal

marks. Unit I Psychology: Nature, Historical background and field of Psychology, Emergence of

Psychology as a Science Methods: Experimental, interview, observation and case study.

Unit-II Biological bases of behavior: Cell-Structure and functions. Neuron: Structure, types and functions. Introduction to nervous system and its organization.

.Unit-III Learning: Nature, Types-Trial and Error, Conditioning and Insight; Memory: Nature, study methods, Factors Affecting Memory, STM and LTM; forgetting.

Unit-IV Personality: Nature, Genetic and Environmental determinants of personality. Type and Trait approach. Personality Assessment. Intelligence:Nature and Measurement.

Suggested Readings 1. Ciccarelli, S.K. & Meyer, G.E. (2006). Psychology. New Delhi: Pearson Education, Inc. 2. Leukel, F. (2002). Introduction to Physiological Psychology (IIIrd Edition). New Delhi:

CBS Publishers and Distributors. 3. Atkinson, R.L., Atkinson, R.L. et. Al. (1985). Introduction to Psychology. N.Y. HBJ

Publishers. 4. Singh, A.K. (2009). Uchatar Samanya Manovigyan. Delhi: Moti Lal Banarsidas.

110 | P a g e

OESS – 07, Indian Constitution, Social Justice and Administration


Objective: The constitution of India defines the basic objectives and functioning of the

government. It has provisions for bringing about social change and defining the relationship between individual citizen and the state. It lays out certain ideals that form the basis of the kind of country that we as a citizens aspire to live in. An in-depth analysis of various basic areas of constitution is the main objective of this inter disciplinary course. This helps the students to strengthen their understanding of Indian constitution and functioning of government.

Note: Attempt any four questions out of the eight questions. All questions carry equal

marks. Unit - I Indian Constitution:

a) Nature of the Constitution salient features – Preamble b) Fundamental Rights, Directive Principles – Fundamental Duties c) Amendments of the Constitution: Procedure for Amendment – Emergency

Provisions

Unit – II Centre – State Relations and Local Self Government

a) Distinctive features of Indian Federation b) Legislative, Administrative and Financial relations between the Union and

the States c) Decentralization Experiments in India – 73rd and 74th Amendments and their

implementation

Unit – III State Government and Social Welfare Administration

a) Governor, Chief Minister and Council of Ministers b) Changing Nature of District Administration and the role of District Collector c) Reservations for SC,ST and Backward classes

Unit IV Accountability & Control

a) Legislative and Executive Control b) Judicial Control and Judicial Review c) Right to Information Act d) National SC and ST Commission; Women’s Commission

Suggested Readings

111 | P a g e

Avasthi and Avasthi (2002), Indian Administration, Laxmi Narain Aggarwal, Agra.

Basu, D.D. (2000), Introduction to the Constitution of India, Wadhwa and Company, New Delhi.

Fadia and Fadia, Indian Administration (2002), Sahitya Bhavan Publications, Agra.

Granville Austin (1999), The Indian Constitution – Corner Stone of a Nation, OUP, New Delhi.

Maheshwari, S.R. (2001) Indian Administration, Orient Blackswan, Hyderabad

Pylee, M.V. (2009), An Introduction to the Constitution of India, Vikas, New Delhi.

Ramesh K. Arora and Rajni Goyal (2000), India Public Administration, Vishwa Parkashan, New Delhi.

Sathe, S.P. (2002), Judicial Activism in India, New Delhi: Oxford University Press.

Subhash C. Kashyap (2010), Indian Constitution: Conflicts and Controversies, Vitasta,

The Constitution of India, Government of India, 2009.

Tummala K. Krishna (1996), Public Administration in India, Allied Publications, New Delhi.

112 | P a g e

OESS – 08, Basics of Social Work


Objectives: 1. To make the students understand the conceptual framework of social work

practice. 2. To make the students aware about the historical development of social work in

Indian and worldwide perspective. 3. To make the students aware about reforms movements. 4. To make the students aware about the programme and services for vulnerable

groups.

Note: Attempt any four questions out of the eight questions. All questions carry equal marks.

Unit-I Social work: Meaning, nature and its scope,

Relationship of Social Work with other Social Sciences. Goals of Social Work. Methods of social work.

Unit-II A brief discussion of historical development of Social Work in U.K, U.S.A and India. Contribution of reform movements in 19th and 20th century: Brahma Samaj, Arya Samaj, Gandhian and Vinoba Bhave.

Unit-III Social work and related concepts: social service, social services, social reform, social

welfare, social development. Unit-IV Programme and services for family welfare, children welfare, women welfare, youth

welfare and aged welfare at national level. Suggested Readings 1. Dasgupta , S Ed. (1967) Towards a Philosophy of Social Works in India, Popular Book

service, New Delhi. 2. Desai, Murli, (2006) Ideologies and social Work: Historical and Contemporary

Analyses, Rawat Publication, New Delhi 3. Friedlander, W.A. (1964) Concepts and Methods of Social Work, Prentice-Hall. of India Pvt,

Ltd. New Delhi. 4. Gore, M.S. (1965) Social Work and Social Work Education Asia Publishing

House, Bombay 5. Mishra, P.D.(2004) Social Work: Profession in India, New Royal Book Company 6. Roy, Sanjay (2011 Introduction to Social Work and practice in India, Akansha

Publication House New, Delhi. 7. Singh Surendra and Social Work Education Challenge and Opportunities, New Srivastava S. P. (ed) (2005) Royal Book Publications, Lucknow. 8. Shastri , R.R.(1996) Social Work tradition in India, Welfare Forum & Research Organization, Varanasi

113 | P a g e

OESS – 09, General Sociology


Objective: Paper aims to acquaint the student about the basic concepts of Sociology. Note: Attempt any four questions out of the eight questions. All questions carry equal

marks.

Unit - I Sociology: Emergence of Sociology as a discipline in General, and in India; Pioneers of Sociology- August Comte, Emile Durkheim, Herbert Spencer and Max Weber.

Unit – II Nature, Scope and Significance of Sociology; Sociology and Other Social Sciences. Unit – III Society, Culture, Social Group, Community, Association, Social Structure and

Social System; Status and Role; Unit - IV Social Stratification, Social Mobility, Social Control; Social Change, Socialization;

Social Processes: Associative and Dissociative. Suggested Readings Abrahm, F. History of Sociological Thought, OUP, New Delhi Aron, Raymond Main Currents in Sociological Thought (Vol. I & II), Penguin; 1965/67 Atal, Yogesh Indian Sociology: From Where to Where, Rawat Publication, Jaipur, 2003 Bottomore, T.B. Sociology: A Guide to Problems and Literature, George Allen and

Unwin, Delhi; 1972 Davis, Kingsley Human Society, Surjeet Publicaiton , New Delhi; 1981. Fox, R. Kinship and Marriage; 1963 Giddens Anthony Sociology Oxford University Press; 1989. Ginsberg, M. Sociology, Surjeet Publication, New Delhi; 1979 Haralambos Sociology: Themes and Perspectives, Bell and Hyman, London; 1985 Inkeles, A What is Sociology, Prentice hall, New Delhi; 1987 Johnson, H.M. Sociology: A Systematic Introduction, Allied Publishers, New Delhi; 1995 Kapadia, K.M. Marriage and Family in India, Oxford University Press, Bombay; 1980 MacIver, R. M. and Society –An Introductory Analysis, Macmillan, New Delhi; 1974. H.Page Nisbet The Sociological Tradition, Heinemann Education. Books Ltd. Parsons, T. The Social System, Amerind Pub. Company; 1951 Smelser, J. Sociology, Prentice Hall, New Delhi.

114 | P a g e

OESS-10, Women’s Studies: Some Contemporary Issues


Objective:

1. To introduce the students to the basic concepts, terms of women’s studies and contemporary issues related to women.

2. To enhance students awareness about feminism and feminist movements in India.


marks. Unit-I Gender Relations Framework, Concept of Sex and Gender, Patriarchy, Masculinity

and Feminity, Gender Discrimination, Women and Work. Unit-II Feminism and Feminist Movements in India. Unit-III Contemporary Issues: Female Foeticide and Infanticide, Declining Sex Ratio,

Domestic Violence, Sexual Harassment of Women at Workplace, Role of Community and Caste in the Contemporary Context, Honour Killings.

Unit-IV Empowerment of Women: Need, Objectives and Process, Status of Women in India Suggested Readings Maria Mies Indian Women and Patriarchy Concept Publishing Company, New

Delhi 1980 Agarwal, Bina Patriarchy and the Modernizing State: An Introduction in Agarwal

Bina (ed), Structures of Patriarchy, Kali for Women, New Delhi, 1988

Banks, Olive Faces of Feminism: A Study of Feminism as a Social Movement, St. Martin’s Press, New York, 1981

Bhasin and Khan Some Questions on Feminism, Kali for Women, New Delhi, 1986 Jayawardane, Kumari Feminism and Nationalism in the Third World, The Institute of

Social Studies, The Hague, Netherlands, 1987 Bhasin, Kamala What is Patriarchy? Kali for Women, New Delhi, 1993 Yadav, Sushma Gender Issues in India Mishra, Anil Dutt Raha, Manish Kumar Matriliny to Patriliny (A Study of the Rabha Society) Agarwal, Anurag Female Foeticide Myth and Reality Singh, Subhash Chandra Gender Violence, New Delhi, Serials Publications, 2011

115 | P a g e

Dean, Faculty of Social Sciences

Kurukshetra University Kurukshetra (Establishment by the State Legislature Act XII of 1956)

Syllabus of Optional Elective Papers, Faculty of Social Sciences (Choice Based Credit System)

w.e.f. 2016-2017

Semester – III

Course No.

Name of the Subject/Paper No. of Credit

Teaching Scheme

(Hrs/Week)

Examination Scheme (Marks)

L T P (Sem. Theory Exam)

Internal Assess-ment

Total

OESS-11 Global Security Concerns 2 - - - 50 -- 50 OESS-12 Indian Economic Policy 2 - - - 50 -- 50 OESS-13 Modern India 1858-1947 2 - - - 50 -- 50 OESS-14 Human Rights in International

Relations 2 - - - 50 -- 50

OESS-15 India and World 2 - - - 50 -- 50 OESS-16 Application of Psychology 2 - - - 50 -- 50 OESS-17 Civil Services in India 2 - - - 50 -- 50 OESS-18 Methods of Social Work 2 - - - 50 -- 50 OESS-19 Indian Society and Culture 2 - - - 50 -- 50 OESS-20 Women and Law 2 - - - 50 -- 50

116 | P a g e

OESS - 11, Global Security Concerns


Objective: This paper is aimed at to acquaint the student about the changing contours of global

security issues. Note: Attempt any four questions out of the eight questions. All questions carry equal

marks

Unit-I The Issue of Global Security in the New Century: Basic Ideas, Weapons of Mass Destruction and Global Security and International Terrorism

Unit-II End of Cold War and emergence of New World Order. Nuclear Proliferation &

NPT, CTBT, MTCR, NMD.

Unit-III U.N.O. – World Peace and Security,Challenges to the UN System: Reform and Restructuring.

Unit-IV International and Regional Security Organizations:Military Alliances and Pacts, Peace Treaties, Defence Cooperation, Strategic Partnership and Security Dialogue.

Suggested Readings

K.P.Saksena Reforming the United Nations (New Delhi: Sage, 1993) M.S.Rajan World Order and the United Nations ( New Delhi: Har Anand, 1995) P. M. Kamath Reforming and Restructuring the United Nations, New Delhi,

AnamikaPublishers & Distributors (P) Ltd, 2007. Ramesh Thakur Global Governance and the UN: An Unfinished Journey, Indiana

University Press, 2010 Rumki Basu The United Nations: Structures and Functions of an International

Organization, New Delhi: Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd., 1994. Sean Kay Global Security in the Twenty-First Century: The Quest for Power

and the Search for Peace,Rowman & Littlefield,2015 Stephen Aris, Regional Organisations and Security : Conceptions and Andreas Wenger (Editors) Practices, Taylor & Francis, 2015 SJR Bilgrami International Organination, (New Delhi: Vikas, 1983) Sugatha Ramcharrit United nations and World Politics (New Delhi: Kaniksha, 1998) Thomas G. Weiss The United Nations, Peace and Security: From Collective & Ramesh Thakur Security to the Responsibility to Protect, Cambridge University Press, 2006 Vincent Pouliot International Security in Practice: The Politics of NATO-Russia

Diplomacy, Cambridge University press, 2010 Werner Feld, Robert Jordan International Organizations: A Comparative Approach, and Leon Hurwitz, eds., Praeger, Michigan, 1988.

117 | P a g e

OESS-12, Indian Economic Policy


Objective: Paper aims to acquaint the student about the status of Indian economy with regard to

national income, poverty, fiscal and monetary policy, agriculture and industrial sector and banking.

Note: Attempt any four questions out of the eight questions. All questions carry equal marks.

Unit-I Basic Features of Indian Economy in Present Times; Basic Concepts in National Income; Poverty Alleviation Programmes in India

Unit-II Direct Taxes and Indirect Taxes - Types, Merits and Demerits; Fiscal Policy and its Instruments; Causes of Inflation in India

Unit-III Role of Agricultural Sector in India; Role of Industrial Sector in India; Role of Service Sector in India; Liberalisation, Privatisation and Globalisation - Concepts Only

Unit-IV Money and its Functions; Commercial Banks and their Functions; Functions of RBI; Monetary Policy and its Instruments

Suggested Readings

1. Mishra and Puri, “Indian Economy”, Himalaya Publications.

2. Uma Kapila, “Indian Economy- Performance and Policies”, Academic Foundation.

3. R.R.Paul, “Monetary Economics”, Kalyani Publishers.

4. Uma Kapila , “Indian Economy since Independence”, Academic Foundation.

5. Latest Economic Survey of GOI.

6. Latest Union Budget.

118 | P a g e

OESS – 13, Modern India 1858-1947


Objective: Paper aims to acquaint the student about the major activities of the freedom

movement since 1857. Note: Attempt any four questions out of the eight questions. All questions carry equal

marks. Unit– I Nature of the British Colonial State and Government; Land Revenue Administration;

Civil and Judicial Administration – Indian Civil Services and Bureaucracy; Relations with the Princely States

Unit – II Capitalist Change and Emergence of the New Social Order; Cultural Renaissance;

Emergence of Indian Nationalism; Founding of Indian National Congress; The Moderates and the Extremists: Ideology and Politics; Rise of the Revolutionary Movement

Unit – III Founding of the Muslim League and its Politics; The Home Rule Movement;

Emergence of Mahatma Gandhi: Non Cooperation Movement, Civil-Disobedience Movement and Quiet India Movement; Subhas Chandra Bose and Indian National Army

Unit – IV Rise of the Left Wing in Indian Politics; Round Table Conference and the

Conclusion of Poona Pact; Congress Socialist Party; Rise of the Demand of Pakistan; Cripps Mission, Cabinet Mission and Mountbatten Plan: Partition and Independence

Suggested Readings

Agrow, D. Moderates and Extremists in the Indian National Movement

Bipan Chandra Rise and Growth of Economic Nationalism in India

Bipan Chandra Colonialism and Nationalism in India

Bipan Chandra et. al. India’s Struggle for Independence

Brown, Judith Gandhi’s Rise to Power: Indian Politics 1915-22

Desai, A.R. Social Background of Indian Nationalism

Dube, S.C. Contemporary India and its Modernization

Dutt, R.C. Economic History of India, Vols. I & II

Guha, Ranjit (ed.) Subaltern Studies, Vols. I – XI

Gupta, M.N. History of the Revolutionary Movement in India

119 | P a g e

Hasan, Mushirul India’s Partition : Process, Strategy and Mobilization

Hasan, Mushirul Nationalism and Communal Politics in India 1916-1928

Joshi, Shashi and

Bhagwan Josh

Struggle for Hegemony in India, Vols. I-III

Low, D.A. (ed.) Congress and the Raj : Facets of the Indian Struggle 1917-

1947

Majumdar, R.C. History of the Freedom Movement in India, Vols. I-IV

Majumdar, R.C. (ed.) British Paramountey and Indian Renaissance, Vols. IX & X

Mehrotra, S.R. The Emergence of the Indian National Congress

Mishra, Girish Adhunik Bharat Ka Aarthik Itihas (Hindi)

Moon, Penderal Divide and Quit

Nanda, B.R. Gandhi and his Critics

Page, David Prelude to Partition

Pannikar, K.N. National and Left Movements in India

Pavlov, V.I. The Indian Capitalist Class : A Historical Study

Roy, Satya Murti (ed.) Bharat Mein Upniveshvad Evam Rashtravad (Hindi)

Sarkar, Sumit Modern India 1885-1947

Shankar, Girija The Socialist Trend in the Indian National Congress

Shukla, R.L. (ed.) Adhunik Bharat Ka Itihas (Hindi)

Singh, L.P. The Left Wing in India

Sitaramayya, P. History of the Indian National Congress, Vols. I-III

Tara Chand History of the Freedom Movement in India, Vols. I-IV

Tomlinson, B.R. Economy of Modern India 1860-1970

120 | P a g e

OESS-14, Human Rights in International Relations


Objective: The paper aims to acquaint the student regarding international concern for Human

Rights as well as International Mechanisms for protection of Human Rights. Note: Attempt any four questions out of the eight questions. All questions carry equal

marks. Unit I Meaning and Nature of Human Rights, United Nations Charter on Human Rights,

Universal Declaration on Human Rights and Three Generations of Human Rights Unit II Nature and Scope of Human Rights in Developed and Developing Countries. Unit III Working and Role of The United Nations Commission of Human Rights and UN

High commission for Refugees. Unit IV Human Rights Watch Organization/Insitutions – Amnesty International Organization

and Transparency International. Suggested Readings

1. Resurrect RC, KA, Human Rights, Sherides Book Company: New Delhi, 1995 2. Nagendra Singh, Enforcement of Human Rights, Eastern Law House:Calcutta, 1986. 3. Agarwal, H.O, Implementation of Human Rights Corners with special refrence to

India, DK Publishers:New Delhi, 1993.

121 | P a g e

OESS- 15, India and World


Objective: Paper aims to acquaint the student about India’s Foreign policy and role in global

order. Note: Attempt any four questions out of the eight questions. All questions carry equal

marks.

Unit-I Meaning, Nature, Determinants and Making of India’s Foreign Policy.

Unit-II India’s Relations with Major Powers: USA, USSR & Russia.

Unit-III India and its Neighbors: China, Pakistan, small Neighbours, and SAARC.

Unit-IV India’s Nuclear Policy, India and the United Nations, India and NAM. Suggested Readings R.S. Yadav Bharat Ki Videsh Niti (In Hindi), Pearson , New Delhi, 2013 R.S. Yadav & India’s Foreign Policy : Contemporary Trends, New Delhi, Shipra, 2009 Suresh Dhanda, eds R.S. Yadav (ed.) India’s Foreign Policy Towards 2000 A.D., New Delhi, Deepak & Deep, 1993 J. Bandhopahdyaya The Making of India’s Foreign Policy, Calcutta, Allied , 1979 N.K Jha (ed.) India’s Foreign Policy in a Changing World , New Delhi, South Asian

Publishers, 2000 C. Raja Mohan Crossing The Rubicon : The shaping of India’s New Foreign Policy, New

Delhi, Viking , 2003 N S. Sisodida & Emerging India : Security and Foreign Policy perspective, New Delhi C Uday Bhaskar, eds Promilla, 2007 Rajen Harshe & Engaging With the World : Critical Reflections on India’s Foreign KM. Sethi, eds, Policy, New Delhi, Orient Longman, 2005 Anand Mathur & India Profile in Polycentric world orders, Jaipur, RBSA, 2008 Sohan Lal Meena, eds Jayanta Kumar Roy India’s Foreign Relations, 1947-2007, Routledge, New Delhi, 2011. Anjali Ghosh, et al. India’s Foreign Policy Person, New Delhi, 2012.

122 | P a g e

OESS – 16, Application of Psychology


Objective: To provide the basic knowledge about the application of psychology in difference

field. Note: Attempt any four questions out of the eight questions. All questions carry equal

marks. Unit-I Abnormal behavior: Nature, criteria of abnormality. Types of mental disorders:

Anxiety based and Psychosomatic disorders. Mental Retardation.

Unit-II Counselling: Nature, need and types: Directive and Non-Directive approaches. Application of counseling: counseling for emotional problems of adolescents, counseling of delinquants, and victims of substance abuse.

Unit-III Industrial and Organizational Behavior: Nature, micro and macro approaches/ behaviors. Work Motivation, Communication, decision making, conflict resolution. Selection and Placement in organizations.

Unit-IV Application of psychology in understanding the problems of Population, Deprivation, Criminal Behavior; Issue of minority groups.

Suggested Readings 1. Gelso, C.J. & Fretz, B.R. (2000). Counselling Psychology (2nd Ed.). London: Wadsworth 2. Rao, S.N. (2001). Counselling Psychology. New Delhi: Tata Mc Graw-Hill. 3. Carson, R.C., Butcher, T.N. , & Susan, M. (2001). Abnormal Psychology and Modern Life.

New York: Harper Collins. 4. Blum, M.L. & Naylor, J.C. (1984). Industrial Psychology: Its theoretical and social

foundations. New Delhi: CBS Publishers.

123 | P a g e

OESS – 17, Civil Services in India


Time – 2 Hours

Objective: The term ‘civil services’ covers the large number of permanent officials required to run the machinery of government. The core of parliamentary government, which we have adopted in India, is that the ultimate responsibility for running the administration rests with the elected representatives of the people. Ministers lay down the policy and it is for the civil servants to carry out this policy. The interdisciplinary course aims to present an overview of the structure, trends and issues related to the civil services in India.


marks. Unit – I Civil Services: Concept and Evolution

a) Concept, Significance and Evolution of Civil Services. b) Classification of Civil services (All India Services, Central Services, State

Services and Local Services) c) Union Public Service Commission and other Service Commissions

Unit – II Bureaucracy

a) Concept of Bureaucracy – Historical Evolution b) Civil Service: Neutrality and Commitment c) Relationship between Politicians and Civil Servants

Unit – III Public Personnel Administration

a) Recruitment: Methods and significance b) Training of Public Servants in India – Promotion System in India c) Disciplinary Procedure for Civil Servants

Unit – IV Civil Services – Citizenry Interface

a) Civil Society and Administration b) Technology and Changing Nature of Public Services c) Ethics and Accountability d) Civil Service Reforms – IInd ARC Recommendations e) Civil Services in the context of Globalization

Suggested Readings

Armstrong, Michael (200&09, A Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice, Kogan Page, London.

Aswathappa K. (2013), Human Resource Management: Text and Cases, McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

124 | P a g e

Farazmand, Ali (1994), Hand of Bureaucracy, Taylor & Francis, New York.

Flippo Edvin B., (1976), Principles of Personnel Management, McGraw Hill

Goel, S.L. & Rajneesh, Shalini (2003), Public Personnel Administration, Deep & Deep, New Delhi.

Government of India, Second ARC, Tenth Report on ‘Refurbishing of Personnel Administration.

Jack Robin, et al (eds) (1994), Handbook of Public Personnel Administration, Taylor & Francis, New York.

Jain, R.B. (1994), Aspects of Personnel Administration, IIPA, New Delhi.

Maheshwari Sriram (2005), Public Administration in India: The higher Civil Service, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Naff, Katherine C., Norma M. Riccucci, (2014), Personnel Management in Government: Politics and Process (Seventh Edition), CRC Taylor & Francis, New York.

Riccucci, Norma(2007), Public Personnel Administration and Labor Relations, M.E. Sharpe, New York.

Shafritz Jay M et.al. (2001), Personnel Management in Government, Marcel Dekker, New York.

Stahl O. Glenn (1983), Public Personnel Administration, Harper & Row.

Tead, Ordway (1920), Personnel Administration, University of California Libraries.

125 | P a g e

OESS – 18, Methods of Social Work Objectives:

1. To equip learners with theoretical knowledge for working with individuals and families and community.

2. To understand the basic elements of community organization and social action. 3. To develop conceptual understanding of administrative matters in the area of welfare

and development. 4. Develop an understanding of scientific approach to human and its process and

conduct simple research projects/exercises. Note: Attempt any four questions out of the eight questions. All questions carry equal

marks. Unit- I Social Case Work: concept, meaning, basic assumptions, objectives, Principles,

process of Social Case Work. Unit-II Social Group Work: concept, meaning, basics assumptions, objectives, principles

and process of Social Group work. Unit-III Community Organization: concept, meaning, basic assumptions, objectives,

principles and process of Community Organization. Social Action: concepts, meaning, principles, types.

Unit-IV Social Welfare Administration: concept, meaning, functions, principles.

Social Work Research : concepts, nature and steps.

Suggested Readings 1. Bhattacharya, Sanjai.2006 Social Work Administration and Development, Rawat

Publications, Jaipur. 2. Florence, H.1964 Case Work: A Psycho social therapy, Random House, New

York. 3. Goldstein, H.1970 Social Work Practice: A Unitary Approach, Carolina:

University. of S.Carolina Press. 4. Grace, Mathew, 1992 Introduction to School Case Work, Tata Institute of Social

Sciences, Mumbai 5. Mishra, P.D.1985 Samajik Vijyaktik Sewa Karya (Hindi) Uttar Pradesh Hindi.

Sansthan, Lucknow. 6. Perlman, 1957 Social Case Work-A Problem solving Process, Chicago: The

University of Chicago Press, V Impression.

126 | P a g e

7. Pathak, S.H. 1966 Records in Social Case Work, Delhi School of Social Work, Delhi

8. Ross M.G.1955 Community Organisation: Theory, Principles and Practice,

New York: Harper and Brothers. 9.Siddiqui H.Y.2005 Group Work, theories and Practice, Rawat Publication New

Delhi. . .10. Siddiqui, H.Y.1997 Working with Communities: An Introduction to Community

Work, New Dehli, Hira Publications. 11. Trecker, Harleigh, B.1990 Social Group Work: Principles and Practice, New York:

Association Press. 12.Upadhyay, R.K. 2003 Social Case Work, Rawat Publications, New Delhi, Jaipur. 13. Upadhyay, R.K. 1991 Samajik Vijyaktik Karya (Hindi) Haryana Sahitaya

Academy, C handigarh. 14.Upadhyay, R.K. 1993 Indian Philosophical Concepts in Clinical Social work,

Kurukshetra Press, Kurukshetra

127 | P a g e

OESS – 19, Indian Society and Culture


Objective: Paper aims to acquaint the student about the basic of Indian Society and its cultural moorings.

Note:- Attempt any four questions out of the eight questions. All questions carry equal

marks. Unit - I Indian Society: Historical Moorings of Indian Society, Indian Social Structure

Unit-II Modernity and Tradition, factors Contributing to the Diversity and Unity of Indian

Society; Caste and class; Recent Scenario.

Unit – III Social Institutions: Marriage, Family, Kinship, Religion

Unit – IV Social Problems & Challenges: Communalism, Poverty, Violence against women,

Child Abuse, Sex ratio.

Suggested Readings Ahuja, Ram Indian Social System, Jaipur; Rawat Publication, 1993. Ahuja, Ram Social Problem in India, Jaipur; Rawat Publication, 1997. Dube, S.C. Indian Society: National Book Trust, New Delhi; 1986 Dumont, L. Homo Hierarchicus: The Caste System and Its Implications;

University of Chicago Press, 1981. Ghurye, G.S. Caste and Class in India: Popular Prakashan, Bombay; 1969 Irawati Karve Family, Kinship and Marriage in India, New Delhi. OUP Kapadia, K.M . Marriage and Family in India: Oxford University Press,

Bombay; 1960 Mandelbaum, D.G. Society in India: Popular Prakashan, Bombay; 1972 Majumdar & Madan An Introduction to Social Anthropology: Asia Publication

House, Bombay; 1966 Momin, A.R. The Legacy of G.S. Ghurye: A Centennial festschrift,

Popular Prakashan, Bombay; 1996 Patel, Tulsi (Ed.) Bharat Mein Parivar: Sanrachna evam Vyahvahar, New Delhi;

Rawat/Sage Publication, 2011 Prabhu, P.H. Hindu Social Organization: Popular Parkashan, Bombay; 1963 Sharma, K.L. Essays on Social Stratification, Rawat Publication, Jaipur; 1980 Singh, Yogendra. Modernization of Indian Tradition: Thomson press, Faridabad; 1973 Singer & Cohn Structure and Change in Indian Society: Aldine Publishing Co.

Chicago; 1968 Srinivas, M.N. India Social Structure: New Delhi, Hindustan Publishing Corp. 1980 Srinivas & Shah Hinduism in International Encyclopedia of Social Science,

Meerut; 1970

128 | P a g e

OESS – 20, Women and Law


Time – 2 Hours Objective:

1. To create awareness among the students about the legal measures provided in the Indian constitution for safeguarding women’s interests.

2. To aquaint the learner with various legal provisions for women.


marks. Unit-I Constitution of India and Gender Equality:

Fundamental Rights, Directive Principles, Fundamental Duties, Public Interest Litigation (Art 32,226)

Unit-II National Commission for Women Act, 1990, Criminal Law Amendment Act, 2013, Indian Penal Code (Rape, Kidnapping & Abduction, Cruelty to Wife, Dowry Death)

Unit-III Hindu Marriage Act: Marriage, Divorce, Maintenance

Muslim Law: Marriage, Divorce, Maintenance Property Rights

Unit-IV Medical Termination of Pregnancy Act, 1971, PC & PNDT Act, 2003, Domestic Violence Act, 2005, Dowry Prohibition Act, 1961, Sexual Harassment of Women at Workplace, 2013

Suggested Readings Dr. T. Bhattacharya Indian Penal Code, Central Law Agency, Allahabad. Dr. Devinder Singh Human Rights and Women and Law, Allahabad Law Agency,

Faridabad. Shobha Saxena Crimes Against Women and Protective Laws, Deep & Deep

Publication, New Delhi. Narender Kumar Constitutional Law of India, Allahabad Law Agency, 2006. V.K. Shukla Constitution Laws of India, Revised by Mahendra P. Singh,

Eastern Book Company, Lucknow. Justice A.S. Anand Justice for Women-Concerns and Expressions, Universal Law

Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., Delhi. Diwan Paras Family Law, (Law of Marriage and Divorce in India), Sterling

Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1983. Chavan, Nandini, Personal Law Reforms and Gender Empowerment, Hope. Qutub Jehan Kidwai India Publication, Gurgaon, 2006.

1

SAVITRIBAI PHULE PUNE UNIVERSITY

DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS

REVISED SYLLABUS FOR M.A. ECONOMICS CREDIT SEMESTER COURSE-2017

Syllabus for M.A Part I Semester I, II and M.A Part II Semester III, IV to be started from July 2017.

1. There will be a total of FOUR courses in Semester I and II each for M.A in Economics. The students will have THREE Core courses and will have to select ONE Non-Core course in Semester I and II each.

2. There will be a total of FOUR courses in Semester III and IV each. In

Semester III the students will have TWO Core courses and will have to select ONE EACH from the TWO Non-Core courses (I & II). In Semester IV the students will have to take THREE core courses and ONE non- Core course.

M. A Part I (Sem. I and II) and Part II (Sem. III and IV) - Each course will have FOUR credits. Syllabus only for University Department of Economics

2

Course Structure of MA Economics Part I and Part II Semester Wise

Course No.

Semester I Course

No. Semester II

Core Core EC- 101 Micro Economics –I EC- 201 Micro Economics –II EC- 102 Public Finance- I EC- 202 Public Finance – II EC- 103 International Economics-I EC- 203 International Economics – II

Non- Core Non-Core EC- 104 Basic Statistics EC- 204 Economics of Agriculture EC- 105 Mathematics for

Economics EC -205 Statistical Techniques

Semester III Semester IV Core Core

EC- 301 Macro Economics –I EC- 401 Macro Economics-II EC- 302 Economic of Growth and

Development – I EC- 402 Economic of Growth and

Development - II EC- 403 Research Project Non- Core -I Non-Core EC- 303 Research Methodology

for Economics EC- 404 Banking and financial

Institutions - II EC- 304 Methods of Econometrics EC- 405 Economics of Finance Non- Core-II EC- 406 Environmental Economics EC- 305 Banking and financial

Institutions –I EC- 407 Gender Economics

EC- 306 Institutional Economics EC- 307 Economics of

Discrimination

EC- 308 National Income Accounting

3

Semester -I Core course

EC-101 Micro Economics - I

Topic I Introduction

1. Introduction to Microeconomics

2. Market and Price Mechanism

3. Disturbances to equilibrium, floor price, ceiling price.

Topic II Consumer Theory

1. The concept of and Measurement of Utility: Cardinal and Ordinal.

2. Theory of Consumer Choice: Marginal Utility Theory, Indifference curve approach,

Income and Price expansion paths, Demand Curve. Income and Substitution Effects:

Slutskey and Hicksian approach.

3. Theory of Revealed Preference.

4. Concept of Elasticity: Price, Income and Cross Elasticities.

5. Concept and Measurement of Consumers’ Surplus.

Topic III Production Theory

1. Production Function – One input, two inputs: Isoquants, Isocosts. Cobb- Douglas

Production Function.

2. Law of Variable Proportions Returns to the Variable Factor Returns to Scale.

3. Producer’s Equilibrium with One Input and Two Inputs.

4. Cost Curves, Total, Average and Marginal Cost Curves. Short Run and Long Run Cost

Curves.

5. Derivation of Supply curve, Firm and Industry, Short Run and Long Run.

6. Concept and Measurement of Producers’ Surplus.

Topic IV The Theory of Public Choice

1. Pareto Optimality

2. Bergson-Samuelson Social Welfare Function.

3. Compensation Criteria.

4. Arrow’s Social Welfare Function and Impossibility Theorem.

5. Amartya Sen’s Collective Choice Theory.

Recommended Books:

1. Varian, Hal (1996): Intermediate Microeconomics, W.W. Norton and Company, New

York.

2. Hirschleifer J and A. Glazer and D Hirschleifer (2005): Price Theory and Applications,

Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.

3. Pindyck, Robert, Rubenfeld and Prem Mehta (2009): Micro Economics, Pearson,

Prentice Hall of India, New Dehli.

4

4. Sen, A.(1999): Micro Economics: Theory and Applications, Oxford University Press,

New Delhi.

5. Misra S.K. and V.K. Puri (2001): Advanced Microeconomic Theory, Himalay Publishing

House, Mumbai.

6. Kreps, David, M (1990): A Course in Microeconomic Theory, Prentice Hall of India,

New Dehli.

5

Semester -I Core Course

EC-102 Public Finance-I


1. Role of government in organized society: changing perspective

2. Government in a mixed economy, public and private sector, government as an agent for

economic planning and development Stabilization policy

3. Private goods, public goods and merit goods.

Topic II Rationale for Public Policy

1. Allocation of resource provision of public goods

2. Voluntary exchange models – Impossibility of decentralized provision of public goods -

contributions of Samuelson and Musgrave

3. Demand revealing schemes for public goods, contributions of Clark, Groves and Leyard,

Tiebout model

4. Theory of club goods

Topic III Public Expenditure

1. Wagner’s law of increasing state activities

2. Wiseman-Peacock hypothesis, Pure theory of public expenditure

3. Structure and growth of public expenditure – Criteria for public investment – Social cost-

benefit analysis – Project evaluation – Estimation of costs – Discount rate – Reforms in

expenditure budgeting

4. Gender budgeting

Topic IV Taxation

1. Theory of incidence Alternative concepts of incidence –

2. Allocative and equity aspects of individual taxes, Benefit and ability to pay approaches

3. Theory of optimal taxation, Excess burden of taxes, Trade-off between equity and

efficiency.

Topic V Public Debt

1. Burden of public debt

2. Sources of public debt

6

3. Public borrowings and price level, Crowding out of private investment and activity

4. Principles of debt management and repayment.

Recommended Books

1. Musgrave R. A. and Musgrave P. S. – The theory of Public Finance (different editions)

2. Stiglitz Joseph – Economics of the Public Sector (different editions)

3. Herber – Modern Public Finance (different editions)

7

Semester- I Core Course

EC-103 International Economics -I

Topic I Overview of classical and modern trade theories

1. Classical theories of trade – Ricardo and the concept of Comparative Cost theory -

opportunity cost

2. Heckscher Ohlin theorem, Verification of physical criterion and price criterion, Leontief

paradox

3. Factor price equalization and explanation with Edgeworth Box diagram

Topic II New trade theories

1. New theories of trade, product life cycle and technology gap models

2. Preference similarity and intra-industry trade, economies of scale and monopolistic

competition – Krugman

3. Theory of economic geography – Krugman, Neo-Heckscher Ohlin theorem

Topic III Terms of Trade

1. Gains from trade – offer curve

2. Growth and Terms of Trade

3. Different concepts of Terms of Trade and factors affecting Terms of Trade

Topic IV Trade Policy

1. Free trade vs. controlled trade

2. Tariffs and non-tariff barriers on trade, Effects of tariffs under partial equilibrium. (Price

effect, terms of trade effect, competitive effect, income effect, revenue effect)

3. Effects under general equilibrium, Stolper – Samuelson theorem

Topic V Regional Integration

1. Customs Unions: Features of customs union theory.

2. Trade creation and trade diversion under customs union (with graphical treatment)

3. The creation of European Union

Topic VI GATT and WTO

1. International trade agreements. Dunkel proposal.

2. WTO, Important Agreements under WTO,

3. Major developments since 1995,

8

4. Expected effects on the Indian economy.

Recommended Books

1. Paul R. Krugman & Maurice Obstfeld (2009) International Economics Theory and

Policy. Pearson Education Publication New Delhi

2. Chacholiades, M. (1990), International Trade: Theory and Policy, McGraw Hill,

Kogakusha, Japan.

3. Kindleberger, C.P. International Economics, R.D. Irwin, Homewood.

4. Salvatore, D. (1997), International Economics, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, N.J.,

New York.

5. Soderston, Bo (2005), International Economics, The Macmillan Press Ltd., London.

6. GATT, the Dunkel Draft and India J. M. Economic and Political Weekly, Vol. 27, No. 4

(Jan. 25, 1992), pp. 140-142

9

Semester- I Non- Core Course

EC- 104 Basic Statistics

Topic I Basic Math

1. Ratios

2. Writing a ratio in its simplest form, average rate

3. Direct and Inverse proportion, Problems involving ratio, rate and proportion

4. Expressing one quantity as a percentage of another, comparing two quantities by

percentage greater than 100 %, Increasing/Decreasing a quantity by a given percentage,

reverse percentages, problems involving percentages

Topic II Graphs and Diagrams

1. Graphs and Interpretation of graphs

2. Types of graphs: Bar Diagram, Flow charts, Pie charts, Pictograph, line Graphs, time

series graphs, Stem and leaf Plot, Histogram, Dot Plot, Scatter plot

3. Types of Functions, and functions and graphs

Topic III Set Theory

1. Set language and Notations

Topic IV Basic Statistics

1. Measures of Central Tendency

2. Dispersion and Standard deviation

3. Skewness and Kurtosis

Topic V Sampling and Sampling Techniques

1. Principles of Sampling and factors affecting the inferences drawn from a sample

2. Concept of population, Sample, Sampling Frame and Sampling unit

3. Characteristics of representative sample

4. Sampling error

5. Types of Probability sampling techniques

6. Types of Non-probability sampling techniques

Recommended Books

1. Basic Statistics - A. L. Nagar and R. K. Das

2. Mathematics and statistics for Economics- G.S. Monga

3. Statistical Methods - S.P. Gupta

4. Statistical Methods – S.C. Gupta

5. Statistics- Schaum’s outlines , Murray R. Spiegel; Larry J Stephen

10

Semester- I Non- Core Course

EC-105 Mathematical techniques for Economics

Topic I Basic Application in Economics

1. Review and Basic Applications in Economics

Topic II Exponential and Logarithmic Functions

1. Single Variable Calculus

2. Marginal Concepts b Elasticity

3. Optimization Techniques in Consumer and Production Theory

4. Consumer and Producer Surplus

Topic III Multivariate Calculus

1. Economic Functions

2. Unconstraint Optimization

3. Constraint Optimization

4. Special Matrices (Jacobian and Hessian)

5. Comparative Statics and Concave Programming

Topic IV

1. First Order Differential Equation

2. First Order Difference Equations

3. Second Order Differential Equations

Topic V Growth Models

Recommended Readings

1. Introduction to Mathematical Economics - Edward Dowling

2. Mathematics for Economists - Simon and Blume

3. Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics - Chiang

11

Semester- II Core course

EC-201 Micro Economics- II

Topic I Classification of Markets

1. Classification of Markets.

2. Various types of Markets.

3. Short Run, Long Run Equilibrium of a Single Firm under Competitive conditions.

Topic II Monopoly

1. Measurement of Monopoly power.

2. Equilibrium of a Firm under Monopoly.

3. Price Discrimination under Monopoly, different types.

4. Comparison of monopoly and perfectly competitive market outcomes.

5. Regulation of Monopoly Power.

Topic III Imperfect Competition

1. Monopolistic Competition, Price and Non-price competition, Equilibrium.

2. Product Differentiation, Selling Costs and Excess Capacity.

3. Oligopoly, Basic market structure, Non-collusive oligopoly.

4. Collusive oligopoly, Cartels, Price and Output Determination.

5. Goal of Profit Maximization in Oligopoly.

6. Game Theory, Basic Concepts, Dominant Strategy Equilibrium, Nash

Equilibrium, Repeated and Sequential Games.

Topic IV Imperfect Markets

1. Asymmetric Information: Markets for Lemons

2. Moral Hazard

3. Adverse Selection: Incomplete Information

4. Signalling

Recommended Books

1. Varian, Hal (1996): Intermediate Microeconomics, W.W. Norton and Company,

New York.

12

2. Hirschleifer J and A. Glazer and D Hirschleifer (2005): Price Theory and

Applications,

Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.

3. Pindyck, Robert, Rubenfeld and Prem Mehta (2009): MicroEconomics, Pearson,

Prentice Hall of India, New Dehli.

4. Sen, A.(1999): Micro Economics: Theory and Applications, Oxford University

Press, New Delhi.

5. Misra S.K. and V.K. Puri (2001): Advanced Microeconomic Theory, Himalaya

Publishing House, Mumbai.

6. Kreps, David, M (1990): A Course in Microeconomic Theory, Prentice Hall of India,

New Delhi.

13

Semester- II Core course

EC-202 Pubic Finance -II

Topic I Fiscal Policy

1. Objectives of fiscal policy: Full employment, Inflation Targeting, Economic growth,

Redistribution of income and wealth

2. Fiscal policy for stabilization: Automatic vs. discretionary stabilization, Alternative

measures of resource mobilization and their impact on growth, Distribution and prices

Balanced budget multiplier

3. Interdependence of fiscal and monetary policies, budgetary deficits and their implications

Topic II Indian Tax system

1. Tax Revenue and Non-tax revenue of the Union, State and local bodies

2. Analysis of central and state government budgets – Fiscal situation of the PRIs, Current

Budget Analysis

3. Major taxes in India: Direct and indirect taxes,

4. Major issues in Indian Taxation: Taxation of agriculture, Expenditure tax, Taxes on

Services, Issue of Subsidies

5. Reform in direct and indirect taxes

6. Goods and Services Tax (GST)

7. Trends in public expenditure and public debt

Topic III Fiscal Federalism

1. Fiscal federalism in India: Vertical and horizontal imbalance

2. Assignment of function and sources of revenue: Constitutional provisions, Finance

commission and planning commission, NITI Ayog

3. Devolution of resources and grants: Theory of grants, Resource transfer from union to

state, Criteria for transfer of resources

4. Center-state financial relations in India: Problems if states’ resources and indebtedness

Topic IV Issues in India’s Fiscal system

1. Reports of Finance Commissions (FC) in India: Recommendations of the latest FC -

Fiscal crisis and fiscal sector reforms in India

14

Recommended Books

1. Ulbrich – Public Finance in Theory and Practice

2. Bagchi A. – Readings in Public Finance

3. Various Budget Documents in India

4. Economic Surveys of India

15

Semester-II Core course

EC-203 International Economics -II

Topic I Balance of payments

1. Equilibrium and Disequilibrium in BOP, adjustment mechanisms. 2. Marshall-Lerner elasticity approach, absorption approach, monetary approach. 3. Internal and External Balance. Swan model. 4. Foreign Trade Multiplier, National Income and BOP

Topic II Exchange rates and International Finance

1. Exchange rates. Flexible and fixed exchange rates. 2. Determination of exchange rates. Revaluation and Devaluation, Appreciation and

Depreciation. 3. Spot rates and forward contracts, options and futures. 4. International financial markets. Euro currency markets, International Bond Markets

Topic III Exchange control

1. Convertibility on current account and capital account 2. Exchange control: objectives of exchange control. Methods of exchange control, 3. Indian Rupee and its fluctuations in the international currency markets.

Topic IV Optimum Currency Area

1. Optimum currency area theories - Factor mobility theory, propensity to inflation theory 2. The process of development of Euro as an optimum currency area

Topic V FDI and Multinational Corporations

1. International financial movements and types of risk involved. Portfolio and direct investments and their impact on the economy.

2. Multinational and transnational corporations and their role in the international financial movements.

Topic VI International Financial System and Financial Crises

1. Rise and fall of Bretton Wood and the emerging International Monetary system, 2. IMF, mechanism of membership quota and borrowing, Conditionality. Role of SDRs

16

3. Important International Financial Crisis and the role of IMF (Oil crisis, International debt crisis, South East Asian crisis, Brazil Argentina and Mexico, Russia and Eastern Europe, The sub-prime crisis)

Recommended readings

1. James Ingram: International Economics (Ed. 1995)

2. Krugman International Economics (latest edition) 3. Kennen International Economics (latest edition) 4. Maurice Levi: International Finance 5. Killick, T (1995), IMF Stabilisation Programme, Journal of Development Economics;

Volume 32, No. 1, pp.158-178. 6. Mukherjee Smriti, Capital Account Liberalization & Flexible Exchange Rate 7. Salvatore, D ., International Economics 8th edition John Wiley and Sons, Inc

17

Semester- II Non- Core course

EC-204 Economics of Agriculture


1. Fundamental differences between agricultural economics and economics of other businesses

2. Agrarian Questions and Differing forms of Capitalist Agrarian Transition

3. Mode of Agricultural Sectors

4. Classification of Farmers

5. Structure of Backward Agriculture- Causes of low investment and low productivity

6. Risk and Uncertainty in production- Inputs related risk and risk aversion, Adoption of

Modern Technology under production uncertainty

Topic II Demand and Supply of agricultural products

1. Production function analysis in agricultural production behavior

2. Economics of supply of agricultural products

3. Theories of Marketable and Marketed Surplus

4. Theory of Demand for agricultural products

5. Price and Income elasticities of Demand for agricultural products

6. Factors affecting demand for agricultural products

Topic III Price determination in agriculture

1. Free market mechanism analysis

2. Fluctuation in agricultural prices

3. Wholesale and retail markets

4. Price spread

5. Role of hedging and speculation

6. Forward markets in agricultural commodities.

Topic IV Major aspects of Indian Agriculture

1. Institutional aspects of agricultural development in India

2. Growth and fluctuations in Indian Agriculture

3. Farm size, productivity and efficiency in Indian Agriculture

4. Price and Terms of Trade

5. Risk and Uncertainty

18

Topic V Agricultural Policy

1. Agricultural Price Polity in India - Minimum Support Price

2. Food Security– Food Corporation of India and Public Distribution System

3. Indian Agriculture in context of WTO regime

Recommended Books

1) Drummond E. V. and Goodwin J. W. – Agricultural Economics

2) Penson J, Capps O and Rosson – Introduction to Agricultural Economics

3) Sadhu and Singh - Agricultural Economics

4) Reddy R and Sastry D – Agricultural Economics

5) Lakhi and Singh – Agricultural Economics

6) Basu, K (1990): Agrarian Structure and Economic Development, Hardware Economic

Publisher

7) Basu, K and P. Nayak (1992): Development Policy and Economic Theory, Oxford

University Press

8) Basu, K (1997): Agrarian Questions, Oxford University Press, New Delhi

9) Bhaduri, A (1983): The Economic Structure of Backward Agriculture, Macmillan India

Limited

10) Bardhan, Pranab (1989). The Economic Theory of Agrarian Institutions (Ed), Claredon Press

Oxford

11) Abhirup Sarkar (1993): On the formation of Agricultural Price, Journal of Development

Economics

12) Ghatak, S and K. Insergent (1984): Agriculture and Economic Development, Select Book

Service

13) Acharya S S and N L Agarwal (1994): Agricultural Prices- Analysis and Policy, Oxford and

IBH, New Delhi

14) Gulati, A, Mauruce R. Landes, Ganguly, K. (2009): Indian Agriculture: Managing Growth

with Equity, Apublication of the Agricultural and Applied Economics Association

15) Dandekar, M L (1987): Growth and Equity in Agriculture, International Journal of

Agriculture Economics

16) Shah, C H (1986): Growth and Inequality in Agriculture, International Journal of Agriculture

Economics

17) Sen A K, and Rudra A (1980): Farm Size and Labour Use: Analysis and Policy, Economic

and Political Economics

18) Ramesh Chand, P A, Lakshmi Prasanna, Arun Singh (2011): Farm Size and Productivity:

Understanding the Strengths of Smallholders and Improving their Livelihood, Economic and

Political Weekly Supplements

19) Rudra, Ashok (1984): Indian Agriculture: Myths and Realities

20) Joshi, P C (1987): Institutional Aspects of Agricultural Development

19

Semester- II Non- Core course

EC-205 Statistical Techniques

Topic I Introduction to statistics

1. Overview of Basic statistical concepts,

2. Central tendency and dispersion, Skewness and Kurtosis

Topic II Correlation and regression

1. Correlation coefficient, Standard error and regression equations,

2. 0ne variable regression analysis

Topic III Fundamentals of Probability

1. Random Variable, and Mathematical Expectation,

2. Theoretical Distributions (Binomial, Normal, and Poisson)

Topic IV Sampling Techniques

1. Fundamentals of Sampling, Estimation, Statistical Inference,

2. Chi-Square Test, F-Distribution, ANOVA, Association of Attributes, Non-Parametric

Tests

Topic V Index Numbers and Time Series

1. Introduction to index numbers, construction of indices.

2. different forms of indices Introduction to time series

Recommended Books:

1. Comprehensive Statistical Methods - Arora, P.N.; Arora, Sumeet; Arora,

2. Statistical Methods – S. P. Gupta

3. Statistical Methods – S. C. Gupta

20

Semester- III Core Course

EC-301 Macro Economics- I

Topic I National Income

1. Concepts: Gross Domestic Product, Gross National Product, Net Domestic Product-

Nominal and Real domestic product

2. Price Indexes and GDP deflator Concept of disposable Income and Relationships between

Income consumption, Saving, Investment, Government Expenditure, Taxes, Imports and

Exports

3. National Accounts Statistics-system of national income accounting in India. Green Income

Topic II Aggregate Supply Aggregate Demand

1. Difference between Potential Output and Actual Output, Classical Approach, Keynesian

approach

2. Determination of Equilibrium, of Aggregate Demand and Supply, Determination of output

and employment Effects of change in Aggregate Demand and Supply Curves, Classical

Approach, Keynesian approach-neutrality of money

3. Multiplier Effect, Multiplier effect with inclusion of Government sector. (Automatic

stabilizers, balanced budget multiplier)

Topic III Brief structure of IS-LM Model

1. Derivation of IS curve and LM curve, Equilibrium in the Goods and Assets under fixed

and flexible prices, Derivation of aggregate demand schedule

2. Monetary and Fiscal policy: The transmission Mechanism, Liquidity Trap, Fiscal policy

and crowding out Optimum Policy mix with IS-LM model.

Topic IV Consumption Saving, Investment Spending

1. Consumption and saving

2. Theories of consumption: Life cycle hypothesis, Permanent income hypothesis.

3. Investment spending, Marginal productivity of capital, Concept of accelerator and super

multiplier.

Topic V New Keynesian and New classical Approaches:

1. The Real Business cycle Theory, The Rational expectations Revolution

2. New Classical Macroeconomics: Perfect Information, Rational Expectations, Lucas

critique- Imperfect information and asymmetric information, Real business cycle theory

21

Topic VI Open Economy Issues

1. Open Economy IS-LM-BP: The Mundell - Fleming Model, Macroeconomic policy

Stabilization and exchange rate regimes

Topic VII India’s Macro economy

1. Overview. Changes in macro economic variables after 1991

2. Problems and policy

Recommended Books

1. Rudiger Dornbush and Stanley Fisher - Macroeconomics (latest edition)

2. Mankiw-Macroeconomics (latest edition)

3. Branson-Macroeconomics Analysis

4. G. Ackley-Macroeconomics Theory and policy (latest edition)

5. National Accounts Statistics-NAS Measures, Concepts of National Accounts Statistics

22

Semester- III Core course

EC-302 Economics of Growth and Development -I

Topic I Development and Underdevelopment: An Overview

1. The relevance of economic development. Problems in defining economic development

2. Economic growth in historical perspective: Marx, Schumpeter, Gerschenkron

3. Characteristics of LDCs - structural view of underdevelopment

4. The world distribution of income. Development gap.

5. Per capita income as an index of development. Difficulties of measurement and

comparability problems involved in the calculation of per capita according to exchange

rate and purchasing power parity

6. Alternative measures of development gap - HDI

Topic II Poverty and Inequality

1. Poverty and income distribution. Defining poverty and problems of measurement.

2. Income inequality, measurements of inequality.

3. Understanding inequality in the developed and underdeveloped worlds. Impact of

inequality on the process of development.

Topic III Theories of Economic Growth and Development

1. The Harrod-Domar growth model and its application to LDCs

2. Solow’s model of economic growth - The production function approach to the study of

causes of growth

3. The Cobb- Douglas Production function - Embodied and disembodied technical progress

4. Surplus labour (Lewis), big push (Rosenstein-Rodan) , Balanced growth (Nurkse) ,

Unbalanced growth (Hirshman) - The process of cumulative causation (Myrdal), the

center and periphery hypothesis - the dependency school

5. New Endogenous growth models- Intellectual capital: role of learning, education and

research; AK model — Explanations of cross country differentials in economic growth

Topic IV Population growth and economic development

1. Population - basic concepts –

2. the theory of demographic transition - age structures of population

3. Migration - Rural and Urban migrations -The Harris - Todaro Model - problems of

urbanization

4. Employment markets - Formal and informal employments - wage rates

23

Recommended Books

1. Debraj Ray (1998)- development Economics - Latest edition

2. Meier G. and J. Rauch (2004) - leading Issues in Development Economics 7th edition,

Oxford University Press

3. Thirlwall A P.- Growth and Development (6th or 7th edition)

4. Basu, K. (2003), Analytical Development Economics: The Less Developed Economy

Revisited, The MIT press.

5. Bardhan,P. and C. Udry (eds) (2000), 1st edition, Readings in Development Economics,

The MIT Press

24

Semester-III Non-Core Courses -I

EC-303 Research Methodology for Economics

Topic I Meaning of Research

1. Meaning of research in Economics.

2. Types of research (descriptive vs. analytical, fundamental vs. applied, qualitative vs.

quantitative, conceptual vs. empirical, empirical vs. simulation based, conclusion oriented

vs. decision-oriented, historical vs. a-historical.)

3. Importance and utility of Social Science research, Limitations of and difficulties in Social

Science research.

Topic II Research Design

1. Stages involved in designing research -Conceptualizing the research topic.

2. Identifying and formulating the objectives.

3. Understanding the role played by methodology.

Topic III Research Methods and Techniques

1. Research methods and techniques- differences among them, the logical framework of

investigation, the nature of problem and appropriate methodology.

2. Macro-level vs. Micro level research.

3. Data Collection, Sources of Data,

4. Primary Data, Surveys, Interviews, Questionnaires, personal interviews, group

interviews, small group studies, Schedule, Observation, participant or nonparticipant

observation.

5. Secondary data - Collection of Secondary data

6. Case studies.

7. Experimental Method in Social Sciences.

Topic IV Analysis of Data

1. Examination of the collected data - (primary or secondary)

2. Classification and Tabulation, Bi-variate presentation.

3. Graphs and Diagrams

4. Measures of Central Tendencies. Dispersion, Correlation

5. Hypothesis Testing - Definition and Formulation

25

Topic V Research Report Writing

1. Stages of report writing - survey of literature, development of working hypotheses,

preparation of research design, collection of information, processing of collected

information, hypothesis testing, interpretation and generalization,

2. Report writing, references and bibliography.

3. Presentation - Power Point

Recommended Books

1. Guthrie Gerard (2010): Basic Research Methods: An Entry to Social Science Research,

sage Publications, New Delhi.

2. Kothari C.R.(2004) : Research Methodology: Methods and Technique, New Age

International Publishers.

3. Kumar Ranjit (2014): Research Methodology: A Step By Step Guide for Beginners, Sage

Publications, New Dehli.

4. Krishnaswamy K N. and M. Ranganathan (2005): Methodology of Research in Social

Sciences, Himalaya Publishing House.

26

Semester- III Non- Core Course I

EC- 304 Methods of Econometrics

Topic I The nature of regression analysis

1. Two variable Regression model: Concept of PRF, Meaning of Linear Stochastic

specification of PRF

2. Significance of the Stochastic Disturbance Term

Topic II Two variable regressions

1. Estimation through OLS-Assumptions, Estimators and their Properties, Gauss-Markov

Theorem, coefficient of determination,

2. Two Variable Regression: Interval Estimation and hypothesis Testing-Normality

Assumption and Properties of OLS Estimators under Normality Assumption,

3. Confidence Interval and Test of Significance Approach for Regression Coefficients,

Analysis of Variance, Extensions of Two Variable Linear Regression Model - Regression

through the Origin, Functional Forms

Topic III Multiple Regression Analysis

1. Problem of Estimation, Meaning of Partial Regression Coefficients, Adjusted R Square,

Partial Correlation Coefficients, Problem of Inference,

2. Hypothesis testing, Uses of F test, Relaxing the Assumption of the OLS Multicollinearity

and Consequences, Detection through Graphical Method, Spearman's rank Correlation

Method, Goldfeld-Quandt Test, White’s test-remedial measures, Autocorrelation.

3. Nature of the Problem, BLUE Estimator in the Presence of Autocorrelation,

Consequences, Detection of the Problem through Graphical Method and Durbin-Watson

d test, Remedial Measures

27

Topic IV Regression on Dummy Variables

1. Nature of Dummy Variables, Regression on Quantitative and Qualitative Variables,

2. Testing for Structural Stability, Interaction Effects, Use of Dummy variables in Seasonal

Analysis,

3. Use of dummy variables in combining Time series and Cross Sectional Data

Topic V Simultaneous Equation Models

1. Examples, Simultaneous Equation bias, Problem of Identification Definition and Rules

for Identification

2. Estimation of Simultaneous Equation models Recursive Models, Indirect Least Squares

Two stage Least Squares

Topic VI Introduction to Time Series

1. Autoregressive and Distributed Lag Models, Stationary and Non-Stationary Process,

2. Concept of Unit Root Process and Testing, Transforming Non-Stationary Time Series,

3. Introduction to Forecasting using Time Series, Vector Autoregressive Model

Recommended Books

1. Basic Econometrics - Damodar Gujarati

2. Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach - Jeffrey Wooldridge

3. Theory of Econometrics - A Koutsoyinnis

4. Introduction to Econometrics - G. S Maddala

5. Econometric Methods - G S Maddala

28

Semester- III Non- Core Course II

EC- 305 Banking and Financial Institutions – I


1. Overview of Financial System, Function of Financial Markets-role of Financing

Intermediaries, Aspects of risk sharing, transaction costs, information costs,

diversification and conflict of interests.

Topic II Banking system in India

1. Structure of Banking System in India, Central Banking – Reserve Bank of India

Functions & Role, Role of RBI in currency Management. Reserve Management and

Liquidity Management in the post Liberalization period, Monetary Policy of RBI since

1991.

Topic III Commercial Banking

1. Public Sector Banks- Nationalization of Banks – progress and problems post-

nationalization,

2. Private Sector Banks – Old Private Banks in India, Progress & Problems: Guidelines for

New Private Banks, Emergence, Progress & Problems.

3. Regional Rural Banks- Progress & Problems, Role of RRBs in Post reform period

(1991)

4. Introduction of Local Area Banks Cooperative Banking – Progress & Problems of

Cooperative Banking, Policy for Urban Cooperative Banks.

Topic IV Banking sector Reforms after 1991

1. Committee on Indian Financial System 1991 & 1998

2. Objectives of Financial Reforms, Reforms in the Indian Banking Sector since 1991.

Topic V Non - Banking Financial Institutions

1. Definition of NBFC – RBI Classification of NBFCs. Non- banking Institutions-small

savings, Pension Funds, Mutual Funds, Insurance Companies-Meaning & Features,

2. Regulations of NBFCs in India, Performance of NBFCs in India (since 1985) – Number,

Size, volume and structure of deposits.

Recommended Books

1. Bhole L. M. (2004) “Financial Institutions and Markets Structure, Growth and

Innovations” Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd. New Delhi

29

2. Bhasin, Niti (2006) “Banking Developments in India 1947 to 2007” New Century

Publications.

3. Frederic Mishkin and Stanley Eakins (2006) “Financial Markets and institutions”,

Pearson 5th Ed.

4. Kohn Meir “Financial Institutions and markets” Tata McGraw Hill

5. Tannan M L (2010) “Banking Law and Practice in India” Lexis – Nexis India

Reports

1. Report on Trend & Progress of Banking - RBI Annual Reports

2. Report on Currency & Finance – RBI Publication

3. Report of the Committee on Financial Inclusion, 2008

4. Report of the Committee on Financial Sector Reforms ( Raghuram Rajan Committee)

5. Report (2009) (A Hundred Small Steps by Sage Publication)

30

Semester -III Non- Core Course II

EC- 306 Institutional Economics

Topic I Institutions

1. What are Institutions?

2. Social, Political, Cultural and Economic Institutions

3. What do the Institutions do?

Topic II What is Institutional Economics?

1. What does it try to do? The need for Institutional economics

2. Old Institutionalism and New Institutionalism, Challenges posed to Neo-Classical

economics

3. Transactions Costs and Imperfect Information

4. Economies of Scale and Division of Labour

Topic III Institutions as a Fundamental Cause of Long Run Growth vs. High Growth

leading to better Institutions- Empirical evidence.

Topic IV Interface between Institutional economics and Development economics

1. Institutions as a constraint for developing economies

Topic V How do institutions develop/change?

1. How and why do ‘good’ institutions not develop?

2. Which institutions matter?

3. How to get ‘good’ institutions? What should be the institutional agenda for developing

economies? Debate between the two schools of thought

4. What are the ‘right’ institutions for a developing economy? Bardhan’s perspective on

persistence of socially suboptimal institutions

5. Why poor nations remain poor?

Topic V Violence and Social Orders

1. Open Access Order and Limited Access Order

Recommended Books

1. North, Douglas 1990. Institutions, Institutional Change and Economic Performance,

Cambridge University Press

2. North D 1991. Institutions, Journal of Economic Perspectives, Vol. 5, No. 1, pp 97-112.

3. North, Douglas 1993. The New Institutional Economics and Development, Washington

University.

31

4. Williamson O 2000. New Institutional Economics, Taking Stock, Looking Ahead,

Journal of Economic Literature Vol. 38, pp 595-613.

5. Acemoglu, D and Johnson, S. James Robinson 2004. Institutions as a Fundamental Cause

of Long Run Growth, in Handbook of Economic Growth, eds by P. Aghinon and

S.Durlauf

6. Bardhan P.K 1989 The New Institutional Economics and Development Theory: A Brief

Critical Assessment, World Development, Vol. 17, No.9 pp. 1389-1395

7. Bardhan P.K 2000 Understanding Underdevelopment : Challenges for Institutional

Economics from the Point of View of Poor Countries, Journal of Institutional and

Theoretical Economics, March, Vol. 156, No. 1, pp 216-235.

8. Bardhan P.K 2005. Institutions Matter, But Which Ones? Economics of Transition, Vol.

13, No. 3, 2005, pp 499-532.

9. North D , Wallis, J.J Weingest, B.R 2009 Violence and Social Orders : A Conceptual

Framework for Interpreting Recorded Human History, New York, Cambridge University

Press.

10. North D , Wallis, J.J, Webb S.B , Weingest, B.R 2013 In the Shadow of Violence:

Politics, Economics, and the Problems of Development, New York, Cambridge

University Press.

11. Acemoglu , D and Johnson, James 2012 Why Nations Fail: The Origins of Power,

Prosperity and Poverty , Great Britain, Profile Books.

32


EC- 307 Economics of Discrimination

Topic I Introduction, History and Economic Modeling

1. Introduction to Economics of Discrimination

2. Historical perspective on Discrimination

3. Causes and forms of Economic Discrimination

4. Economic models of Discrimination- Competitive and collective models, Overcrowding

model, The Human capital Model

Topic II Inequality, Social Exclusion and Theories of Discrimination

1. Concept of Inequality- Group-based Inequality and Inter-personal Inequality

2. Social Exclusion: Concepts and types

3. Theories on Discrimination:

i. Gary Becker (Test for Discrimination)

ii. Kenneth Arrow (Belief Theory of Discrimination)

iii. George Akerlof (Identity theory of Discrimination)

iv. Herbert Blumer’s theory of discrimination

4. Caste based Exclusion and Discrimination- Ambedkar’s approach towards economics of

Caste, and Untouchability, Gandhian views of Economic dimension of Caste system.

Topic III Market based Discrimination

1. Market discrimination- Discrimination in Factor Market

2. Input Market- Land Market, Labour Market, Gender, Occupation, and Agricultural Inputs

3. Discrimination in Commodity market-Discrimination in imperfect market

4. Econometrics models of labour market discrimination

Topic IV Public Policies to overcome Economic Discrimination and Experiences

1. Empowerment Policies,

1. Reservation policy or Affirmative Action Policies,

2. Land Policies, and

3. Experiences of USA, India, and South Africa

Recommended Books and Articles

1. Chakravarti, Achin (2001). Concept and Measurement of Group Inequality, Centre for

Development Studies, working paper no. 315, May

33

2. Akerlof, George (1976). The Economics of caste and of the Rat Race and other woeful

tales, Quarterly Journal of Economics, Vol. 90

3. Akerlof, George and Rachel Kranton (2010): Identity Economics: How Our Identities

Shaped Our Work, Wages and Well-being: Princeton University Press, New Jersey.

4. Arrow, Kenneth (1972), Models of Job Discrimination in A.H. Pascall, ed., Racial

Discrimination in Economic Life, D.C. Heath publishers, Lexington MA.

5. Arrow, Kenneth (1973). The Theory of Discrimination in the labour market, Orley Albert

Rees (ed), Princeton: Princeton University Press

6. Becker, Gary (1956): The Economics of Discrimination, Chicago: University of Chicago

Press.

7. Blank, R. M., M. Dabady, C.F. Citro (2004), Measuring Racial Discrimination, National

Research Council Panel on Methods for Assessing Discrimination, National Academies

press, Washington D.C (Available at https://www.nap.edu/read/10887/chapter/1).

8. Blumer, Herbert (1958). Race prejudice as a sense of group position, Pacific Sociological

Review, Spring, Vol 1, P.3

9. Borooah, V.K., N.S. Sabharwal, D.G. Diwakar, V.K. Mishra, A.K. Naik. (2015). Caste,

Discrimination, and Exclusion in Modern India: Sage Publication.

10. Cowell, Frank A (2016). How much inequality we can explain A Methodology and an

application to the Topiced States, Economic Journal Vol 105,

11. Dan A. Black (1995), “Discrimination in an Equilibrium Search Model”, Journal of

Labour Economics, vol.13, no.2, April.

12. Darity, William and Ashwini Deshpande (2003), Boundaries of Clan and Color,

Routledge, New York.

13. Darity, William, and Darrick Hamilton. 2012. Bold Policies for Economic Justice.

Springer

14. Desai, S and Amaresh Dubey (2011): “Caste in 21st Century India: Competing

Narratives”, Economic and Political Weekly, Vol 46(11), pp 40-49.

15. Deshpande Ashwini. 2011. The Grammar of Caste: Economic Discrimination in

Contemporary India. Oxford publication

16. Deshpande, Ashwini (2005), Do Market Discriminate? Some Insights from Economic

Theories, pp.59-65 in Thorat, Aryama, and Negi, eds., Reservation and Private Sector:

Quest for Equal Opportunity and Growth, Rawat Publishers, New Delhi.

17. Deshpande, Ashwini and Thomas Weisskopf (2010): “Does Affirmative Action Affect

Productivity in the Indian Railways?,” Working Paper No 185, Centre for Development

Economics, Delhi School of Economics, Delhi.

18. HAAN, De, Arjan (1999) Social Exclusion: Towards and holistic understanding of

deprivation. Social Development Dept. Dept. of International Development.

19. Hills, John, Julian Le Grand, and David Piachaud (2002), Understanding Social

Exclusion, Oxford University Press, New York.

20. Holzer, Harry (1999), What Employers Want: Job Prospects for Less-Educated

34

Workers, Russell Sage, New York.

21. Jodhka, S.S. Caste: A Short Introduction, Oxford University Press, 2013

22. Killick, Tony (2002). Responding to Inequality, Inequality Briefing, Briefing Papers No.

3 (3 of 3), Overseas Develop Institute.

23. Lackshmanasamy, T. and S. Madheswaran (1995), Caste Discrimination: Evidence from

Indian Scientific and Technical Labour Market, Indian Journal of Social Sciences,

Vol. 8, No. 1, Pp.59-77.

24. Lareau, Annette (2003), Unequal Childhoods: Race, Class, and Family Life, University

of California Press, Berkeley CA.

25. Madheswaran, S. (2008). Is Affirmative Action Policy for Private Sector Necessary?

Indian Journal of Industrial Relations: Economics & Social Dev., 44(2), 164-184.

http://www.i-scholar.in/index.php/ijir/article/view/41672

26. Marc Fosset and Scot J South (2016). Measurement of intergroup income inequality: A

Conceptual review, Social Force, vol. 61,

27. Massey, Douglas and Nancy Denton (1993), American Apartheid: Segregation and the

Making of t h e Underclass, Harvard University Press, Cambridge MA.

28. Mckay Andrew (2002). Defining and Measuring inequality, Inequality Briefing, Briefing

Papers No. 1 (1 of 3), Overseas Develop Institute

29. Mendelsohn, Oliver and Marika Vicziany (1998), The Untouchables:

Subordination, poverty, and the state in modern India, Cambridge University Press,

Cambridge UK.

30. Michael Sattinger (1996): “Search and Discrimination”, Labour Economics, 3(2).

31. Mohanty, B.B (2001), “Land Distribution among Scheduled Castes and Tribes”, EPW.

32. Nancharaiah,G.(1984), Land and Cast, Himalaya Publications, Bombay.

33. Naschold, Felix (2002). Why inequality Matters for Poverty, Inequality Briefing, Briefing

Papers No. 2 (2 of 3), Overseas Develop Institute

34. Nesiah Devanesan (1997). Discrimination with Reason, Oxford University Press, Delhi.

35. Piketty, Thomas (2015) Economics of inequality, Harward UniversityPress , Handbook

of Income Distribution, Volume 1, 2000, Pages 429-476

36. Prakash, Aseem (2015): Dalit Capital: State, Market and Civil Society in Urban India:

Routledge, Delhi.

37. Quillian, Lincoln (2006), New Approaches to Understanding Racial Prejudice and

Discrimination, Annual Review of Sociology, 23:299-328.

38. Randive, B.T (1997), “Caste, Class and Property Relations”, EPW, February.

39. Ravillion, M and S Chen (2003): “Measuring Pro-poor Growth”, Economic Letters,

78(1).

40. Scoville, James (1991), Towards a Formal Model of a Caste Economy in Status

Influences in Third World Labour Markets: Caste, Gender, Custom, De Gruyter,

New York.

41. Scoville, James (1996), Labour Market underpinnings of a caste economy, The

35

American Journal of Economics and Sociology, 55(4).

42. Sen Amartya (1997). From income inequality to Economic inequality, Economic Journal,

Vol. 64.

43. Sen, A. (2000). Social Exclusion: Concept, Application and Scrutiny’, Social

Development Papers No. 1. Office of the Environment and Social Development, Asian

Development Bank.

44. Sen, A.K. (1995), Inequality Re-examined, Oxford University Press

45. Sen, A.K.(1990): Gender and Cooperative Conflicts’ in Tinker(Ed) Persistent

Inequalities: Women and World Development, Oxford University Press, New York.

46. Silver, Hillary and Wilkinson, F (1995), Policies to combat Social Exclusion: A French

British Comparison, Geneva: IILS, Discussion Papers, Series No. 83

47. Solomon W. Polachek and W. Stanley Siebert (1993): “The Economics of Earnings”,

Cambridge University Press, USA.

48. Thorat S.K, N. Tagade, A.K. Naik (2016). Prejudice against Reservation Policies: How

and Why?, Economic and Political Weekly, Vol. LI, No 8, Feb 20.

49. Thorat, S. and K. Newman (2010). Blocked by Caste: Economic Discrimination in

Modern India (eds.). Oxford University Press. New Delhi. 2010. Pp. 287-310

50. Thorat, S.K and Joel Lee (2006), “Dalits and the Right to Food-discrimination and

Exclusion in food-related Government Programmes”, IIDS, Working paper, November, 3.

51. Thorat, S.K. (2001). Caste Untouchability and Economic and Market Discrimination:

Theory, Concept and Consequences, Artha Vigyana, Journal of Gokhale Institute of

Politics and Economics. Vol. XLIII, Nos. 1-2

52. Thorat, S.K. (2004), Caste System in India: Social and Economic Exclusion and

Poverty, Indian Institute of Dalit Studies, New Delhi.

53. Thorat, S.K. (2005). Caste, Social Exclusion and Poverty Linkages: Concept,

Measurement and Empirical Evidences, IIDS Working Paper.

54. Thorat, S.K. and Umakant (2004), Caste, Race, and Discrimination: Discourses in

International Context, Rawat Publications, New Delhi.

55. Thorat, S.K., Aryama, and Prasant Negi (2005), Reservation and Private Sector: Quest

for Equal Opportunity and Growth, Rawat Publications, New Delhi.

56. Thorat, Sukhadeo, M Mahamallick and Nidhi Sadana Nidhi (2010): “Caste System and

Pattern of Discrimination in Rural Markets”, in Sukadeo Thorat and Katherine Newman

(ed.), Blocked By Caste - Economic Discrimination in Modern India (New Delhi: Oxford

University Press) .

57. Thurow, Lester (1969), Poverty and Discrimination, Browking Institution, Washington,

Chapter VII.

58. Weber, Max (1968), Economy and Society. (Edited by Guenther Roth and Claus

Wittich) Bedminister Press, New York.

59. William Darity, Jr. (1995). Economics and Discrimination. Vol-I & II, Edward Elgar

Publication.

36

60. William M. Rodgers (2009): Handbook on the Economics of Discrimination, Edward

Elgar publishing.

61. Xaxa, V (2001), “Protective Discrimination: Why Scheduled Tribes lag behind

Scheduled Castes?”, Economic and Political Weekly, July 21.

37


EC- 308 National Income Accounting

Topic I Concept of National Product

1. Concept of Production. Production exchanged in the market, Self Consumed Produce,

Services of Housewives, Owner Occupied Dwellings, and Consumer durables.

2. Concept of value added by production. Distinction between intermediate and final

product. Problem of deducting for intermediate products.

3. Distinction between Value added from a particular sector and the final product available

from the sector.

4. Gross and Net Production: Netting for depreciation

5. Domestic Product and National Product at Market Prices and Factor costs

6. Disposable Income and Personal Income.

Topic II Treatment of Special Sectors

1. Valuing the Product of / Treatment of Government sector

2. Valuing the Product of /Treatment Financial Intermediaries

3. Valuing the Product- Rest of the World.

4. Accounts for the producing sector, Consuming Sector, the government sector and the

Rest of World.

Topic III Methods of Income Estimation

1. The Product Method

2. The Income Method

3. The Expenditure Method

4. The Equivalence of the three methods.

Topic IV Accounts for Different Sectors

1. Accounts for the producing sector

2. Accounts for the Consuming Sector

3. Accounts for the government sector

4. Accounts for the Rest of World

38

Topic V Related Topics

1. The United Nations System of National Accounts.

2. National Income at Current and Constant Prices.

3. Green GDP

4. National Account Statistics of India. An Introduction.

Recommended Book

1. Beckerman, Wilfred (1968): An Introduction to National Income Analysis, Weidenfeld

and Nicolson, London.

2. Uma Dutt Roy Choudhury (2000): National Income Accounting, MacMillan Publishers,

India.

3. Paul Studentski (1961): The Income of Nations, New York university press.

4. CSO Government of India (2012): National Accounts Statistics: Sources and Methods.

5. United Nations: The System of National Accounts

39

Semester- IV Core course

EC - 401 Macro Economics- II

Topic I Money and Liquidity

1. Definitions of Money, Money-ness and liquidity, Nature, functions, types and evaluation

of money- The debate relating to the definition of money, endogenous and exogenous

supply of money.

2. Measures of Money Supply Liquidity measures according to Reddy Committee Report

Liquidity theory.

3. Alternative money stock measures, The quantity and components of money stock in India

and broad trend in them

Topic II Demand for Money

1. Nominal v/s Real Cash Balance.

2. Neo Classical theory

3. Keynes’s Theory

4. Friedman's Theory, Empirical Evidence.

Topic III Money and Prices

1. The Quantity Theory of Money (QTM): Fishers QTM, Cambridge Cash Balance

Approach QTM and Income Equation.

2. QTM as the theory of Price level

3. Baumol , Tobin theory

Topic IV Money Supply

1. Goals Targets, Indicators and instruments of Monetary Policy

2. Theory of Money Supply: high Powered Money, Money Multiplier Process,

Determinants of Money Multiplier,

3. High Powered Money: Factors Affecting High Powered Money, Autonomy of High

powered money

Topic V Inflation

1. Definition and sources of Inflation

2. Demand Pull Inflation, Cost Push Inflation, Income Shares Inflation

3. Phillips Curve

40

Topic VI Theories of Interest Rates

1. Real and monetary theories of the interest rate, Loanable funds theory, Keynesian theory

2. Wicksellian theory, Fisher's theory, Hicksian theory,

3. Interest rate differentials: Term-structure of interest rates, Role of interest rates in Macro

economy, Credit market imperfections

Topic VII Monetary Policy and Macro economy

1. Monetary transmission mechanism and targeting Inflation

2. Money growth and interest rates Interest rate rules, Taylor rule: Rules versus discretion

3. Central Bank autonomy, Dynamic inconsistency of monetary policy credibility and

reputation

Recommended Books

1. Mishkin Frederic (2007), The Economics of Money Banking and Financial Markets, 8th

edition Addison Wesley Longman Publishers

2. Bain, Keith & Howells, Peter (2009), Monetary Economics: Policy and Its Theoretical

Basis, Palgrave

3. Wrightman D:- An Introduction to Monetary Theory and Policy

4. Gupta S. B. :- Monetary Economics Institutions, theory and policy

5. Gupta S B :- Monetary Planning for India

6. Harris:- Monetary Theory

7. RBI’s Monetary Policy Documents

41

Semester- IV Core Course

EC-402 Economics of Growth and Development -II

Topic I The role of agriculture and Industry in development

1. Role of Agriculture in development - The supply response of Agriculture

2. The concept of ‘Marketed surplus’ - Size holdings and output.

3. Limitations of price policy and alternatives. Disguised unemployment

4. Role of industry. Major reasons for industrialization in LDCs. The infant industry

argument. The employment argument. Export promotion vs import substitution. Capital-

Intensive technology and employment in industry

5. The Role of Infrastructure - social and physical infrastructure - education and health

infrastructure

Topic II Mobilization of resources and the role of the government

1. Domestic Resources: The Prior-savings approach. Monetary Policy, Fiscal Policy -

Inflation, savings and growth.

2. Non -inflationary finance of investment. Inflation and credit. Inflation and growth

3. The role of the government and markets in the developmental process - Development of

distributive institutions. Poverty alleviation measures, public distribution systems.

4. Public policies like NREGA in India. Microfinance - issues related to microfinance. Self

Help Groups and savings and Gender

Topic III Trade and development

1. Trade as an engine of growth - Dual gap analysis - Prebisch, Singer and Myrdal views.

2. Gains from trade and LDCs, foreign borrowing. Savings - Investment gap.

3. The foreign exchange gap. Models of capital imports and growth - Capital imports,

domestic savings the ICOR - foreign borrowing and debt - servicing problem - types and

measurement of international capital flows - the role of IMF and World Bank - Case

studies of countries with trade as a growth engine

Topic IV Sustainable Development

1. Basic concept, strategies and measurements

2. Instruments for sustainable development

3. Climate change

4. Biodiversity

42

Topic IV Economic Performance/ progress of developing countries over the recent past

1. East Asian Miracle- East Asian Crisis

2. Latin American Economic Development

3. China’s Economic Development and Reforms

4. Africa’s Economic Development

Recommended Books

1. Meier G.M leading Issues in Development Economics

2. Thirval A P - Development Economics

3. Ray Debraj Development Economics

4. Hoffmann, A. J. / Woody, J. G. (2008): Climate Change: What’s Your Business

Strategy? Boston, MA (Harvard Business School Publishing)

5. Duflo, Esther / Banerjee, Abhijit V. (2001): Poor Economics. A Radical Rethinking of

the Way to Fight Global Poverty, New York (PublicAffairs) soz 3.19 2012 93

6. Perman, Roger et al. (2011): Natural Resource and Environmental Economics, 4th ed.,

Harlow (Pearson)

43

Semester- IV Core Course

EC - 403 Research Project

The following are the guidelines for the students.

1. The students are expected to identify the area of research and choose the topic of

research project.

2. The students are expected to formulate the objectives of research and identify the

appropriate research methodology.

3. Students can do research based on primary data or secondary data.

4. The students are expected to engage in literature review and place the research in

the context of existing research body of work.

5. Students can do survey work if the research topic requires it.

6. The students will be expected to analyze the data etc.

7. The students are expected to write a research project. This will consist of

preparing an abstract, learning the skills of organizing the text, writing of

introduction, objectives of research project, main body of the text, conclusions

and suggestions; providing references etc.

Students will have to work on their chosen topic and submit a dissertation of minimum 6,000

words & maximum 8,000 words in two copies to the Department.

44

Semester- IV Non -Core course

EC-404 Banking and Financial Institutions – II

Topic I Introduction to Financial Markets

1. Structure of Financial Markets

2. Money and Capital Markets, Equity and Bond Markets, Primary and Secondary

Markets; Exchanges and Over-the-Counter Markets, Foreign Exchange Markets

Topic II Money Markets

1. Money Market - Features & Constituents of the Money Market-Call Money Market,

Treasury Bill Market, Reforms in the Indian Money Market; Certificate of Deposit

(CDs); Commercial Paper (CPs), Repo market; Money Market Mutual Funds, Role of

Discount and Finance House of India (DFHI)

Topic III Capital Market

1. Features & Constituents of Capital Market-Government, Corporate Sector, Financial

Institutions, Commercial Banks & Others; Government Securities Market (Gilt Edged

Market) and Industrial Securities Market; Equity Market, Debt Market & Derivatives

Market; Reforms in the Indian Capital Market; Role of Securities and Exchange Board of

India (SEBI)

Topic IV Foreign Exchange Markets

1. Foreign Exchange Rates; Risks in a foreign exchange market; Factors affecting foreign

exchange rates, Equilibrium in Foreign Exchange Market; Intervention in Foreign

Exchange Markets

Topic V Financial Regulation

1. RBI - Banking Regulation and Supervision- Bank Capital, International Banking

Regulation, Banking Crisis and Central Bank Independence,

2. IRDA- Objectives & Role, Insurance Sector Reforms in India,

3. PFRDA - Objectives & Role, Pension Reforms in India

45

Recommended Books

1. Bhole L M (2004) “Financial Institutions and Markets: Structure, Growth and

Innovations” Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd , New Delhi

2. Frederic Mishkin and Stanley Eakins (2006) “Financial Markets and Institutions",

Pearson 5th Ed

3. Gurusamy S (2004) “Financial Services and Markets”, Vijay Nicole Imprints Pvt Ltd

4. Gurusamy S, (2004) “Financial Markets and Institutions”, Vijay Nicole Imprints Pvt Ltd

5. Saunders Anthony & Cornett Marica Millon “Financial Markets and Institutions- An

Introduction to the Risk Management Approach,” 3rd Ed,

6. VOICE New Century Machiraju H R “Indian Financial System”, New Delhi Vikas

Publications, 2006

7. Khan M Y “Indian Financial System”, New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing

Company Ltd.,

46

Semester- IV Non- Core course

EC- 405 Economics of Finance


1. Role of finance in economic development.

2. Structure and functioning of the Indian financial system -financial markets,

intermediaries and instruments, Financial sector reforms since 1991.

3. Financial sector participants - firms, individuals, Government.

4. General characteristics of securities classification between fixed income and random cash

flow -government bonds, index-linked bonds, corporate Securities.

Topic II Time value of money

1. Future value of an asset, Present value of an asset.

2. Future and present values of multiple cash flows.

3. Level cash flows- perpetuities and annuities.

4. Inflation and interest rates, Real v/s nominal cash flows, Valuing real cash payments,

Effective annual interest rates

Topic III Financial Planning

1. Requirements of effective planning, Capital budgeting and capital structures of a firm

2. Regulations governing supply of securities.

3. Placing debt and equity in a firm's finance, measurement of debt vs. equity.

4. Components of a financial planning model, Percentage of sales model.

5. Pitfalls in financial planning, Investment criteria- Net Present Value (NPV), internal rate

of return -concept and applications in project appraisal, investment criteria when projects

interact, Mutually Exclusive Projects and the IRR Rule

Topic IV Financial statement analysis

1. Balance sheets, income statements, cash flow statements.

2. Financial ratios - leverage ratios, liquidity ratios, efficiency ratios, profitability ratios.

3.Using financial ratios for measuring company’s performance

Topic V Stock markets

1. Primary markets- IPOs, role of underwriters,

2. Secondary markets and dematerialization.

3. Efficient market hypothesis, Valuing Stocks, Reading the Stock Market Listings, Book

Values, Liquidation Values, and Market Values, Valuing Common Stocks, The Dividend

Discount Model -The Dividend Discount Model with No Growth, The Constant-Growth

Dividend Discount Model.

47

4. Estimating Expected Rates of Return, The Price-Earnings Ratio, Bond valuation-

characteristics of bonds, bond prices and yields, variation in bond prices due to interest

rate changes, yield to maturity v/s current yield the yield curve, nominal and real interest

rates valuation of corporate bonds.

5. Functions and powers of SEBI

Topic VI Risk, Return, and Capital Budgeting

1. Measuring Market Risk, the CAPM, Risk and Return, Using the CAPM to Estimate

Expected Returns.

2. Capital Budgeting and Project Risk, Determinants of Project Risk, Arbitrage pricing

theory, Introduction to risk, return and opportunity cost of capital, Market indexes,

Measuring Risk variance and Standard Deviation

3. Measuring the Variation in Stock Returns Risk and Diversification Asset versus Portfolio

Risk

Topic VII Derivatives markets

1. Derivative-Meaning & types Futures market-Evolution & History Hedgers, Speculators,

Arbitrageurs Financial futures and commodity futures forward contracts.

2. Swaps- Meaning, Mechanics and types.

3. Options markets - meaning, Mechanics and types. Trading Strategies-Exchange traded,

stock options and the pay-offs from buying and selling options.

Recommended Books

1. Corporate Finance 6th Edition, Volume 1, Stephen A. Ross, Randolph W. Westerfield,Jeffrey

F. Jaffe ISBN 0-390-32000-5McGraw-Hill/Irwin

2. Bhole L.M. (2004): Financial institutions and Markets, Tata McGrawHill Publishing

Company.

3. Fundamentals of Corporate Finance, Third Edition; Richard A Brealey, Stewart C Myers,

and Alan J. Marcus McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc

4. Financial Derivatives, Third Edition, Robert W Kolb and James A. Overdahl; John Wiley

& Sons, Inc.

5. Financial Statement Analysis, Third Edition, Martin Fridson and Fernando Alvarez John

Wiley & Sons, Inc.

6. The Efficient Markets Hypothesis ; Jonathan Clarke, Tomas Jandik, Gershon Mandelker

7. Uncertainty & Risk Analysis ; Chris Rodger and Jason Petch , Business Dynamics

PricewaterhouseCoopers, MCS United Kingdom; April 1999

8. Equity derivatives in India- The state of the art; Susan Thomas and Ajay Shah

9. Introduction to Project Finance ; Edited by Andrew Fight; Butterworth-Heinemann

48

Semester- IV Non- Core Course

EC- 406 Environmental Economics

Topic I Introduction to the key concepts in Environmental Economics

1. Definition of Environmental Economics

2. Economy - Environment Interaction, Environment as a social asset

3. Markets and market failures, government regulation, Cost Benefit Analysis

Topic II Natural Resource Management

1. Entropy law and Material balance - resources and waste generation, Stock and Flow of

exhaustible resources and Fund services of Eco-system resources, Problems of Resources

Depletion and degeneration

2. Classification of resources: Renewable and Non-renewable. Biotic and Abiotic,

Exhaustible and Non-exhaustible resources

3. Biotic Resources: Vegetation and forests; Agriculture, Fishery and livestock;

Biodiversity: Exhaustion and Degradation

4. Abiotic Resources: Land and Soil, Surface Water and ground water; Energy resources;

Non-Energy mineral resources; Problems of their depletion and exhaustion (Land and

Soil use and erosion)

5. The Planet and Concept of eco-system, Major eco-systems of the world: Solar energy

Flow,

6. Bio-Geo chemical cycles:- Carbon Cycle, Hydrological Cycle, Nitrogen cycles

Topic III Some Theoretical Contributions to Environmental Economics

1. Coase Theorem, Hardin’s Tragedy of the Commons, “Polluter Pays” Principle ,

Environmental Kuznet Curves, The Coal Question, Green Paradox

2. Topic IV Environment Problems of India:

3. State of India’s Environment: Problems of Pollution due to Overuse of Ecosystem

Services (With reference to sectoral activities of agriculture, mining, industry and other

activities such as transport and Health services)

4. Air, Water and Soil Pollution:

5. Air Pollution: Types of pollutants and their impact, Ozone Depletion, Global Warming ,

6. Water Pollution: The Concepts of Biological Oxygen Demand (BOD) and Chemical

Oxygen Demand (COD), Ph values, Fluoride; Biotic Waste; Fertilizer use Arsenic

pollution; Heavy metals and Toxic wastes; Sewage Land Degradation- the problem of

Solid waste disposal and contamination; The problem of Salinity and water logging

49

7. Natural Resource Depletion, Deforestation, Industrial and Agricultural Pollution,

8. Urbanization: Urban Pollution and Urban Health, Vehicular Pollution, Impact of Green

Revolution Techniques.

Topic V Introduction to Sustainable Development

1. Concept: Week vs. Strong Sustainability Criteria

2. Sustainable resource use

3. Carbon Footprints as threat to Sustainable Development.

4. Indian Environmental policy instruments: Functions of Ministry of Environment and

Forest, Pollution Control Boards, Environmental Laws in India.

5. International Environmental policy: Major issues like climate change, carbon trading,

international co-operation: Kyoto Protocol

Recommended Readings:

1. Bhattacharya,R.N. ed. (2001): Environmental Economics, An Indian Perspective ,

2. Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

3. Hanley, N., Shogren, J. F., and White, B. (2007).Environmental economics in theory

4. and practice. Palgrave macmillan, 2 edition.

5. Kolstad, C. C. (2010).Environmental economics. Oxford university press, 2 edition.

6. Sengupta, Ramprasad, Ecology and Economics: An Approach to Sustainable

Development, Oxford University Press, 2001.

7. Solow, R. M. (1993). An almost practical step toward sustainability.Resources policy,

8. 19(3):162{172.

9. Varian, H. R. (2007).Intermediate microeconomics: A modern approach. W. W. Norton

10. & Company.

50

Semester- IV Non- Core Course

EC- 407 Gender Economics


1. Nature and Significance of Gender Studies

2. Institutionalization of gender economic studies. Methods of gender economics. Inter-

disciplinary approach in gender studies. Macro- and micro level of studies.

3. System of gender inequality factors: the development factor, discrimination and

behavioral factors. Gender order. Gender gap in access to resources and control over

economic resources. Gender risk groups

Topic II Economic Growth and Gender Equality

1. Globalization of the world economy and gender status.

2. Feminization of poverty. Concept of the “feminization of poverty”. Basic causes of the

feminization of poverty. Problems of measuring the feminization of poverty.

3. Women’s contribution to GDP. Life cycle and gender differences in incomes

4. Impact of gender equality on economic growth and socio-economic development.

Topic III The gender factor in household economics. Distribution of resources and

decision- Making mechanisms within the household

1. Household economics: theoretical concepts and gender critique

2. Gender critique of the neo-Marxist approach.

3. Gender critique of neo-classic household theory. The gender contract, negotiation models

within families.

4. Model of investment in human capital. Function of production of human capital.

Investments in human capital at household level and the sex factor.

Topic IV Gender inequality in the labour market

1. Inequality in the labour market: entry into and exit from the labour market, careers,

wages, skills training.

2. Inequality and discrimination. Types of segregation. Measurement of segregation.

3. Models of gender inequality and gender discrimination in the labour market. Factors in

wage disparities.

51

Topic V Gender policy: national and global level.

1. Role of UNO and World Bank in Gender equality

2. Indian policy considerations regarding gender equality

3. Gender Budgets

Recommended Books

1. Maithreyi Krishnaraj, Gender Population and Development

2. R.K.Sen and Anita Banaerji, Women and Economic Development

3. Jo Little, (1987), Gender relations in rural area: the importance of women’s domestic

role, Vol.3, Issue. 4, Journal of Rural Studies

4. D Sainsbury, (1999), Gender and Welfare State Regimes, Oxford University Press.

5. AR Morrison, D Raju, N Sinha (2007), Gender equality, poverty and economic growth,

World Bank Publications

6. Bina Agarwal, (1997), “Bargaining” and Gender Relations: Within and beyond the

Household, Vol.3, Issue 1, Journal of Feminist Economics

7. Hausmann, LD Tyson, suadia Zahidi, (2009) ‘The Global Gender Gap Report’, World

Economic Forum

8. Ronald Inglehart, Pippa Norris, (2003) Rising Tide: Gender Equality and Cultural

Change around the World, Cambridge University Press.

Choice Based Credit System (CBCS)

UNIVERSITY OF DELHI

DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

UNDERGRADUATE PROGRAMME (Courses effective from Academic Year 2015-16)

SYLLABUS OF COURSES TO BE OFFERED Core Courses, Elective Courses & Ability Enhancement Courses

Disclaimer: The CBCS syllabus is uploaded as given by the Faculty concerned to the Academic Council. The same has been approved as it is by the Academic Council on 13.7.2015 and Executive Council on 14.7.2015. Any query may kindly be addressed to the concerned Faculty.

Undergraduate Programme Secretariat

Preamble

The University Grants Commission (UGC) has initiated several measures to bring equity, efficiency and excellence in the Higher Education System of country. The important measures taken to enhance academic standards and quality in higher education include innovation and improvements in curriculum, teaching-learning process, examination and evaluation systems, besides governance and other matters. The UGC has formulated various regulations and guidelines from time to time to improve the higher education system and maintain minimum standards and quality across the Higher Educational Institutions (HEIs) in India. The academic reforms recommended by the UGC in the recent past have led to overall improvement in the higher education system. However, due to lot of diversity in the system of higher education, there are multiple approaches followed by universities towards examination, evaluation and grading system. While the HEIs must have the flexibility and freedom in designing the examination and evaluation methods that best fits the curriculum, syllabi and teaching–learning methods, there is a need to devise a sensible system for awarding the grades based on the performance of students. Presently the performance of the students is reported using the conventional system of marks secured in the examinations or grades or both. The conversion from marks to letter grades and the letter grades used vary widely across the HEIs in the country. This creates difficulty for the academia and the employers to understand and infer the performance of the students graduating from different universities and colleges based on grades. The grading system is considered to be better than the conventional marks system and hence it has been followed in the top institutions in India and abroad. So it is desirable to introduce uniform grading system. This will facilitate student mobility across institutions within and across countries and also enable potential employers to assess the performance of students. To bring in the desired uniformity, in grading system and method for computing the cumulative grade point average (CGPA) based on the performance of students in the examinations, the UGC has formulated these guidelines.

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS):

The CBCS provides an opportunity for the students to choose courses from the prescribed courses

comprising core, elective/minor or skill based courses. The courses can be evaluated following the

grading system, which is considered to be better than the conventional marks system. Therefore, it is

necessary to introduce uniform grading system in the entire higher education in India. This will benefit

the students to move across institutions within India to begin with and across countries. The uniform

grading system will also enable potential employers in assessing the performance of the candidates. In

order to bring uniformity in evaluation system and computation of the Cumulative Grade Point

Average (CGPA) based on student’s performance in examinations, the UGC has formulated the

guidelines to be followed.

Outline of Choice Based Credit System:

1. Core Course: A course, which should compulsorily be studied by a candidate as a core requirement

is termed as a Core course.

2. Elective Course: Generally a course which can be chosen from a pool of courses and which may

be very specific or specialized or advanced or supportive to the discipline/ subject of study or which

provides an extended scope or which enables an exposure to some other discipline/subject/domain

or nurtures the candidate’s proficiency/skill is called an Elective Course.

2.1 Discipline Specific Elective (DSE) Course: Elective courses may be offered by the main

discipline/subject of study is referred to as Discipline Specific Elective. The University/Institute

may also offer discipline related Elective courses of interdisciplinary nature (to be offered by

main discipline/subject of study).

2.2 Dissertation/Project: An elective course designed to acquire special/advanced knowledge,

such as supplement study/support study to a project work, and a candidate studies such a course

on his own with an advisory support by a teacher/faculty member is called dissertation/project.

2.3 Generic Elective (GE) Course: An elective course chosen generally from an unrelated

discipline/subject, with an intention to seek exposure is called a Generic Elective.

P.S.: A core course offered in a discipline/subject may be treated as an elective by other

discipline/subject and vice versa and such electives may also be referred to as Generic Elective.

3. Ability Enhancement Courses (AEC)/Competency Improvement Courses/Skill Development

Courses/Foundation Course: The Ability Enhancement (AE) Courses may be of two kinds: AE

Compulsory Course (AECC) and AE Elective Course (AEEC). “AECC” courses are the courses

based upon the content that leads to Knowledge enhancement. They ((i) Environmental Science, (ii)

English/MIL Communication) are mandatory for all disciplines. AEEC courses are value-based

and/or skill-based and are aimed at providing hands-on-training, competencies, skills, etc.

3.1 AE Compulsory Course (AECC): Environmental Science, English Communication/MIL

Communication.

3.2 AE Elective Course (AEEC): These courses may be chosen from a pool of courses designed to

provide value-based and/or skill-based instruction.

Project work/Dissertation is considered as a special course involving application of knowledge in

solving / analyzing /exploring a real life situation / difficult problem. A Project/Dissertation work would

be of 6 credits. A Project/Dissertation work may be given in lieu of a discipline specific elective paper.

Details of courses under B.A (Honors), B.Com (Honors) & B.Sc. (Honors)

Course *Credits

Theory+ Practical Theory + Tutorial

=================================================================

I. Core Course

(14 Papers) 14X4= 56 14X5=70

Core Course Practical / Tutorial*

(14 Papers) 14X2=28 14X1=14

II. Elective Course

(8 Papers)

A.1. Discipline Specific Elective 4X4=16 4X5=20

(4 Papers)

A.2. Discipline Specific Elective

Practical/ Tutorial* 4 X 2=8 4X1=4

(4 Papers)

B.1. Generic Elective/

Interdisciplinary 4X4=16 4X5=20

(4 Papers)

B.2. Generic Elective

Practical/ Tutorial* 4 X 2=8 4X1=4

(4 Papers)

Optional Dissertation or project work in place of one Discipline Specific Elective paper (6

credits) in 6th Semester

III. Ability Enhancement Courses

1. Ability Enhancement Compulsory

(2 Papers of 2 credit each) 2 X 2=4 2 X 2=4

Environmental Science

English/MIL Communication

2. Ability Enhancement Elective (Skill Based)

(Minimum 2) 2 X 2=4 2 X 2=4

(2 Papers of 2 credit each)

_________________ _________________

Total credit 140 140

Institute should evolve a system/policy about ECA/ General

Interest/Hobby/Sports/NCC/NSS/related courses on its own.

* wherever there is a practical there will be no tutorial and vice-versa

C o p y r ig h t R e s e rv e d

UNIVERSITY OF DELJffi

Scheme of Admission,

Scheme of Examination

and

Course Structure

for

B.A. (Honours) Business Economics

Applicable to students seeking admission to the B.A. (Honours) Business Economics course

in the academic year 2010-11 and later.

INDEX

Preamble 3

Course S tr u c tu r e ......... ................................................................................. 4

Revised Ordinance 6

1. Scheme o f Adm ission 61.1 Eligibility Conditions 61.2 Selection Process 71.3 Fees 8

2. Scheme o f Exam ination and Rules o f Promotion2.1 Scheme o f Examination 102.2 Promotion Rules . 14

3. Com parative Statement 16

4. Paper Structure and Readings

101: M icroeconomics - I 18102: Statistics for Business Economics 19l A r H ' - . j c : Q f * — ’ ' ~ ' r 9 - * r r o ’ T n f T n r r

104: Business Communication 22

201: M icroeconomics - I I 24202: M athematics for Business Economics 25203: Legal Aspects o f Business 26204: M arketing M anagement 28301: M acroeconom i cs - 1 30302: Industrial Economics 31303: Business Finance 32304: Basic Econometrics 34

401: M acroeconomics - II 35402: Organisational Behaviour 36403: Quantitative Techniques for Management 38404: Indian Financial System 40501: Indian Econom y 42502: Computational Techniques for Business Economics 44511: Elective Paper FI - Investment Management 45521: Elective Paper M l - Consumer Behaviour 47531: Elective Paper Q1 - Advanced Econometrics 49541: Elective Paper El - International Economics 50551: Elective Paper PI - Project Management 52601: Environment Economics 53

602: Business Strategy & Ethics 55611: Elective Paper F2 - International Finance M anagem ent 57621: Elective Paper M2 - Advertisement & Branding 58631: Elective Paper 0 2 - Advanced Mathematical Techniques 59641: Elective Paper E2 - Economic Growth & Policy 60651: Elective Paper P2 - Entrepreneurship and Family Business 61

PREAMBLE

The underly ing philosophy of the B.A. (H onours) Business Econom ics

course is to develop theoretical and analytical skills cf the s tuden ts so tha t

they m ay be absorbed in the corporate w orld o r be able to p u rsu e h igher

s tud ies a t the M aster's level in Business Economics and Economics. In the

rapidly changing globalised m arket scenario, th e need w as felt to eq u ip

s tu d en ts w ith the capability to understand and hand le the dynam ic of

econom ics an d the business world.

In o rder to achieve the above-m entioned objectives, a com prehensive

rev ised syllabus com prising of topics relating to economics, quan tita tive

techniques and business have been included in the three-year, six-

sem ester m odule, giving w ider coverage to the course contents, be tter

o rganisa tion to enable easier assimilation of the sam e by the students ,

an d a m ore professional touch to the course.

The pape rs have been redesigned to include m ore recent changes and

deve lopm ents in the concerned subjects. The papers in com puter

fundam entals and applications have been redesigned to in troduce the

s tu d en t to packages required for statistical analysis an d to enable the

s tu d en t to im plem ent the techniques th rough com puters, thus

sup p lem en tin g the quantitative papers. The core econom ics papers have

b een ra tionalized in their s tructure and sequencing w here in a b road idea

of microeconom ic and macroeconomic concepts and theories is

in troduced in the first and second semesters. The sam e is followed by a

m ore deta iled and in-depth know ledge of the subject in the third and

fourth semesters. There has been a substantial incroase in the quantita tive

techniques com ponen t of the course to equip s tu d ents v/ith the essential

tools for business and economic analysis. In this regard Econometrics and

O perations Research have been introduced as essential papers. The

course continues to expose students to the areas of finance, m arketing

an d the legal s tructure w ith in which businesses operate. Thus a fine

balance h as been m ain tained betw een the economic theory and practical

business com ponents.

Five optional g roups in finance, economics, quantita tive techniques,

m arketing and project m anagem ent and en trep reneursh ip p rovide the

s tuden ts a w ide array of areas in which to specialize. These should help

the s tu d en t choose the area tha t are best suited to their interest and skill.

3

Course Structure

S em ester P aper N u m b e r a n d Title

I.

101: M icroeconomics - 1

102: Statistics for Business Economics

103: Fundam entals of Business & Accounting

104: Business C om m unication

II.

201: M icroeconomics - II

202: M athem atics for Business Economics

203: Legal Aspects cf Business

204: M arketing M anagem ent

III.

301: M acroeconomics - 1

302: Industrial Economics

303: Business Finance

304: Basic Econometrics

i

! 401: M acroeconomics - IIi

IV.402: O rganisational Behaviour

403: Q uantita tive t echniques for M anagem ent

404: Ind ian Financial System

V.

501: Ind ian Economy

502: Com putational Techniques for Business Economics

511: Elective Paper FI - Investm ent M anagem ent

521: Elective Paper M l - C onsum er Behaviour

531: Elective Paper Q l - A dvanced Econometrics'

541: Elective Paper El - International Economics

551: Elective Paper PI - Project M anagem ent

VI.

601: Environm ent Economics

602: Business Strategy & Ethics

611: Elective Paper F2 - International Finance M anagem ent

621: Elective Paper M2 - A dvertisem ent & Branding

631: Elective Paper Q2 - Advanced M athem atical Techniques

641: Elective Paper E2 - Economic G row th & Policy

651: Elective Paper P2 - Entrepreneursh ip and Family Business

For the elective papers in the Vth and Vlth semesters, s tudents will be required to

op t for tw o g roups from am ong the five groups: Finance (F), Economics (E), Project

M anagem ent and E ntrepreneursh ip (P), M arketing (M) and Q uantita tive Techniques

(Q). For each chosen group , students will be required to enrol for the first paper in

the Vth sem ester and the second paper in the Vlth semester. The groups and the

papers are as follows:

4

G roup F: Finance:

FI: Investm ent M anagem ent - Paper No. 511

F2: International Finance M anagem ent - Paper No. 611

G roup M: Marketing:

M l: C onsum er Behaviour - Paper No. 521

M2: A dvertisem ent & Brand - Paper No. 621

G roup O: Quantitative Techniques:

Q I: A dvanced Econometrics - Paper No. 531

Q2: A dvanced M athem atical Techniques - Paper No. 631

G roup E: Economics:

El: International Economics - Paper No. 541

E2: Economic G row th & Policy - Paper No. 641

G ro u p P: Project M anagem ent fc E ntrepreneursh ip :

PI: Project M anagem ent - Paper No. 551

P2: E n trepreneursh ip an d Family Business - Paper No. 651

R e v i s e d O r d i n a n c e f o r B . A . ( H o n s .) B u s i n e s s E c o n o m i c s

The B.A. (Hons.) Business Economics shall be a three-year, full-time H onours D egree

Course, to be tau g h t in six semesters, viz., sem ester I, II, III, IV, V and VI.

Scheme of Admission

C andidates w ho have passed Class XII exam ination of the CBSE or any o ther

exam ination considered equiva len t by the University of Delhi shall be eligible for

taking the joint entrance test for adm ission to the B.A. (Hons.) Business Economics

course subject to the eligibility conditions required and the adm ission p rocedure to

be laid d o w n by the U niversity from tim e to time.

E lig ib il i ty C o n d it io n s for S e e k in g A d m iss io n

(a) The cand ida te shou ld have passed Senior Secondary School Exam ination (10 +2)

of CBSE or any o th er exam ination considered equivalent by the U niversity of

Delhi.

(b) The cand ida te shou ld have secured an aggregate of at least 60% m arks in h is/her

XII class exam ination (55% for SC, ST, CW and PC categories) in four pape rs

including English and M athematics. The other tw o papers are to be s e le^ cd from

the follow ing list: Accountancy, Biology, Biotechnology, Business Studies,

Chem istry, Com merce, C om puter Science, Economics, Entrepreneursh ip ,

G eography, History, Philosophy, Physics, Political Science, Psychology and

Sociology.

(c) The cand ida te sh o u ld have obtained pass m ark in each of the four papers

considered for com puting the aggregate in the above m entioned subjects.

(d) The cand ida te seeking adm ission to the B.A. (H onours) Business Economics

course m u s t p rov ide the confirm ed result of the qualifying exam ination and

m arks obtained therein w ith in one w eek of the appearing in the joint en trance

test.

(e) The m arksheet of the qualifying exam ination and the reserved category

certificates of OBC (of Central List & non cream y layer), SC, ST, PC, and CW, as

applicable, in the n am e of the candidate, m ust be produced on the d ay of

counselling.

(g) The cand idates securing com partm ent in the qualifying exam ination in a

particu lar year shall n o t be considered for adm ission in tha t year.

(h) Foreign nationals seeking adm ission to B.A.(Hons) Business Economics course

against the prescribed quota of seats earm arked for them, shall have to ap p ly

th ro u g h the Foreign S tudents Advisor, c/o Faculty of M anagem ent Studies,

University of Delhi, Delhi - 110007 and are exem pted from the w ritten

exam ination.

(j) Those foreign studen ts w ho have acquired their m in im um qualification for

adm ission from any Indian Board, in India have to app ly directly as a Genera!

categorv candidate. They are required to appear for the joint entrance test like

general category candidates and follow the same selection process as aoolicableO O j i i i

6

to the general category and in add ition fill up the foreign s tu d en t app lica tion

form of FSR office (dow nloadable from:

h ttp ://w w w .du.ac .in /form s/fore ignstudentsl.pdf). All adm ission of foreign

s tuden ts are channeled th rough the Foreign Students Registry (FSR) office of

University of Delhi.

S elec tio n P rocess

I. W ritten Jo in t Entrance Test

The University of Delhi will hold a Joint Entrance Test for the three courses B.A.

(Hons.) Business Economics, BBS an d BFIA. Applicants shall be called for an

objective type, m ultip le choice test, w hich shall be held a t Delhi and o ther centres,

w here feasible, and as specified by the Faculty of A pplied Social Sciences and

Hum anities.

The w ritten exam ination is designed to test the aptitude of the candidates to p u rsu e

the courses B.A. (H onours) Business Economics, BBS and BFIA. There is no

prescribed syllabus or form at for the entrance examination. The following areas have

been usually included in the entrance exam ination in the past.

Q uantitative Ability (Based on M athem atics up to class XII or its equivalent)

Reasoning and Analytical Ability

General English

Business an d General A w areness

The candidate will be required to a ttem pt 120 questions in 120 minutes. Each correct

answ er will get a score of plus 3 m arks, each w rong answ er will get a score of m inus

1 m ark an d a question n o t answ ered w ill get a score of 0 m arks. M arking of m ultip le

answ ers for one question si iall be trea ted as w rong answer.

The tes t shall be of tw o h o u r du ia tion , extra time will be given to the candidate for

filling u p details on test booklet and answ er sheet, m arking attendance, verification

of candidates ' docum ents, distribution, an d collection of test m aterial etc.

The scheme of exam ination m ay b e changed on the recom m endation of the

adm ission committee.

II. F inal selection for the course

The final selection of all candidates shall be based on the score com puted by giving

equal w eightage to the perform ance in Class XII exam ination and the perform ance in

the joint entrance test. The result declared shall comprise of the final score of the

candidate and the rank secured by the candidate in the category to which the

candidate belongs.

III. C o u n se llin g a n d A dm ission of can d id a tes for all courses

The candidates shall be allotted the respective colleges as per their merit and their

o rder of preference a t the time of counselling during the relevant counselling session.

http://www.du.ac.in/forms/foreignstudentsl.pdf

C andidates offered adm ission are required deposit the fees d u r in g the time

allocated along w ith their docum ents at the allotted college, failing w hich the

cand ida tu re will b e cancelled.

C andidates w ho do not take adm ission d u rin g the stipulated tim e lose the right of

adm ission to the course. C andidates no1' p resent w hsr. called to the counselling will

not be en tertained later.

A t the second and th ird counselling, ad m itted candidates will be perm itted n change

of college subject to availability of seats. To avail of any change to a p referred college,

the cand idate shou ld have necessarily deposited fees and fulfilled the rem aining

adm ission formalities w ith in the allocated tim e at their allotted coliege, failing which

the cand idate loses right to adm ission as well as a right to exercise any choice of

college later.

Right to exercise choice for adm ission an d to avail the change of preference for

college will be offered to only those candidates w ho are present on all the days of

counselling specified for them.

In case the cand ida te is unable to be present on the day of counselling an au thorized

representa tive of the candidate can exercise the preference for college a n d m eet o ther

adm ission requirem ents. A n application to this effect signed by the can d id a te should

be subm itted to the adm ission committee.

F ees for th e C o u rse

A course fee of Rs. 12,000 per annum shall be charged to each s tu d en t enro lled in the

course. In addition , s tuden ts w ould be required to pay the fee as applicable to the

B.A.(Hons.) Business Economics course at each college.

The colleges shall m ain ta in a separate fund, com prising of the course fee and any

add itional fee charged to the s tudents of B.A.(Hons.) Business Econom ics by the

college. The m oney available in the fund shall b e used for the follow ing purposes,

after app roval by the Business Economics teachers committee a t each college:

1. O rganising of teaching, guest teaching and special lectures for the course,

w here necessarv;

2. O rganising of seminars, symposia, w orkshops, orientation p ro g ram m es for

s tuden ts and teachers;

3. O rganising of industrial/field visits, business interaction, su m m er tra in ing and

placem ents;

4. O rganising of s tu d en t presentations, project preparation and business/research

training;

5. O rganising of extra-curricular activities for students to enhance team -bu ild ing

an d inter-college interaction;

6. P reparation an d purchase of s tudy m aterial and its copying for d is tr ibu tion to

s tudents;

7. C reation and m aintenance of a d epartm en t library;

S. Creation of d ep a rm en t diary and any such prom otional m aterial of the course

for use by the students;

9. P reparation and pub lish ing of a s tuden t m agazine/joural/new spaper;

10. Purchase of equ ipm ent to enable any of the above;

11. C reation of physical infrastructure to enable any of the above;

12. Institu tion of freeships and /o r scholarships for needy students;

13. Travel expenses for teachers required to undertake w ork for the course an d

travel expenses and registration fee for participating in sem inars an d o ther

academ ic activities by teachers involved in the teaching of the course;

14. A ny o ther expend itu re considered appropria te for the p rope r conduc t of the

course and for developm ent of the students, with the approval of the H ead ,

D ep artm en t of Business Economics, University of Delhi South C am pus.

9

Scheme of Examination and Rules of Promotion

S c h e m e o f E x a m in a tio n

1. B.A.(Honours) Business Economics shall be a three-year full-time h o n o u rs degree

course., to be taugh t in six semesters, viz., sem ester I, II, III, IV, V a n d VI. There

will be 24 papers in all, taugh t over the six semesters. Four p ap e rs are to be

tau g h t in each semester. S tudents are required to s tudy 20 com pulso ry papers

a n d 4 papers in electives d u ring the course of three years.

2. In V & VI sem ester elective papers are offered in Finance, M arketing, Economics,

Q uan tita tive Techniques and Project M anagem ent & E n trep reneu rsh ip areas.

S tuden ts are required to choose 2 elective stream s (each stream com prising tw o

papers). Paper (1) of each elective stream shall be taugh t in sem ester V and p ap e r

(2) o f the elective s tream will be taugh t in Sem ester VI. Elective s tream s offered in

a sem ester w ou ld d ep e n d up o n the num ber of s tuden ts in terested in enrolling for

each specialization. The specialization groups offered will be the d iscre tion of the

particu lar college.

3. For each theory paper, each week, 4 Lectures of 55 m inutes each an d 1 tu torial of

55 m inu tes each for each batch of 8-10 students w ould be conducted . For the

com p u te r p ap e r requiring interface w ith com puters 3 laboratory' classes of 110

m inu tes each w ould be held for each batch of 25-30 students.

4. M ed ium of teaching will be English alone.

5. Teaching m ethodology w ou ld include Lectures, Case Studies, Business Games,

Sem inars & Project Work. As com puter* have en tered every w a lk of life,

w herever applicable relevani softwares w o u ld be in tegrated in to the course.

Industry Interaction w o u ld be th rough G uest Lectures / Sem inars / Projects /

Industria l tours.

6. The D ep artm en t of Business Economics shall convene a m eeting of teachers for

each p ap e r of B.A. (Hons.) Business Economics before the com m encem ent of the

academ ic sem ester to incorporate new s tudy m aterial and discuss the detailed

topics an d their w eightage in the paper.

7. N o cand idate shall be considered to have p u rsu ed a regular cou rse of s tudy

unless he/she is certified by the college authorities to have a tten d ed a t least two

th ird s of the total num ber of lectures, tutorials, practicals, sem inars and case

d iscussions etc., conducted in each sem ester d u rin g the s tudent's course of study.

S. All s tuden ts shall have to undertake sum m er train ing for du ra tion of 6 to 8 weeks

at the end of sem ester II or semester IV d u ring the Sum m er vacations in a

business/corporate/research/academ ic organisation.

iO

9. A n exam ination in all odd semester papers shall be conducted a t the e n d of o dd

sem esters and an exam ination in all even sem ester papers shall be co n d u c ted at

the end of even sem esters w ith an only exception of V sem ester exam to be held

along w ith the VI sem ester exam. ............

10. Each theory p ap e r shall carry 100 marks, out of which 25 m arks shall b e reserved

for internal assessment. In the internal assessment, 20% w eightage will be g iven

to attendance, 80% m arks for assignm ents/tests/house exam ination /pro ject

presentation. The internal assessm ent shall be conducted once for each s tu d e n t in

each paper. D uring subsequent reappear, essential or for im provem en t, the

in ternal assessm ent m arks shall remain unchanged.

11. The com puter p ap e r in Vth Semester shall also carry 100 m arks of w hich 25

m arks shall be reserved for internal assessm ent and 25 m arks for practicals to be

conducted & evaluated jointly by internal and external exam iner d u r in g the

semester. The rest of the 50 m arks shall com prise of a project to be eva luated

th ro u g h a viva voce conducted by the University.

12. For each theory paper, a w ritten exam ination of three hours d u ra tio n at the end

of each sem ester for 75 m arks and for com puter paper a practical exam of 2 hours

du ra tion and a viva voce will be conducted by the university on the project

subm itted by the student.

The p ape r of examination shall be as follows:

Sem

. No.

P ap er No. a n d T itle Lectures*

p er w eek

(1)

Tutorial

Classes**

per w eek

(2)

D ura tion of

W ritten Exam

(in hours)

(3)

W ritten

Exam

Max M arks

(4)

Internal

A ssessm ent

Max M arks

(5)

To la I

M axim um

M arks

(4)+(5)= (6)

101: Micro Economics - 1 4 1 3 75 25 100

T 102: Statistics for Business Economics 4 1 3 75 25 1001.

103: Fundam entals of Business & A ccounting 4 1 3 75 25 100

104: Business C om m unication 4 1 3 75 25 100

201: Micro Economics - II 4 1 3 75 25 100

TT202: M athem atics for Business Economics 4 1 3 75 25 100

11.203: Legal Aspects of Business 4 1 3 75 25 1 0 0

204: M arketing M anagem ent 4 1 3 75 25 100

301: M acro Economics - 1 4 1 3 75 25 100

i i i .302: Industrial Economics 4 1 3 75 25 100

303: Business Finance 4 1 3 75 25 1 0 0

304: Basic Econometrics 4 1 3 75 25 100

401: M acro Economics - II 4 1 3 75 25 100

IV.402: O rganisational Behaviour 4 1 3 75 25 100

403: Q uantitative Techniques for M anagem ent 4 1 3 75 25 100

404: Indian Financial System 4 1 3 75 25 100

V.

501: Indian Economy 4 1 3 75 25 100

502: C om putational Techniques for Business Economics3 laboratory sessions of

110 m inutes per group

of 25-30 students

Practical

exam of 2

hours

dura tion

P ro jec t: 50

Practical :25

25

100

511: O ption FI: Investm ent M anagem ent 4 1 3 75 25 100

521: O ption M l: Consum er Behaviour 4 1 3 75 25 100

531: O ption Q1 : Advanced Econometrics 4 1 3 75 25 100

541 : O ption El : International Economics 4 1 3 75 25 100

551 : O ption PI : Project M anagem ent 4 1 3 75 25 100

601: Environm ent Economics 4 1 3 75 25 100

602: Business Strategy & Ethics 4 1 3 75 25 100

611: O ption F2 : International Finance 4 1 3 75 25 100

VI. 621: O ption M2: A dvertisem ent & Brand M anagem ent 4 1 3 75 25 100

631: O ption Q2 : A dvanced M athem atical Techniques 4 1 3 75 25 100

641: O ption E2 : Economic G row th & Policy 4 1 3 75 25 100

651 : O ption P2 : Entrepreneurship and Family Business 4 1 3 75 25 100

TOTAL 2400

’'Lectures will be of 55 m inutes duration.

** Tutorial class shall be of 55 m inutes du ra tion and shall be held for each batch of 8 to 10 students.

P ro m o tio n R u les

1. Internal Assessment performance is not considered for promotion purposes: Forthe purpose of passing and promotion o f a student the marks secured by the student in the internal assessment shall not be considered.

2. In te rn a l A ssessm en t is conduc ted once: The internal assessm ent of each

s tu d en t in each p ap e r is conduc ted w h en the s tuden t is enrolled as a regular

s tu d en t in the year in w hich the particu lar paper is taught. Internal assessm ent

m arks scored by the s tu d en t shall rem ain unchanged in case the s tu d en t

subsequen tly engages in essential reappear, reappear for im p ro v em en t or

reap p ea r after failing.

3. P ass in g in a y ean A s tu d en t shall be required to obtain a t least 40% of m arks in

the aggregate in b o th the sem esters together in all the eigh t pape rs to be

declared passed in a particu lar year.

4. P ro m o tio n to the nex t yea r w ith o u t passing: If a s tu d en t fails to secure 40%

m arks in aggregate in bo th the sem esters together in all the e igh t papers, then

subject to essential reappear in a m ax im um of two papers in w hich the s tu d en t

has scored the least m arks, if the aggregate in the rem aining six pape rs is 40%

m arks o r higher, the s tu d en t shall be prom oted to the next year w ith essential

reap p ea r in one or tw o papers. Such prom oted studen ts shall be regular

s tu d en ts of the college if they w ere enrolled in the first o r second years and

shall be required to enrol as ex-students in case they w ere enrolled in the th ird

year.

5. P ass in g after P ro m o tio n w ith E ssential Reappear: A s tu d en t w h o is required

to reappear in any paper(s) of an exam ination of an y year a t a subsequen t

exam ination m ay b^ declared to have passed the exam ination if by com bining

the m arks ob ta ined in tha t paper(s) at the subsequent exam ination w ith the

m arks ob ta ined in the rem ain ing pape rs earlier, he/she secures the m in im um

m arks required for passing the exam ination of that year.

6. F a iling in a y e a r A s tu d en t w ho is no t eligible for passing o r for p rom otion

w ith reappear shall be deem ed to have failed in the particular year. The s tuden t

w ho fails in First or Second or Third year exam ination shall be requ ired to

reap p ea r in the subsequen t exam ination on being enrolled as an ex-studen t as

per the rules of the University.

7. R eap p earin g for a fa iled s tuden t: A n ex-student shall be required to re-appear

only in those papers in which the s tu d en t has scored less than 40% of the m arks

in the w ritten exam ination. In case the s tuden t wishes, the option to repeat an

entire sem ester o r the entire year shall be available.

8. S ch ed u lin g o f Papers: An examination in all odd semester papers shall be

conducted at the end of o dd semesters and an examination in all even semester

14

papers shall be conducted a t the end of even sem esters N o su p p lem en ta ry

exam ination for any of the sem ester shall be conducted.

9. R eap p e a rin g for im provem en t: Reappearing for im provem ent in an y p a p e r is

perm itted subject to the condition that papers of the first and second sem esters

m ay be im proved u p o n in the third and fourth sem esters respectively a n d the

papers of the th ird and fourth semesters m ay be im proved u p o n in the fifth an d

sixth sem esters respectively. After passing the third year a s tuden t m ay choose

of re ap p ea r for im provem en t in one or m ore individual papers of the th ird

year.

10. A w ard o f Degree: S tudents w ho have secured pass in each of the th ree years

are eligible for the aw ard of a B.A. (Honours) degree in Business Economics.

Such cand ida tes shall be classified on the basis of the com bined resu lt of

sem ester I, II, III, IV, V and VI exam inations as follows:

C andidates securing in aggregate shall be categorised as follows:

75% an d above First Division w ith Distinction

60% an d less than 75% First Division

50% to less than 60% Second Division

40% to less than 50% Third Division

11. M ax im u m period: A candidate m ust qualify for the aw ard of the degree w ith in

5 years of h is/her first adm ission to the course.

15

COMPARATIVE STATEMENT

S e m e s t e r - I E x is t in g P a p e r P a p e r N o . 1 'rop osed P a p e r R e m a r k s

P aper-I Basic Macro Economics Paper-101 Micro Economics - 1 Paper shifted from Sem II and syllabus revised

Paper-II Statistics for business Pa per-102 Business Statistics Syllabus revised

Paper-I l l Fundamentals of Business &

Accounting

Paper-103 Fundamentals of Business &

Accounting

Syllabus revised

Paper-IV Business Communication Pa per-104 Business Communication Syllabus revised

S e m e s t e r - I I E x i s t in g P aper P a p e r N o . P r o p o s e d P a p e r R e m a r k s

Pa per -V Basic M ic r o E c o n o m ic s Paper-201 M icro E c o n o m ic s - 2 P aper sh if ted from s e m IV a nd S y l la b u s rev ised

P a p e i -V I M a th e m a t ic s for B u s in e s s P aper-202 M a t h e m a t i c s for B u s in e s s S y l la b u s rev ised

Paper-V II In ternational trade Paper-203 L egal A s p e c t s o f B u s in e ss Sh ifted fo rm s e m e s t e r III a nd S y l la b u s rev ised

Paper-V III M a rk et in g M a n a g e m e n t P aper-204 I\ larket ing M a n a g e m e n t S y l la b u s rev ised

S e m e s t e r - I l l E x is t in g P a p e r P a p e r N o . P r o p o s e d P a p e r R e m a r k s

Paper-IX A p p l i e d M a cro E c o n o m ic s Paper-301 M a cro E c o n o m ic s - 1 Paper sh if ted from s e m I and S y l la b u s rev ised

P aper-X Legal A s p e c t s o f b u s in e s s Paper-302 Industria l E c o n o m ic s Sy l la b u s r ev ised

Paper-X I Industr ia l E c o n o m ic s P aper-303 B u s in e s s F in a nce Shifted fro m o p t io n a l g r o u p & rev ised

Paper-X II F u n d a m e n t a l s o f C o m p u t e r s Paper-304 Q u a n t i ta t iv e T e c h n iq u e s for

M a n a g e m e n t

Shifted f r o m o p t io n a l g r o u p & s y l la b u s rev ised .

Semester-IV Existing Paper Paper No. Proposed Paper Remarks

Paper-XIII Applied Micro economics Paper-401 Macro Economics - 11 Paper sh if ted f r o m sem II and S y l la b u s rev ised

P aper-X IV Management and Organizational

Behaviour

Paper-402 Organisational Behaviour Syllabus revised

P aper-X V A p p l ic a t io n s o f c o m p u t e r s P aper-403 B isic E c o n o m e tr ic s Shifted from opt io na l g r o u p & sy l la b u s rev ised.

P aper-X VI Indian F inancial s y s t e m P aper-404 Indian Financial S y s te m & M arkets Sy l la b u s rev ised

Semester-V Existing Paper Paper No. Proposed Paper Remarks

Paper-XVI] Indian E c o n o m y Paper-501 Indian E c o n o m y S y l la b u s rev ised

Paper-XVIII Economic policy and

comparative development

Paper-502 Computational Techniques fa r Business N e w p a p er in tro d u ced and S y l la b u s rev ised

Paper-XIX Optional paper 1(A) 511 to 551 Elective Paper 1 (A)

Paper-X X Optional paper 2(A) Elective Paper 2(A)

S e m e s t e r - V I Existing Paper Paper No. Proposed Paper Remarks

Paper-X XI Environment Economics Paper-601 Environmental Economics Syllabus revised

Paper-XXII Business Strategy Paper-602 Business Strategy & Ethics Syllabus revised

Paper-XXIII Optional paper 1(B) 611 to 651 Elective Paper 1(E)

Paper-X XIV Optional paper 2(B) E ective Paper 2(E)

Elective Papers

O p t i o n a l G r o u p s E x i s t in g P a p er P a p e r N o . P r o p o s e d Paper R e m a r k s

G r o u p A F in a n c ia l m a n a g e m e n t G r o v p F F in a n c e

Pa p e r - 1 C o r p o r a te f inance P a p e r - 511 (FI) International f inance Sy l la b u s rev ised

Pa pur-2 In ternational financial m a n j g e m e n t Paper- 611. (F2) In v e s tm e n t m a n a g e m e n t N e w pap er in tr o d u c e d

G r o u p B In t e r n a t io n a l B u s i n e s s E n v i r o n m e n t G r o u p M M a r k e t i n g

Paper-1 International B u s in e ss E n v ir o n m e n t Paper-521 ( M l ) C o n s u m e r B e h a v io u r S y l la b u s rev ised

Paper-2 In ternational B u s in e ss Paper-621 (M2) B rand & A d v e r t i s e m e n t M g m t N e w pap er in tr o d u c e d

G r o u p C E n t r e p r e n e u r s h ip a n d S m a l l B u s i n e s s G r o u p Q Q u a n t i t a t i v e T e c h n i q u e s

Paper-1 E n tr e p r en eu rsh ip and F a m ily B u s in e ss Paper- 531 ( Q l ) A d v a n c e d E co no m etr ics N e w pap er in tr o d u c e d

Paper-2 Sm all B u s in e s s M a n a g e m e n t Paper-631. (Q2) A d v a n c e d M ath T e c h n iq u e s N e w p a p er in tr o d u c e d

G r o u p D M a r k e t i n g G r o u p E E c o n o m i c s N e w G ro u p in tr o d u c e d ,

Paper-1 C o n s u m e r B e h a v io u r and Sales M a n a g e m e n t Paper- 541 (E l) In ternat iona l E c o n o m ics Sh ifted fro m se n .ester II

Paper-2 M arket R esearch Paper- 641 (E2) E c o n o m ic G r o w t h & Policy Sh if ted from s e m e s t e r V

G r o u p E C o m p u t e r A p p l i c a t i o n s G r o u p P P roject M g m t & E n tr e p r e n e u r s h p N e w O p t io n a l G ro u p

Paper-1 P r o g r a m m in g in 'C 'L a n g u a g e Paper 551 (PI) Project & Risk M a n a g e m e n t N e w pap er in tr o d u c e d

Paper-2 Data Base : C o n c e p t s and A p p l i c a t io n s P aper 651 (P2) E n tr e p r en eu rsh ip & F am ily Bus. N e w pap er in tr o d u c e d

G r - P A d v a n c e d Q u a n t i t a t iv e T e c h n i q u e s

P aper - 1 O p e ra t io n Research arid A p p l ic a t io n s

P ape r - 2 E c o n o m e tr ic s : T h e o r y a n d A p p l ic a t io n s

G r - G M a n a g e m e n t o f S e r v ic e s

Paper - 1 Financial Serv ice s

P aper - 2 N o n Financia l Serv ices. . .......

17

S t r u c t u r e o f P a p e r s f o r t h e R e v i s e d B . A . ( H o n s .) B u s i n e s s Ec o n o m i c s c o u r s e

Sem ester - I

P a p e r -1 0 1

M i c r o e c o n o m i c s - 1

UNIT 1: BASIC CONCEPTS

Positive and n o rm ativ e economics; constructing a model, scientific m ethod; concepts of

o pp o rtu n ity cost, ra te of grow th, elasticity, and of total, average and m arginal functions.

UNIT 2 : CONSUM ER D EM AN D

C ard ina l theory, deriva tion of dem an d in case of one or m ore goods; O rd ina l theory:

B udget sets a n d Preferences u n d e r different situations. Indifference curves and the rate

an d elasticity of substitution. C onsum er equilibrium ; effects of change in prices and

income; Engels curve. Derivation of dem and curve. Income and substitu tion effects

effects: Hicks an d Slutsky. Applications of indifference curves to o ther econom ic

problem s.

M arket dem and: elasticity, shifts and m ovem ent; inverse dem and function.

Revenue and Expenditure, elasticity and m arginal revenue; incom e elasticity of dem and ;

consum er surplus.

Revealed preference theory: WARP, SARP and the derivation of d em an d curve.

UNIT 3 : PRODUCTION

P roduction functions: single variable - average and m arginal product, variable

proportions, stages of production. T w o variables - isoquants, re tu rns to scale and to a

factor; factor prices; cost m inim isation and o u tp u t m axim ization; Elasticity of

substitution. E xpansion p a th an d the cost function.

UNIT 4 : COST

C cnccp t of econom ic cost; Short run and long ru n cost curves; increasing and decreasing

cost industries; envelope curve; L-shaped cost curves; econom ies of scale.

Prices as param eters: Firm equilibrium and profit; short and long-run supply function;

taxes and subsidies.

UNIT 5 : MARKETS

Perfect com petition: Equilibrium of the market. Long run industry supply ; p roducer and

consum er surplus; effects of taxes and subsidies.

S ug g ested R ead ings

1. Varian, H al R.: Intermediate Microeconomics (Sixth edition)

2. Bernheim, B. D ouglas & Whinston, Michael D.: Microeconomics [TMH, 2009]

3. Pindyck, Robert S. & Rubinfeld, Daniel L.: Microeconomics Sixth Edition [PHI]

4. Browning, E dgar K. & Zupan,: Microeconomic Theory and Applications

S em este r - I

P a p e r - 1 0 2

S t a t i s t i c s FOR BUSINESS EC O N O M IC S

U N IT 1 : IN T R O D U C T IO N

Data types and scale. Sources. Sam ple and population. Sigm a notation.

U N IT 2 : U N IIV A R IA TE ANALYSIS

M easures of central tendency, absolute and relative m easures of dispersion, m om ents,

Sheppard 's corrections for m om ents for grouped data. M easures of skew ness and

kurtosis. Applications.

U N IT 3: M ULTIVARIATE ANALYSIS

Correlation: simple, m ultiple and partial; linear and non-linear. C ausa tion and

correlation. Use of raw and g rouped data. Probable errors. Rank Correlation.

R egression A nalysis : Principle of least squares and regression lines. Regression

equations and estimation, derivation of norm al equations. Sum s of squares. S tandard

Error of Estimates. Regressions w ith tim e series data. Estimation of g row th rate.

U N IT 4: INDEX NUM BERS

Laspyres, Paasche index num bers an d their relation. Bowley, M arshall E dgew orth and

Fisher indexes. Fixed and chain base index num bers. Tests of adequacy. Base shifting,

splicing and deflating. Construction of real indexes: C onsum er Price Index an d BSE

index.

U N IT 5: PROBABILITY A N D D ISTR IB U TIO N S

Review of counting rules. Defining probability. Types of events. Joint an d conditional

probability. A dd ition and m ultip lication rules. Bayes' theorem . Probability d istributions.

Discrete and continuous random variables. M ass and density functions an d cum ulative

probabilities. Joint probability distributions, m arginal an d conditional d istributions.

M athem atical expectation and variance.

T heoretical d is tribu tions: discrete: uniform , bernoulli, b inom ial and poisson; continuous:

uniform, exponential and Normal.

S am ple a n d Surveys: Sam ple an d com plete enum eration. M ethods of sam ple selection:

random , stratified, m ultistage cluster. Sam ple m easures and the degrees of freedom .

S uggested R ead ings

1. Karmel, P.H. & Polasek, M.: A pplied statistics for econom ists

2. Spiegel, M.R.: Theory & Problem s of Statistics, Schaum 's outline series, M cGraw

Hill Pub. Co.

3. Spiegel, M.R.:. Probability and Statistics

4. Freund: M athematical Statistics

19

PAPER - 1 0 3

F u n d a m e n t a l s o f B u s i n e s s a n d a c c o u n t i n g

S em es te r - I

Objective:

The course aim s to p ro v id e basic concepts an d know ledge of a business en te rp rise an d w ith

the basic accounting principles an d techniques of preparing and p resen ting the accounts for

user of accounting inform ation.

UNIT 1 : INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS

Concept, N a tu re an d Scope of Business Enterprise; Concept of Business as a System;

Business and E nvironm ent Interface; Entrepreneurial opportun ities in con tem porary

business env iro n m en t o r em erging tren d s in business: N e tw o rk in g m arketing,

Franchising, Business Process O utsourcing, know ledge Process O utsourcing, E-

com m erce an d M -Commerce.

O p p o rtu n ity an d Idea G eneration - role of Creativity and Innovation. Feasibility s tudy

a n d p rep ara tio n of Business P lan Basic considerations in setting u p a Business Enterprise.

Process of setting u p a Business Enterprise.

UNIT 2 : INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING

C oncept of Financial A ccounting. Types of Accounting: Financial, C ost an d M anagem entA ccc*} m H n o - A ^ ciTl T n f r \ r m a £ i o p TV>o ] i c p r c A -*>->4^,-r^ - . , - - 0 . . w ................... . - * . . .. . - - S.... . ^ . . . .

Inform ation and th e ir needs. Q ualita tive Characteristics of A ccounting Information.

Functions, A dvan tages an d Lim itations of Financial Accounting.

Basis of Accounting; C ash basis and Accrual basis. The nature of Financial A ccounting

Principles - Basic C oncepts an d Conventions: Entity, M oney M easurem ent, G oing

Concern, Cost, Realisation, Accruals, Periodicity, Consistency, P rudence (Conservatism),

M ateriality an d Full Disclosures.

Financial A ccounting S tandards: concept, benefits, procedure for issu ing A ccounting

S tandards in India. Salient features of A ccounting Standard (AS): 1 (ICAI)

A ccounting Process

From recording of Business Transactions to prepara tion of Trial Balance, an overview.

UNIT 3 : X

(i) Final Accounts W ith Adjustm ents

M eaning and features. P reparation of T rad ing and Profit and Loss account, Balance Sheet.

(ii) Depreciation Accounting

M eaning of Deprecation, causes, objects of p rovid ing Depreciation, factors affecting

D epreciation, accounting trea tm ent including prevision for D epreciation Accounting.

M ethods of depreciation: S traight Line M ethod, Dim inishing Balance M ethod, Change of

M ethod as per revised AS-6.

(iii) Valuation O f Inventories

M eaning. Significance of Inventory Valuation. I n v e n t o r y R e c o r d

Systems: Periodic and Perpetual. Methods: FIFO, LIFO and Weighted Average.

Salient features of Accounting Standard (AS): 2 (ICAI)

(iv) Fixed Assets V aluation : Salient features of Accounting Standard AS-L).

UNIT 4 :

(i) Introduction To Corporate Accounts

Cash Flow Statem ent: Concepts of funds. P reparation of Cash Flow S ta tem ent as per

Accounting S tandard (AS): 3 (Revised) (ICAI): Indirect m ethod only.

C orporate Financial Statements: Schedule VI FORMAT as prescribed in C o m pan ies Act,

1956.

(li) Financial A nalysis

Financial S ta tem ents and their Limitations, Concepts of Financial Analysis, Tools of

Financial Analysis: C om parative Financial Statements, C om m on Size Financial

Statem ents, T rend Percentages, Ratio Analysis, Cash Flow Analysis

UNIT 5: INTRO DUCTIO N TO COST CONCEPTS FOR DECISION MAKING

Concept of Cost. Types of Cost. Relevance of Cost in Decision Making.

Suggested Readings:

1. A nthony, R.N., a n d J.S. Reece, “Accounting Principles", Richard D. Irwin, Inc.

2. M onga, j.R., ''Financial Accounting: Concepts and Applications'', M ayoor Paper Backs, N ew

Delhi.

3. Shukla, M.C., T.S. G rew al and S.C.Gupta, "Advanced Accounts", Vol-I, S.Chand & Co.,

N ew Delhi.

4. G upta, R.L. and M. R adhasw am y, " Advanced Accountancy", Vo!-I, Sultan C hand & Sons,

N ew Delhi.

5. M aheshw ari, S.N. and . S. K. M aheshwari, "Financial Accounting", Vikas Publishing

House, N e w Delhi.

6. Tulsian, P.C., " Advanced Accounting", Tata Me Graw Hill, N ew Delhi.

7. "Compendium of Statements and Standards o f Accounting", The Institute of C hartered

A ccountan ts of India, N ew Delhi.

P a p e r - 1 0 4

B u s i n e s s C o m m u n i c a t i o n

Sem este r - 1

O bjectives: Effective C om m unication is essential for holistic developm ent of the s tuden ts of

Business Economics. The oojective of the paper is to develop com m unica tion skills in

speaking and w ritin g essential for all areas of m anagem ent.

U N IT 1 : IN T R O D U C T IO N TO BUSINESS C O M M U N IC A T IO N

Basic form of C om m unication - D ow nw ard , upw ard and Horizontal com m unication,

Process of com m unication.

C orporate C om m unica tion - Formal and informal com m unication netw ork, G rapev ine -

single strand, gossip, cluster, Probability, Importance of G rapevine, M iscom m unication or

Barrier to com m unica tion - W rong choice of m edium , Physics barriers, Sem antic barriers,

different C om prehension of reality, Socio psychological barriers.

Principles of C om m unica tion - 7c's concept

U N IT 2 : W R IT IN G SKILLS

Planning business messages.. Business letters, M emo formats, Request letters, G ood new s

letters, Bad new s letters. Persuasive letters - AIDA, Sales letters, collection letters

D etailed Project R eport W riting an d presentation

U N IT 3: ORAL PR E SE N T A T IO N

Principles of oral p resentations, Factors effecting presentations

N on - Verbal com m unica tion - A ppearance, Body language, Para language, T im e, Space,

Silence.

Effective Listening - factors affecting listening, Im proving listening

U N IT 4: CO R PO R A T E C O M M U N IC A T IO N

Interview ing Skills - In terv iew er 's preparation, Interview ee's p repara tion , T ypes of

interview

C om m unication for E m ploym ent - Resume: Form ulating Career Plans, P lanning your

Resume, S tructuring the Resume, C onten t of the Resume, Electronic R esum es

U N IT 5: IN T E R N A T IO N A L C O M M U N IC A T IO N

C ultural sensitiveness, C ultural context

N egotiation S k ills - Process, Strategies, Issue in N egotiation - Collective bargain ing ,

Process & Essent i a i S of effective BC.

S uggested R eadings:

1. Ronald E. Duleck, John S.Fielden: Principles of Business C om m unication

2. M urphy a n d H i d e r b r a n d t : Business Communication

3. Bovee Thill: Business C om num ication Today, Me <"raw H i ! !

4. Malra Treece, Aiiyn and Bacon : Successful Communication

n

5. Randall E. Majors H arp er & Rom : Business com m unication

6. H arpert & Row W estern : G uide to effective letter writing

7. M ary Ellen Guffoy : Business Com m unication

8. Fred L uthan : O rganizational Behavior(For Negotiation Skill)

9. C.B M m oria : Industria l Relation (^or the topic of collective bargaining)

23

P a p e r - 2 0 1

M i c r o e c o n o m i c s - II

S e m e s t e r -II

U N IT 1 : M ARKETS W IT H IM PERFECT C O M PE T IT IO N

M onopoly : Equilibrium ; supply ; m u ltip ian t firm; m onopoly pow er; d ea d w e ig h t loss;

price discrim ination; bund ling ; tw o-part tariffs.

M onopolistic Com petition: P roduct differentiation; equilibrium of the firm in the

in d u stry -w ith en try of new firm s an d w ith price competition. C om parison w ith p u re

com petetion.

O ligopoly and G am e Theory: C o u m o t mode! and reaction curves; B ertrand m odel;

quan tity leadership; price leadership; N on collusive stable equilibrium ; sim u ltaneous

quan tity setting; collusion; cartels; C oncepts of G am e Theory: D o m inan t s trategies and

N ash Equilibrium ; M ixed strategies; Prisoner's Dilemma. Specification of oligopoly

m odels in gam e theoretic terms.

U N IT 2 : FA C TO R M ARKETS

Factor pricing in the case of single and m any variable factors; d em an d for labor in a

p roduc t m arket w ith perfect com petition and m onopoly. M onopsony, bilateral

m onopoly an d role of labour unions. Economic rent and quasi rent.

U N IT 3 : GEN ERA L EQUILIBRIUM

E dgew orth box; 2 good, 2 factor, 2 consum er analysis and Pareto optim ality conditions;

m arke t trade; W alras Law; Relative prices; Equilibrium and efficiency; G rand Utility

possibility frontier. Im plication of first and second welfare theorem;

U N IT 4 ; WELFARE

Social w elfare function; welfare maximisation; Fair allocation; E nvy and equity . A rrow 's

Im possibility Theorem .

U N IT 5 : M A R K ET FAILURE

A sym m etric in form ation and signaling. Joint production and consum ption and

externalities. C om m on property resources and public goods.

S uggested R ead in g s

1. Varian, H al R.: In term ediate M icroeconomics (Sixth edition)

2. Bernheim, B. D ouglas & W hins ton, Michael D.: M icroeconomics [TMH, 2009]

3. Pindyck, Robert S. & Rubinfeld, Daniel L.: Microeconomics Sixth Edition [PHI]

4. Browning, E dgar K. & Z upan,: m icroeconom ic Theory and A pplications

P a p e r - 2 0 2

M a t h e m a t i c s f o r B u s i n e s s Ec o n o m i c s

S em ester -II

UNIT 1 : BASIC C O N C EPTS

N u m b er system, Logic, E quations and Inequalities, Concept and m ethods of proof. Set

theory; types of relations in economics; functions, types, m onotonicity an d invertibility,

dom ain and range.

UNIT 2 : FU N C TIO N S

Sequences: convergent, d ivergen t and oscillatory. Limit of a convergent sequence. Series

and their convergence.

Real valued functions: Linear, polynom ial, hyperbolic, logarithmic, pow er a n d their

applications. Roots of polynom ials. Limit of a real valued function. C ontinuity and

differentiability.

UNIT 3 : SINGLE VARIABLE DIFFERENTIA TIO N

Polynomial, logarithm ic an d p ow er functions and their applications. Rates of change and

the tangent. A pplications of continuity' and differentiability: In term ediate value, extreme

value and m ean value theorems. Taylor's an d M cLaurin's series and expansions.

Stationarity, convexity and concavity of functions. Global and local extrem a an d points of

inflexion. Applications to Economics.

UNIT 4 : LINEAR ALGEBRA

Vector space: operations of add ition and scaler multiplication and their geometric

representation; linear com binations, linear sp an and basis. Scaler P ro d u c t and

orthogonality. Matrices: operations of addition, multiplication, transpose. R ow /colum n

operations. M atrix types: sym m etric, orthogonal, idem potent. D eterm inants a n d inverse.

Linear independence, Rank and solutions to linear sim ultaneous equations. Applications.

UNIT 5 : FU N C T IO N S OF TW O VARIABLES

Geometric representation. Level curves. Partial derivatives. Young's theorem.

H om ogenous an d hom othetic and CES functions. Euler's theorem . Generalised chain rule

and implicitly defined functions. Differentials. Convex sets. Concavity and convexity.

Local m axim a an d minim a. O ptim isation of functions w ith a single equality constraint.


1. Sydsaeter, K nut & H am m ond , Peter J.: M athematics for Economic Analysis [Pearsons

Education]

2. Chiang, A.C.: F undam ental M ethods of M athematical Economics [TMH]

3. Allen, R.G.D.: M athem atical Analysis for Economics [Macmillan]

25

P a p e r - 2 0 3

L e g a l A s p e c t s o f B u s i n e s s

Objective:

The objective of the course is to im part basic know ledge of the im p o rtan t business law s

along w ith relevant case law.

U N IT I : IN D IA N C O N T R A C T ACT, 1872

C ontract - m eaning, essentials and kinds. Offer, Acceptance, C onsideration , C ontrac tua l

C apacity, Free consent. M odes of discharge of a contract an d rem edies for b reach of a

contract.

U N IT 2: N EG O TIABLE IN ST R U M E N T S ACT, 1881

M eaning and characteristics of Prom issory Note, Bill of Exchange an d C heque. H older

a n d H older in Due Course, N egotiation, Crossing of Cheque - Kinds an d effects.

U N IT 3: C O M PA N IE S ACT, 1956

C om p an y - m eaning, kinds, p rocedure of formation. M em o ran d u m of association,

Articles of Association & Prospectus. A llo tm ent of shares. Shareholders an d M embers.

C om p an y M eetings an d Resolutions

U N IT 4 : C O N SU M E R PR O T E C T IO N ACT, 1986

Structure of the Act, jurisdiction and definitions. C onsum er com plaint - m eaning, relief

available to a consumer.

U N IT 5 : IN F O R M A T IO N T E C H N O L O G Y ACT, 2000

Schem e of the Act, definitions. Digital S ignature and Electronic G overnance. Regulation

of Certifying Authorities

Note: The leading cases should be d iscussed at relevant places.

Suggested Readings:

1. Kuchhal, M.C.& Prakash, Deepa , "Business Legislation for Management", Vikas

Publishing, H ouse (P) Ltd., N ew Delhi.

2. C hadha, P. R .and Bagrial, A shok k., "Business Law" G algotia Publish ing Com pany,

N ew Delhi.

3. Singh, Avtar, "The Principles of Mercantile Law”, Eastern Book C om pany,

4. Lucknow .

5. M aheshw ari & M aheshw ari, "Business Lazo", National Publishing House, N ew Delhi.

6. Kapoor, N. D., "Business Law”, Sultan C hand & Sons, N ew Delhi.

7. Desai, T.R., "Indian Contract Act, Sale of Goods Act and Partnership A c t", S.C. Sarkar &

Sons Pvt. Ltd., Calcutta.

S. Bagrial, A. k, "Company Law”, Vikas Publishing, House (P) Ltd., N ew Delhi.

S em es te r -II

9. Datey, V.S., " Students Guide to Corporate Laws", Taxm an's A llied Services (P) Ltd.,

N ew Delhi.

10. Singh, Avtar., "Company Law”, Eastern Book C om pany Luchnow .

11. Kapoor, G.K., "Corporate Laws & Secretarial Practice", P rem ier Book C om pany , N ewn .n . ;L/eini. _ - • • ■

12. C hadha, Reena,Chadha, Sumant, "Corporate Laws", Mayur Paperbacks, N e w Delhi.

13. C onsum er Protection A ct,1986.

14. "Information Technology Rules 2000 & Cyber Regulations Appellate Tribunal Rules

2000 with Information Technology Act 2000" Taxm ann Publications Pvt. Ltd.,

N e w Delhi.

15. Painttal, D., "Law of Information Technology" T axm ann Publications Pvt. Ltd., N ew

Delhi.

P a p e r - 2 0 4

M a r k e t i n g M a n a g e m e n t

Objective:

A n in troductory s tu d y of the various principles and functions of m arketing keep ing the

Indian backdrop w herever possible.

UNIT I: U N D ER STA N D IN G THE BASICS

Introduction : Definition of m arket, m arketing and m arketing m anagem ent, M arketing

functions, Objectives of m arketing m anagem ent, C om pany 's o rien ta tion tow ards

m arketing

Marketing Environment : N a tu re of m arketing environm ent, Environm ental analysis

and scanning, and its Im portance, Types of m arketing environm ent: Economic,

D em ographic, Socio- cultural, technological, political and legal (facts on Indian

envcironm ent m u s t be incorporated)

Indian M arketing Environment : Factors determ ining com petitive forces (Michael

Porter's m odel), Sea change in the Indian m arketing env ironm en t consequen t to

liberalization, M arketing challenges of the liberalized economy.

UNIT 2 : NATURE OF MARKETING

Market Segm entations and Market targeting: Leveis and Patterns of m arket

segm entations, M arket segm enta tion procedure, Bases for segm enting consum er

markets. E valuating an d selecting the m arket segments.

Marketing m ix j C oncept of in tegrated approach to m anage m arketing mix ra ther than

m anaging each 'P ' separately .

r tx trnr ^ . n r » r \ r > T a \ rn nr» rr’TXTr1 ncrTCTn\Tuixii O . i i \u L/UV,i rvl xi-/ i xvj

Product life cycle: the concept and its strategic implications, P roduct mix: levels,

hierarchy, classifications, mix.

Product line decisions: p roduc t line analysis, p roduct line length, line m odernization,

featuring, p runing . \

Positioning: D eveloping an d com m unicating a positioning strategy, w hich positioning to

promote, com m unica ting a com pany 's positioning.

Differentiation: differentiation tools. Product, services, personnel, channel, image

differentiation.

Branding: b ran d decisions. W hat is b rand , build ing b rand identity, bu ild ing b rands in

the new economy, b ran d equity, b rand ing challenges, b rand n am e decisions, brand

build ing tools, b ran d strategy decision, b rand asset m anagem ent, b rand aud iting and

repositioning.

Pricing: significance of pricing, factors influencing pricing, pricing objectives, pricing

strategies and procedure.

S e m e s te r -U

U N IT 4 : P R O M O T IO N A N D D ISTRIBU TIO N

C om m unication Process, Steps to achieve effective com m unication, The concep t of

In tegrated M arketing C om m unication

Advertising:_setting the advertising objectives, deciding ^ n the advertis ing budget,

choosing the advertis ing message, deciding on m edia and m easuring effectiveness.

Sales prom otion: its purpose, major decisions in sales prom otion.

Personal selling: principles of personal selling. Professionalism, negotiation

Public relations an d publicity: m arketing public relations, m ajor decisions in m arke ting

PR. C oncept of d irect marketing: growth, benefits, in tegrated direct m arketing, m ajor

channels, catalog m arketing,

Channels: C hannel functions and flows, channel levels, service sector channel,

inform ation h ig h w ay channels, Channel dynamics: vertical m arketing system , horizontal

m arketing system, m ultichannel m arketing system, conflict, cooperation, com petition,

legal an d ethical issues in channel relations.

Retailing and wholesaling: types of retailers, m arketing decisions, trends in retailing,

wholesaling: g ro w th an d types, m arketing decisions, trends.

M arket logistics: objectives, decisions, organizational lessons, s tore m anagem ent,

U N IT 5 : C O N T E M PO R A R Y ISSUES

Ethics in M arketing

N ew er concepts like Relationship marketing, Holistic m arketing , G reen m arketing,

services m arketing, political m arketing etc.

Telem arketing an d M-commerce, e-marketing, Rural m arketing, T rends in Retailing

N ote: case s tu d y a n d case lets m u s t be included.


1. M arketing M anagem ent, Phillip Kotler.

2. M arketing M anagem ent, R am asw am y and Ram akum ari

3. Business and M arketing M agazines

O bj ective:

M acroeconom ics is the s tu d y of the aggregate perform ance of the ecr

national income, gross dom estic product, rate of g row th of the econc

u n em p lo y m en t levels, inflation and price levels, etc. The present sy llabus i r u , :

an u n d e rs tan d in g of the econom y for s tuden ts at the u n d erg rad u a te level,

been d iv id ed into tw o parts, as M acroeconomics I & II, to be covered

sem esters respectively.

U N IT 1. A N IN T R O D U C T IO N TO BASIC M A C R O E C O N O M IC S C O N O

D 'Souza (2008): C h ap te r 1

Econom ic Survey (Latest)

U N IT 2. IS-LM M O D E L

B lanchard (2006): C hap ters 3, 4 & 5

D 'Souza (2008): C h ap te r 8 (pages 255-256)

U N IT 3. A G G R E G A T E SUPPY A N D A GG REG A TE D EM A N D M O D EL

Blanchard (2006): C hapters 6 & 7

U N IT 4. IN FL A T IO N , UNEM PLOYM EN T A N D TH E PHILLIPS CURVE

Blanchard (2006): C hapters 8 & 9

Econom ic Survey-Latest

U N IT 5: a) Econom ics o f G reat E vents-D epression , H y p e rin f la tio n a n d D efidv

b) A d v an ces in B usiness Cycle T heory

1. D crnbusch , Fischer and Startz (2004): C hapter 18

2. M ankiw (2005): Chapter 20

S u g g es ted R ead in g s

3. D 'Souza, E. (2008): "Macroeconomics", Pearson Education: N ew Delhi.

4. B lanchard , O. (2006) : "M acroeconom ics" (IVlh Edition), Pearson Ed'u

Delhi.

5. N . G regory M ankiw (2005)'VUl Edition, Macroeconomics, W orth Pubiisi'

6. D ornbusch Rudiger, Fischer Stanley and Startz Richard (2004)- IXth E>.

M cG raw -H ill

7. G overn m en t of India (GOI) (Latest Y e a r) : "Economic Survey", Minis;.. ■

: N ew Delhi

P a p e r - 3 0 1

M a c r o e c o n o m i c s - 1

P a p e r - 3 0 2

I n d u s t r i a l E c o n o m i c s

Sem es te r - III

U N IT 1 : STRU CTU RE - C O N D U C T - PERFORM ANCE PA R A D IG M

The Simple SCP m odel/fram ew ork w ith and w ithout feedbacks, its critique and m odified

fram ew ork w ith feedback.

U N IT 2 : M ARK ET C O N C E N T R A T IO N

Definition of the m arket, natu re an d m easurem ent of m arket concentration, indices of

concentration, inequality m easures. Theories of m easurem ent: determ inistic and

stochastic approach.

U N IT 3 : BARRIERS T O ENTRY

Concepts to Barriers to Entry by Bains, Stigler. Sources to Barriers to Entry, Limit Pricing

Theory, Strategic Entry deterrence, Contestable markets.

U N IT 4 : VERTICAL IN T E G R A T IO N CONGLO M ERATE D IV E R SIFIC A T IO N &

MERGERS

Conglomerate Diversification : Concepts, measures, determ inants and consequences of

diversification, Mergers, FDI

Vertical Integration : N a tu re and extent of vertical integration, theories of vertical

integration, m onopolistic motives for integration

U N IT 5 : TEC H N ICA L PRO G RESS & PERFORMENCE

Economics of Research, M arket s tructure and incentive to invent, C oncepts by Arrow,

Demsetz, Schum peter.

Concepts of Profit m a rg in s , Productivity and Technical efficiency

M ain R ead ing

1. Industrial Economics by Roger Clarke

S u p p lem en ta ry R eadings

1 S tephen Martin, Industrial Economics.

2 Fergusen and Fergusen. Industrial Economics.

3 Giles Burgess, Industria l Organisation.

4 S tephen Martin, A dvanced Industrial Economics.

P a p e r - 3 0 3

B u s i n e s s F i n a n c e

S em es te r - III

O bjective: The course aim s to p rovide basic concepts and know ledge w ith regard to a

business finance an d its decisions.

U N IT I: IN T R O D U C T IO N

N ature, scope an d objectives of financial m anagem ent. Time value of m oney and

m athem atics of Finance. C oncept of Risk and return.

U N IT 2: IN V E ST M E N T D E C ISIO N

Capital b u d g e tin g process: Estimation of Relevant cash flows, N on-d iscoun ted and

discounted cash flow techniques - Pay back, ARR, NPV, IRR and Profitability index.

U N IT 3: C O ST OF CAPITAL A N D FIN A N C IN G D ECISIO N

Cost of C apital and Financing Decision: Estimation of com ponents of cost of capital;

Equity capital an d external & internal retained earnings, D ebt and Preference Capital,

W eighted average cost of capital (WACC) and marginal cost of capital.

Capital s truc tu re theories - NI, NOI, traditional approach and M M approach . Factors

dete rm in ing capital structure.

U N IT 4: D IV ID E N D D E C ISIO N

Relationship be tw een d iv idend and corporate valuation - W alter model, G ordon Model

an d MM hypothesis. D eterm inants of d iv idend policy.

U N IT 5 :

(i) Sources o f Finance

Short term sources: advances from commercial banks, public deposits,

advances from custom ers and trade creditors. Long term sources: shares, deben tu res and

long term loans etc.

(ii) Lease F inancing

concept of leasing. Types of lease agreements. Difference betw een hire purchase and

lease financing. A dvan tages and disadvantages of leasing. Lease evaluation

(iii) M erg ers a n d A c q u is it io n s

Reasons for m ergers and acquisitions. Types of mergers. Financial considerations in

m ergers and acquisitions. Financial evaluation of m ergers and acquisitions. Benefits and

costs of m ergers.

S uggested R ead ings:

J.C. Van H orne, Financial M anagem ent and Policy, Prentice Hall of India.

H. Levy and M. Sarnat, Principles of Financial M anagem ent, Engelw ood Cliffs,Prentice

Hall.

M. Y Khan, an d P. K Jain., Financial M anagement, Text and Problems, Tata

M cG raw Hill N ew Delhi.

R. S. Kulshrestha, Financial M anagement, Sahitya Bhawan, Publishers and

D istributors.

R. P. Rastogi, Fundam en ta ls of Financial M anagem ent, Galgotia Publications,

N sw Delhi.

I. M. Pandey, Financial M anagem ent, Vikas Publishing House (P) Ltd.

V.K. Bhalla, Financial M anagem ent & Policy, Anrnol Publications, Delhi

Prasanna C handra , Financial M anagem ent-Theory and Practice, Tata M cG raw

Hill.

V. Sharan, Fundam en ta ls of Financial M anagem ent, Pearson Education, India.

J. K Singh, Financial M anagem ent - Text and Problems, D hanpat Rai and

C om pany, Delhi.

Dr. S.N. M aheshw ari, Financial M anagem ent, principles and practice, Sultan C hand and

Sons, N ew Delhi.

R.P. Rustagi, Fianacial M anagem ent, theory, concepts and problem s, G algotia pub lish ing

com pany, N ew Delhi.

P a p e r - 3 0 4

B a s i c E c o n o m e t r i c s

S em e s te r - III

UNIT 1: SAMPLING A N D HYPOTHESIS TESTING

Statistics and param eters. Properties for a statistic. Central Limit Theorem . D istribu tion

of the sam ple m ean, difference in m eans an d the proportion. Point and in terval estim ates

for the mean, difference in means, and proportion . H ypotheses testing an d ty p es of

errors. Significance levels and p values. Small sam ple testing: Chi square, t a n d F

distributions an d their properties. A pplications of chi square and t d is tr ibu tions to

interval estim ates and tests.

UNIT 2 : CLASSICAL TWO VARIABLE LINEAR REGRESSION MODEL

Types of D ata : Tim e Series, Cross Section and Panel Data. C oncept of PRF a n d SRF.

Estim ation of the SRF using OLS. Analysis of variance and R squared. U n d ers tan d in g

the residuals/error term . A ssum ptions of the m odel. Expectation an d s tan d a rd erro rs of

the regression coefficients and the erro r term. G auss M arkov Theorem . C onfidence

intervals and tests on popu lation regression coefficients, variance of p o p u la tion

d isturbance term , and forecasts. Testing the significance of the m odel as a whole. Testing

the norm ality assum ption .

U N IT 3 : MULTIPLE R EG R ESSIO N M O D B l

The three variab le case. Derivation of the coefficients. Correlation. A dditional

assum ptions. A djusted R square. Confidence intervals and testing of the regression

coefficients. F an d t tests for s tructural stability, contribution and justification of an

explanatory variable.

UNIT 4 : OTHER FUNCTIONAL FORMS

Regressions in deviation form and th ro u g h the origin. The log-log, log-lin, lin-log,

reciprocal, log-reciprocal m odels w ith application.

UNIT 5 : DUM M Y VARIABLES

Intercept, Slope D um m y variables. Interaction betw een qualitative variables. Interaction

b etw een quantitative and qualitative variables. D um m ies for testing for the presences of

Seasonal Trends.

M ain Readings

1. C hristopher D ougherty , Introductory Econometrics 3rd Edition Oxford U niversity

Press (2007)

2. G u ja ra ti , D am o d ar : Basic Econometrics , 3rd edition M c.Graw Hill, N ew Delhi (1995)

3. R am anathan, R am u : Introductory Econometrics W ith Applications. T hom son South

W estern (2002)

Supplementary Readings

1. Pindyck ,Robert S. and Daniel L. Rubinfeld. "Econometric Models and Economic

Forecasts.”. M cGrawHill, 3ra Edition, Singapore (1997).

2. W onnacott, R.J. and W annacott, T.H: Econometrics , John Wiley. France

34

P a p e r - 401

M a c r o e c o n o m i c s - II

S e m e s t e r - I V

U N IT 1. THEORIES OF C O N SU M PT IO N A N D IN V ESTM ENT

a) C onsum ption Functions

b) Fisher's Inter-tem poral Choice Model

c) Life-Cycle and Perm anent Income H ypotheses

d) Business Fixed, Residential and Inventory Investm ents

M ankiw (2005): C hapters 16 and 17**

U N IT 2. O PEN E C O N O M Y I - THE CON CEPTS

(a) Balance of Paym ents

(b) T rade Balance and Exchange Rates

D 'Souza (2008): C hapers 2 and 5

U N IT 3. O PEN ECO N O M Y II -T H E M UNDELL-FLEM ING M ODEL

N. Gregory M ankiw (2005): C hapter 12

U N IT 4 . E C O N O M IC G R O W T H

(a) Sources of G row th, Potential and Feasible O utpu t

(b) The D eterm inants of Long-Run G row th and Soiow - A Geometric Presentation

(c) The Golden Rule, Convergence and Poverty Traps

(d) E ndogenous G row th

D 'Souza (2008): C hapter 16

U M T 5. M O N ETA RY A N D FISCAL POLICY

a) Inflation Targeting

b) The Design of M onetary Policy

c) The G overnm ent Budget Constraint

d) Issues in Fiscal Policy

Blanchard (2006): Chapters 25 and 26

S uggested R ead ings

1. D 'Souza, E. (2008): "M acroeconomics", Pearson Education: N ew Delhi.

2. Blanchard, O. (2006) : "Macroeconomics" (IV,h Edition), Pearson Education : N ew

Delhi.

3. N. G regory M ankiw (20G5)-Vlh Edition, Macroeconomics, W orth Publishers

P a p e r - 4 0 2

O r g a n i s a t i o n a l B e h a v i o u r

O bjective:

To p rov ide s tuden ts w ith an understand ing of the principles of h u m an b eh av io u r in

organisations w ith relevance to the Ind ian business context.

UNIT 1. INTRODUCTION

C oncept of OB; M anagem en t roles, skills and activities; Disciplines that con tribu te to OB;

O pportun ities for OB (Globalization, Indian workforce diversity, custom er service,

innovation and change, n e tw orked organizations, work-life balance, peop le skills,

positive w ork env ironm ent, ethics)

UNIT 2. INDIVIDU AL BEHAVIOUR

(i) Learning, attitude and job satisfaction

Concept of learning, conditioning, shaping and reinforcement.

Concept of a ttitude, com ponents , behaviour and attitude.

Job satisfaction: causation; im pact of satisfied em ployees on workplace.

C om parison of job satisfaction am ongst Indian em ployees w ith o ther cultures.

(ii) M otivation

Concept; Theories (H ierarchy of needs, X and Y, Two factor, M cClelland, Goal setting,

Self-efficacy, Equity theory); Job characteristics model; Redesigning job an d w ork

arrangem ents; E m ployee involvem ent; Flexible benefits, Intrinsic rew ards

(iii) Personality and Values

C oncept of personality ; MBTI; Big Five model.

Relevance of values; Ind ian values;

Linking personality a n d values to the w orkplace (person-job fit, person-orgardzation fit)

(iv) Perception, D ecis ion M aking and Emotions

Perception and judgem ents; Factors; Linking perception to ind iv idual decision m aking;

Decision m aking in organizations, Ethics in decision making.

Emotional labour; Em otional Intelligence;

UNIT 3. GROUP BEHAVIOUR

(i) G ro u p s a n d W ork Team s: Concept; Five stage m odel of g ro u p developm ent; G roup

th ink and shift; Ind ian perspective on group norms.

G roups an d teams; T ypes of teams; Creating team players from individuals; Team

bu ild ing and team based w ork (TBW).

(ii) Leadership

Concept; Trait theories; Behavioral theories (Ohio and M ichigan studies); Contingency

theories ( Fiedler, H ersey and Blanchard, Path-Goal); A uthentic leadership; M entoring,

self-leadership, on line leadership; Inspirational A pproaches (transformational,

charismatic); C om parison of Ind ian leadership styles w ith other countries.

Exercises, gam es an d role plays m ay be conducted to develop team and leadership skills.

4. S e m e s t e r - I V

36

U N IT 4. O R G A N ISA T IO N A L CULTURE A N D STRUCTURE

Concept of culture; Im pact (functions and liability); Creating and susta in ing culture;

Employees and culture; C reating positive and ethical cultures.

Concept of structure; Prevalent organizational designs; N ew design options.

U N IT 5. O R G A N ISA T IO N A L CH AN G E, CONFLICT A N D POW ER

Forces of change; P lanned change; Resistance; A pproaches (Lew in 's model,

O rganisational developm ent); Learning organization; O rganisational change in Ind ian

businesses.

C oncept of conflict; Traditional view and interactionists v iew of conflict; Conflict

process; Functional/Dysfunctional. Introduction to p o w er and politics

M ain R e a d in g :

1. O rganisational Behaviour by Stephen P. Robbins, T im othy A. Judge an d Seema Sanghi,

I3 ,h Ed, Pearson Education ltd.

S u p p lem en ta ry R e a d in g :

1. L u thans Fred., "O rganizational Behaviour", M cG raw Hill.

2. Hellriegel, Slocum an d W oodman, O rganisational Behavior, South-W estern,

T hom son Learning, 9th edition, 2001.

3. Behavior In Organizations, Jerald Greenberg, 8ih ed, Pearson Education.

4. A rnold , John, Robertson, Ivan t. and Cooper, Cary, 1., "W ork psychology:

u n d ers tan d in g hu m an behav iour in the w orkplace", M acm illan India Ltd., Delhi.

5. D w ivedi, R. S., "H u m an relations and organizational behaviour: a global

perspective", M acmillan India Ltd., Delhi.

P a p e r - 4 0 3

Q u a n t i t a t i v e T e c h n i q u e s f o r M a n a g e m e n t

U N IT 1 : IN TRO DUCTIO N TO OPERATIONS RESEARCH, LINEAR PRO G RAM M ING

(i) Introduction

M eaning, Scope, Techniques, Relevance an d Limitations of operational research, M eaning

of a m odel, s teps in bu ild ing of a model.

(ii) Linear Programming

Linear In troduction , term inology and applications, M athem atical fo rm ula tion of a linear

p ro g ram m in g problem , G raphical solution, Algebraic m ethod (Simplex m ethod) -

M axim isation an d m inim iza tion cases ( single and m ixed constraints), D uality : Concept

an d In terpreta tion

UNIT 2 -.TRANSPORTATION & ASSIGNM ENT

(i) Transportation

In troduction, M atrix Form ulation and balance check of a transporta tion problem , Initial

basic feasible solution ( only LCM & VAM m ethods), Test of op tim ality an d optimal

solution, S tepping Stone an d MODI m ethods)

N ote : Exclude special cases i.e. m ultiple op tim um solution, m axim ization, degeneracy

and prohib ited routes.

(ii) A ssignm ent

Introduction, Balanced an d unbalanced assignm ent problem , Solution u s ing H ungarian

assignm ent m ethod.

UNIT 3 : D Y N AM IC PROGRAM MINGM eaning, applications. C onstruction and problem solving in stages (including

determ inistic a n d bu t excluding probabilistic program m ing)

U NIT 4 : THEORY OF GAMES, DECISION THEORY A N D DECISION ANALYSIS

(i) Theory o f Games

In troduction an d basic term inology, Pure strategy gam es ( including identification of

sadd le p o in t an d value of the game), Principle of dom inance. M ixed stra tegy gam es (only

arithm etic m eth o d for 2 x 2 games)

(ii) D ecis ion theory aitd D ecision Analysis

Steps in Decision theory, Concepts of Expected M onetary Value, Expected Value of

Perfect Inform ation an d Expected O pportun ity loss, In troduction to risk and uncertainty,

Decisions u n d e r U ncertain ty using Laplace, rnaximin, Minimax, maximax, minimin,

h urw icz an d Savage M ethods

UNIT 5 : CPM/PERT ANALYSIS, SIMULATION, SIMPLE INVENTORY MODELS

(i) CPM / PERT A nalysis

M eaning, objectives an d applications, Fundam ental concepts - event, activity, path,

d u m m y activity, fu lkerson 's rule, N etw ork construction, Time estim ates in netw ork

analysis -ea r l ie s t finish, latest finish, critical path, Float (Independen t , free and total

float), P rog ram m ing Evaluation review technique (PERT) - th ree time estimates,

S tandard dev ia tion an d probability of project com pletion w ithin a scheduled rime, Direct

S e m e s t e r - I V

and indirect cost, Time-cost tradeoff - Crashing of activities ( m ethod , n e tw o rk

construction, identification of crash time, new critical pa th and activities to be crashed).

(ii) S im ulation

In troduction and applications, Problem Solving using M onte Carlo m ethod and R andom

num bers.

(iii) S im ple Inventory M odels

Finite an d Infinite Replenishment, Simple EOQ.

Main Readings

1. K apoor V.K. Operations Research : Sultan C hand & Sons, Latest Edition

2. V ohra N.D. Quantitative techniques in management 3rd Ed , Me. G raw H i l l Co.

Suggested R ea d in g s:

1. S w aru p Kanti, G upta, P.K. & M anm ohan, Operations Research 12th Edition Sultan

C hand an d Sons.

2. T a h a , H .A Operations Research : A n Introduction , 7th Edition. Pearson E ducation

UNIT 1 : FINANCIAL MARKFTS IN IN D IA

Role a n d Im portance of Financial M arkets, Financial M arkets vs. C apital M arkets vs.

Stock M arkets, L inkages Between Econom y and Financial M arkets, In tegration of Indian

Financial M arkets w ith W orld M arkets, Players in Financial M arkets, Role of R egulator

(RBI a n d SEBI)

U NIT 2 : PRIMARY MARKET FOR CORPORATE SECURITIES IN IN D IA

(i) Issue of Corporate Securities

Public Issue th ro u g h Prospectus, G reen shoe option, Offer for sale, P rivate Placement

R ights Issue, OnLine IPO : D utch and French Auction , Book B uild ing of Shares,

D isinvestm ent of PSU, Em ployees Stock Options, Preferential Issue of Shares, V enture

Capital, Private Equity, Perform ance of P rim ary M arket in India, Institu tional Interest

in Public Issues, m easuring success of an IPO.

(ii) Corporate Listings

Listing a n d Delisting of C orporate Stocks

UNIT 3 : SECONDARY MARKET IN IN D IA

(i) Introduction to Stock Markets

Regional and M odern Stock Exchanges, International Stock Exchanges, D em utualization

of exchanges, C om petition am ongst m ajor exchanges in India, Raising of funds in

In ternational M arkets : ADRs and GDRs, FCCB and Euro Issues

Ind ian Stock Indices an d their construction, free float vs. full float m ethodology,

C lassification of Securities to be included in the Index, im pact of corporate actions

(rights, bonus and stock split) on index

Bulls an d Bears in Stock Markets, Factors influencing the m ovem en t of stock markets,

indicators of m atu rity of stock m arkets. Major Instrum ents trad ed in stock markets:

Equity Shares, D ebentures, M yths attached to Investing in Stock M arkets.

(ii) Trading o f securities on a stock exchange

Selection of broker, capital an d m argin requirem ents of a broker, M TM an d VaR M argins

,k inds of brokers, opening of an account to trade in securities, DEM AT System, placing

an o rd e r for purchase/sale of shares, m arg in trading and m argin a d ju s tm e n t , contract

note, an d settlem ent of co n trac ts , rolling and traditional (weekly) settlem ent systems.

UNIT 4 : MONEY MARKETS & DEBT MARKET IN INDIA

(i) M oney Market

M eaning , role and partic ipants in m oney markets, Segments of m oney markets. Call

M oney Markets, Repos and reverse Repo concepts, Treasury Bill M arkets, M arket for

Com mercial Paper, Com mercial Bills and Certificate of Deposit. Role of STCI and DFHI

in m oney m arkets

(ii) D ebt Market

In troduction an d m eaning, M arket for G overnm ent/D ebt Securities in India, W hen issued

m arket, Secondary m arke t for governm ent/deb t beeurities, O versubscrip tion and

devolvem ent of G overnm ent Securities, Fiscal Responsibility Act, Switch deals,

S em es te r - IV

P a p e r - 4 0 4

I n d i a n F i n a n c i a l S y s t e m

40

G overnm ent securities issued by State G overnm ents, M unicipal Bonds, C o rp o ra te Bonds

vs. G overnm ent Bonds

UNIT 5 : BANKING A N D HO USING FINANCE IN INDIA/:\r> 13 rV i ; r v . u l

Functions, Role and M onetary Policy M easures( CRR,SLR, OMO)

(ii) Recent D evelopm ents in Banking Sector in India

Commercial and D evelopm ent Banks: M eaning , their roles (Traditional and N ew

/C hanging roles), C hallenges Ahead, Conversion of Financial Institu tions into banks,

M ergers and A cquisitions in the banking sector in India , Concept of U niversal Banking,

N on Perform ing Assets in the Banking Sector, the Securitization Act, Prim e an d Sub

Prime L ending Rate.

(iii) H ousing Finance

M eaning and rise of housing finance in India, Fixing the am oun t of loan, repricing of a

loan, floating vs. fixed rate, the rest m ethod, problem s on housing finance.

Suggested R ea d in g s:(i) N ational Stock Exchange of India 'Indian Securities Market: A Review' 6<h Edition

NSE, M um bai (2003).

(ii) R u s ta g i , R.P, Financial M anagement: Theory Concepts and Problems : 3rd Edition

Galgotia Publishing Co. (2006)

(iii) S.G. Eakins, S.G. 'Finance: Investments, Institutions and Management'., A dd ison

W esley L ongm an Inc, USA. (1999)

(iv) Shahani, Rakesh 'Financial Markets in India’ Latest Edition, A nam ica Pub Co, N ew

Delhi

P a p e r - 5 0 1

I n d i a n E c o n o m y

S e m e s te r - V

U N IT 1: IN D IA FR O M IN D E PE N D E N C E T O LIBERALIZATION

A n overv iew of the econom ic developm ents during the period 1947-1980; Objectives and

strategies of p lanned econom ic developm ent an d the role of the State; S lo w d o w n in

g row th since m id 1960; C hanges in policy em phasis from grow th to d istribu tion ; Green

revolution.

Readings:

1. A rv ind S ubram anian (2007), G row th Experience, in Kaushik Basu (ed), The O xford

C om pan ion to Economics in India, OUP, Delhi, pp. 231-236. (2008 edition m ay be

also be used).

2. T.N. Srinivasan and S.D. T endulkar (2003), Reintegrating India w ith the W orld

Economy, OUP, Delhi, C hap ter 1, 2 (pp. 11-27)

U N IT 2 : IN D IA SIN C E 1980S (LIBERALIZATION A N D BEYOND): O V ERV IEW

India Circa 1980. Policy C hanges since 1980s. The 1990 Crisis. W hy Liberalization?

Causes and Effects. Regional differences. Industry and Firm size. M anufacturing and

Services. Institutions an d Infrastructure.

R eadings:

1. A rv ina DUDiaAiiicuUciii ouj, i^icila ^ * u.... the ^cop-onnc

Transform ation, O xford University Press (OUP), Delhi, 2008, C hap ter 2.

2. T.N. Srinivasan and S.D. T endulkar (2003), Reintegrating India w ith the W'orld

Economy, OUP, C hap ter 2 (pp. 27-47).

U N IT 3 : M A C R O TR EN D S SINCE 1990

G row th, Savings an d Investm en t, Populat ion, Em ploym ent, Regional differences,

M onetary and Financial trends

R eadings:

1. Rakesh M ohan (2008), G row th Record of the Indian Economy, 1950-2008: A story of

Sustained Savings a n d Investm ent, EPW, M ay 10.

2. K .V.Ram aswam y (2007), Regional D im ensions of G row th and Em ploym ent, EPW,

Dec 8.

3. T im D yson (2008), Ind ia 's D em ographic Transition and its consequences for

D evelopm ent, p ap e r presen ted a t IEG (Third Lecture in the G olden Jubilee Series)

M ar 24.

4. M ihir Rakshit (2009), India am idst the Global Crisis, EPW M arch 28.

5. Note: R eadings 1,2 a n d 3 are also available in U m a Kapila (ed) Ind ia 's Economic

D evelopm ent Since 1947. Academ ic Foundation, Delhi, 4 th ed ition 2009-10

U N IT 4: IN D IA N A G RICU LTU RE SINCE 1990

Post G reen Revolution agriculture; Production and productivity crisis in agriculture;

Regional differences; Food Security, PDS system and M alnutrition.

Readings:

1. Ramesh C hand, S.S. Raju, L.M. Pandey (2007), G row th Crisis in A griculture -

Severity and O ptions at N ational and State Levels, EPW, June 30.

2. Bharat R am asw am i (2007), Public D istribution System in Kaushik Basu (ed), The

Oxford C om panion to Economics in India pp.430-33

3. R. R adhakrishna (2005), Food and N utrition Security of the Poor, EPW, 30 A pril

Note: Readings 1 and 3 are also available in lima Kapila (ed) India's Economic Development Since

1947. Academic Foundation, 4th edition 2009-10.

UNIT 5:

(a) Industry , Foreign Trade A nd Foreign Capital Since 1990.

(b) Role of Services an d Infrastructure in Economic D evelopm ent

Readings:

1. R. N agaraj (2008), India 's Recent Economic G row th: A closer look, EPW, A p r 12.

2. Pulin N ayak (2007), Privatization, in K aushik Basu (ed), The Oxford C o m pan ion to

Economics in India, pp. 426-30.

3. N agesh K um ar (2005), Liberalization, FDI flows and D evelopm ent, EPW, Apr. 2

4. J. A lhuw alia (2006), T rade Liberalization an d Industrial Performance: A

D isaggregated View of Indian M anufacturing in the 1990s, in Suresh T en d u lk a r et.

al. (eds.) India: Industrialization in a Reform ing Economy, A cadem ic Foundation,

Delhi.

5. Jim G ordon and Poonam G upta (2003), U nderstand ing India's Services Revolution

p ap e r presented in IMF-NCAER Conference 2003, A Tale of Tw o Giants: Ind ia 's and

C hina 's Experience w ith Reform, (excluding Section V) N ovem ber 14-16, 2003, New

Delhi (w w w .im f.org /ex ternal/np /apd/sem inars/2003/new delh i/gordon .pdf) C an be

d o w n lo ad ed from the website.

6. Sebastian M orris (2007), Infrastructure, in K aushik Basu (ed), The O xford

C om pan ion to Economics in India, pp.291-96.

Som e background reading for the teachers:

Topic 1

1. A rv ind S ubrahm anian (2008), India's Turn: U nderstand ing the Econom ic

Transform ation, Oxford University Press (OUP), Delhi, 2008, C hap ter 1.

2. S. C hakravarty (1987), D evelopm ent Planning: The Indian Experience, C larendon

x Press, C hap ter 1,2,3.

Topic 2

1. T.N. Srinivasan and S.D. Tendulkar (2003), Reintegrating India w ith the World

Economy, OUP, C hapter 5

2. Jean D reze and A m artya Sen (2002), India: D evelopm ent and Participation, OUP,

Chs. 2, 9.

Topic 4

Ashok Gulati and Shenggen Fan, The Dragon and the Elephant: A gricultural and Rural

Reforms in India and China, C hapter 1 (Introduction an d Overview).

http://www.imf.org/external/np/apd/seminars/2003/newdelhi/gordon.pdf

P a p e r - 5 0 2

C o m p u t a t i o n a l T e c h n i q u e s FOR BUSINESS E C O N O M IC S

U N IT 1 : USF O F OEFJCF SOETWARE

W ord processing, Spreadsheet basics, D atabase basics, Presentations.

U N IT 2: USE OF SPREAD SH EETS FOR DA TA ANALYSIS

Im plem en ta tion of all statistical w ork in Paper 102 th rough spreadshee t

Use of m acros an d au tom ation of repeated data w ork

U N IT 3 : E C O N O M E T R IC PRO BLEM SO LVIN G

Use of SPSS an d SAS softw are packages to im plem ent the econom etric techn iques

tau g h t in Paper 304

U N IT 4: LINEAR P R O G R A M M IN G A N D M A THEM A TICAL PROBLEM S O L V IN G

Use of ap p ro p ria te m athem atical software package for linear p ro g ram m in g problem s

an d for

U N IT 5 : D A TA SETS

In troduction to real econom ic an d business data sets. W orking on real p rob lem s and

p repara tion of a project report.

Notes:

1. The p ap e r is of 100 m arks like o ther papers. The evaluation shall be based on the

fo l lo w in g :

• 25 m arks for teacher's assessm ent based on attendance and lab record.

• 25 m arks for practical exam ination; joint evaluation

• 50 m arks for v iva voce; external evaluation

2. For each com puta tion based project, one teacher from the college shaii act as guide.

The project is to be dec ided a t the beginning of the semester.

S u g g ested References:

1. M anuals for the re levant softw ares

2. D ata Sets: C ensus of India, National Sam ple Survey, Index of a slock exchange,

W ages and Production, CMIE.

S em es te r - V

44

O p tio n a l G roup F: Paper - 511

In v e s t m e n t M a n a g e m e n t

O bjective:

The course aim s to acquain t the s tuden ts w ith the essential of Investm ent M anagem en t and

to equ ip them w ith essential tools for the same.

U N IT 1 : B O N D M A N A G EM EN T

Bond Basics, Concept of a yield , Valuation of Bonds ,Different w ays of C o m p u tin g Yield

(Current yield, ho ld ing yield and Yield to m aturity (YTM)), yield curve, Basic Theorem s

of Bond V aluation and T erm Structure. Risk In Bonds, Interest rate an d defau lt risk , Risk

Structure of Interest Rates, Bond Duration, Modified D uration .. Bond Convexity,

Im m unization and Rebalancing of Bond Portfolios

U N IT 2 : M ARKET EFFICIENCY

(i) M arket Efficiency

M eaning and forms of m arket efficiency , The Random W alk Model, Security Analysis

(Overview of F undam ental and Technical Analysis)

(ii) D iv id en d D iscoun t M odel

One, tw o and Multi Stage G row th Models, Price Earnings Approach 10 stock valuation.

U N IT 3 : PO RTFO LIO THEO RY

Concepts of Risk and Return, M ean Variance Framework, M arkow itz M odel and M odern

Portfolio Theory, Portfolio Diversification Concepts, Single Index M o d e l , Beta of a stock,

Systematic and U nsystem atic R isk , SML, C M L , m arket m odel and CAPM.

U N IT 4 : M UTUAL FU N D S

Introduction, Calculation of NAV of a Fund, Classification of M utual Fund Schemes

(O pen end & closed end , income & g row th schemes, sectorial schemes, index Schemes,

F u n d of Funds Schemes) Tracking Error, Tactical Asset A llocation an d Portfolio

Rebalancing

M easuring Perform ance of m u tual fund schemes (S&P Risk A djusted Ratio, Sharpe,

Treynor, and Jenson, Inform ation and M2 Ratios), core-satellite portfolio framework,

Diversification vs. asset allocation, benchm arking m utual fund perform ance, Portfolio

M anagem ent Service(PMS)

U N IT 5 : DERIVATIVES:

M eaning and Types ,Stock Futures, C om m odity Futures, Interest rate futures, H edging

th rough futures and payoffs, O ptions , In the money, At the M oney and O ut of Money

Options, O ption Payoffs ,Forw ards and its difference w ith futures, Simple Futures and

O ptions Com bination Strategies (Neutralising the risk. Spread ,S traddle ,Collars, Covered

call, and P u t Call Parity), factors affecting option prem ium , op tion pricing model ( only

tw o stage binom ial m o d e l ), Sw aps (Interest rate and currency swaps).

S em es te r - V

M ain Readings

1. Brealey, R an d S.C.Myers, Principles of Corporate Finance; 6lh E dition Me. G raw Hill,

N ew York (2000).

2. C handra , Prasanna Financial Management, Latest Edition Me. G raw Hill, N ew Delhi.

3. Khan, M.Y 'Indian Financial System' Latest Ed.. Tata Me G raw Hill, N ew Delhi.

4. N ational Stock Exchange of India ‘Indian Securities Market: A Review' 6lh Edition NSE,

M um bai (2003).

5. Rustagi R.P, Investment M anagement: Theory and Practice:: 2nd Edition Sultan C hand

an d Co. N ew Delhi(2007).

6. S.G. Eakins, S.G. ‘Finance: Investments, Institutions and Management'., A dd ison Wesley

L ongm an Inc, USA. (i999)

7. Sha’nani, Rakesh 'Financial Markets in India' 2nd Edition, A nam ica Pub Co, (2008)

Supplem entary R e a d in g s:

1. S chaum 's O utline Series, Theory and Problems of Investments : Latest Edition , Me. G raw

Hill

2. S ingh P re e ti , Fundamentals of Investment M anagement, H im alaya Publishing

H ouse, (2006)

46

O p tional G ro u p M: Paper -5 2 1

C o n s u m e r B e h a v i o u r

Objective

To prov ide s tuden ts w ith a understand ing of the psyche of a typical co n su m er an d its

application to the Ind ian context.

UNIT 1. IN T R O D U C T IO N

Scope of consum er behaviour; M arketing concept and consum er behaviour; C ustom er

value, satisfaction and retention; M arketing ethics and social responsibility; M odel of

consum er decision making; C onsum er research parad igm s and consum er research

process.

UNIT 2. C O N SU M E R AS AN IN D IV ID U A L

(i) Personality a n d C onsum er B ehaviour

Theories of personality; Personality and consum er diversity; B rand personality ; Self and

self image; Virtual personality.

(ii) C o n su m er Perception

Elements and dynam ics of perception (Sensation, Absolute and Differential threshold,

Subliminal perception, Perceptual selection, organization and in terpretation); C onsum er

imagery.

(iii) C o n su m er Learn ing

Elements of C onsum er learning, Behavioural learning theories (Classical, Instrum ental,

Observational); Cognitive learning theory (Inform ation processing an d Involvem ent

theory); Recognition and recall measures.

(iv) C o n su m er A tti tu d e

N ature; S tructura l models; A ttitude formation; A ttitude change strategies; Cognitive

d issonance theory; A ttribution theory.

UNIT 3. CO N SU M ER S IN SOCIAL SETTIN G S

(i) Reference G ro u p s an d Fam ily Influences

Pow er of reference groups; Types (Friendship, Shopping, Work, Virtual and Consum er

action groups); Reference group appeals and celebrities; Socialisation of family; Functions

of family; Fam ily decision making.

(ii) Social Class

Class, S tatus and categories; Affluent consumers; M iddle Class; W orking class and non

affluent consum ers; C onsum er behaviour applications of social class.

U N IT 4. CULTURE A N D C O N SU M ER BEHAVIOUR •

N eeds and culture; Culture is invisible; Learning an d culture ( Symbolism, Enculturation

and A cculturation, Rituals); M easurem ent of culture (content analysis, fieldwork, value

m easu rem en t su rvey instrum ents); Subcultures (nationality, religious, geographic, racial,

age and gender subcultures)

Sem ester - V

UNIT 5. CO NSUM ER DECISION M AKING PROCESS

(i) O pin ion Leadership and D iffusion o f Innovations

O pin ion leadership: Process an d m otivation behind it; Profile of o p in io n leaders;

Frequency, overlap and situational environm ent; Application to m arketing strategy.

D iffusion of innovations: Process; A doption process; Profile of consum er innovators.

(ii) Consum er D ecision making

Levels; M odels; Gifting behaviour; C onsum ing and possessing; R ela tionship m arketing.

N ote : Teaching m ust incorporate d iscussions of concepts with cases and advertisem ents

in the Indian context.

Main R e a d in g :

C onsum er B ehaviour by Leon G. Schiffman & Leslie Lazar K anuk, 8th ed., Pearson

publications

Supplem entary R ea d in g s:

1. C o n su m er Behaviour by H awkins, Best and Coney, 9th ed, Tata M cgraw H ill.

2. C o n su m er Behaviour in Ind ian Perspective by Suja Nair, H im alya publishers.

3. C onceptual Issues in C onsum er Behaviour by S Ramesh Kum ar, Pearson Publication.

4. C ustom er Behaviour: A M anagerial Perspective by Sheth and Mittal, T hom son

Publication

48

O ptional G roup Q: P a p e r - 531

A d v a n c e d E c o n o m e t r i c s ,

Objective

To build upon basics of econometrics and equip the s tuden ts w ith advanced

m ethodologies in econom etrics to m ake them efficient analysts and researchers.

U N IT 1 : RELAXING T H E A SSU M PT IO N S OF THE CLASSICAL LIN EA R M O D E L

M ulticollinearity: The problem . Detection. Solution.

Heteroscedasticity: The problem . Detection. Solution. GLS.

Autocorrelation: Problem . Tests for detection. Solutions.

Specification Errors: O m ission of a variable, Inclusion of irre levant variable, tests for

detecting errors, errors in explanatory and dependen t variable

U N IT 2 : S IM U LTA N EO U S EQ U A TIO N MODELS:

T w o Stage Least Squares A nd The Indirect least squares techniques. Applications.

UNIT 3 : TIM E SERIES M ODELS:

Stationary an d N on Stationary time series , Unit root tests, the R andom Walk, M oving

A verage an d W hite Noise, Static and D ynam ic models, adap tive expectations and

partia l ad justm ent models.

U N IT 4 : BINARY D A TA .AND LIMITED D EPEND EN T VARIABLE M O D ELS

Q ualitative Response and Limited D ependen t Variable M odels (LPM, Logit an d Probit

M odels) M axim um Likelihood Estimator.

U N IT 5 : PANEL D A T A

Fixed an d R andom Effects

M ain R e fe re n c e s :

1. Gujarati , D am o d a r : Basic Econometrics , 3rd edition M cG raw Hill, N ew Delhi

(1995)

2. C hristopher D ougherty , Introductory Econometrics 3rd Edition Oxford University

Press (2007)

3. P indyck ,Robert S. and Daniel L. Rubinfeld. "Econometric Models and Economic

Forecasts.". M cGrawHill, 3-d Edition, Singapore (1997).

S em es te r - V

S em es te r V

O p tio n a l G ro u p E: Paper- 5 4 1

I n t e r n a t i o n a l E c o n o m i c s

U N IT 1 : IN T E R N A T IO N A L TR A D E THEORY

Basis and th e G ains from Trade

Absolute A d v an tag e theory, Law of com parative advantage, O p p o rtu n ity C ost Theory,

P roduction Possibility C urve w ith opportun ity costs and relative com m o d ity price, The

basis for an d gains from trade u n d e r constant costs.

P roduction Possibility C urve -w ith increasing costs, C om m unity indifference curve,

equilib rium in isolation, G ains from T rade w ith increasing costs, G ains from exchange an d

specialization.

The Equilib rium Relative C om m odity Prices w ith - Partial Equilibrium Analysis, Offer

curves, The Equilib rium Relative C om m odity Prices w ith - G eneral E quilib rium Analysis,

Relationship b e tw een General an d Partial Equilibrium Analyses, T erm s of trade.

R e a d in g :

Salvatore-International Economics-8th Edition, C hap ter 4, C hap ter 3 w ith o u t A ppend ix

H ow ever, A ppendix : A4.1, A4.2, A4.3, A4.4 on Derivation of T rade Indifference C urves can

be trea ted as O ptional reading.

U N IT 2 : FA C TO R EN D O W M E N T A N D H ECKSCHER O H L IN THEO RY

A ssum ptions o f the theory, In terpreta tion or H eckscher O hiin Theorem , G eneral equilib rium

fram ew ork of Heckscher- O hlin Theorem, D iagram m atic presentation of the theory, Factor

price equalization an d income distribution, Leontief paradox and Factor Reversal

R ead ing

Salvatore-Ir.tem ationai Economics-8tn Edition [Chapter 5 an d its A pp en d ix o ther th an A5.4]

N ew Trade T h eo r ie s , Technology, skill, p roduc t differentiation

[Sections 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4A, 6.4B and 6.5, 6.5A, 6.5B of C hapter 6] Salvatore-InternationalEconomics-8th Edition __ ______________ ___

U N IT 3 : IN T E R N A T IO N A L TRADE POLICY

A: Tariff

Definition, Types, Partial equilibrium analysis of a tariff, Effects of a tariff on consum er and

producer surp lus, Cost an d benefit analysis of tariff, Rate of effective protection.

R eading

[Sections 8.1, 8.2, an d 8.3A of chapter 8]

Salvatore-International Economics-8th Edition

B: Non-Tariff Barriers and the N ew Protectionism

Im port Q uotas, com parison w ith tariff, V oluntary Export Restraints, Technical

A dm inistrative an d o ther regulations, International cartels, D um ping , Export Subsidies

R ead ing

[Sections 9.1, 9.2, 9.2A, 9.2B, 9.3, 9.3A-9.3E of C hap ter 9]

Salvatore-International Economics-8th Edition

50

U N IT 4. NEW TO PIC S IN IN T ERN A TIO N A L TRADE

A .International Capital Flows, Capital flows u n d e r laissez faire, W elfare analysis

B.Extension of K ecksher - Ohlin Trade theory- M any good and m any factors extension

C.Imm iserising G row th an d Transfer Problem

D. Foreign Investm ent w ith special reference to Developing countries

R ead ing

1 .Lectures on International Trade-Jagdish Bhagwati, T.N. Srinivasan: MIT Press

2. W .M .C orden Trade Policy and Welfare. C larendon Oxford

U N IT 5. W O RLD TRA D E O R G A N IZ A T IO N

GATT and Trade Liberalization, GATT to WTO, Objectives, functions, basic principles and

areas of operation of WTO, Structure and w orking of the WTO, an overv iew of M inisterial

conferences: issues, decisions and controversies, Doha D evelopm ent A genda, W TO and

agriculture, Im plications of W TO activities for developing countries, WTO and India.

R ead ing

1. C ontem porary Issues in Globalization-An Introduction to Theory and Policy in

India-(OUP) Soum yen S ik d a r , Chapters- 6 and 7

2. w w w .w to .o rg

http://www.wto.org

UNIT 1: INTRODUCTION.

Project Identification, generation of ideas, Project screening an d m easu rem en t of

perform ance, Project Cycle, Feasibility studies an d form ulation of a project, Project p lanning,

M arket and Technical Analysis.

UNIT 2 : FINANCIAL ANALYSIS USING DISCOUNTING A N D N O N D ISC O U N T IN G

TECHNIQUES

Accounting rate of re tu rn , Pay Back, NPV, IRR,BCR/PI: Merits an d D em erits of each, NPV

vs. IRR : Pitfalls, N o IRR, M ultiple IRR, Increm ental IRR, the Choice betw een N PV an d IRR,

Specific project decisions like Equivalent A nnua l Value, U nequal Lives of Projects,

A djustm ent for Inflation, Projects w ith Resource C onstraint etc

UNIT 3 : INCORPORATING RISK IN PROJECTS

Conventional Tools to hand le risk: Risk A djusted Discount Rate, C erta in ty Equivalent,

Sensitivity Analysis.

Statistical Tools of incorporating risk: Probability, S tandard D eviation and coefficient of

variation, Probability D istribution (including dependent, in d ep en d en t an d decision tree

techniques ) Project term ination a nu . A . Da Ru Gi - ^ n r i l y s i s .

UNIT 4 : INTERMEDIARIES, ARRANGEMENT OF FUN D S A N D PROJECT

MANAGEM ENT

M eaning an d role of m erchant/investm ent banks as interm ediaries in project m anagem ent,

functions perfo rm ed b y investm ent banks. Perform ance of these ban k s over the years. India

G row th Story an d Rise of M erchant Banking in India, Im pact of the sub p rim e crisis on

m erchant and investm ent banks.

UNIT 5:

Exercise on Writing o f the Project Report

\Suggested Readings

1. Brealey, R and S.C.Myers, Principles o f Corporate Finance; 6lil Edition Me. Graw Hill,

N ew York (2000).

2. C handra , P rasanna Projects P lanning A nalysis Selection , Im plem enta tion and

Review Latest Edition Me. G raw Hill, N ew Delhi.

3. G opalkrishnan P & V.E. R am am oorthy : Text book of Project Management Me. M illan ,

N ew Delhi. (1996)

4. Patel, B.M. Project management Vikas Pub. H ouse (2000)

5. Rustagi , R.P, Financial Management : Theory Concepts and Problems : 3rd Edition

Galgotia Publishing Co. (2006)

6. Shim.J & J.Giegel, Financial Management, ,Schaum Outline Series, 2nd Edition Tata Me

G raw Hill Co.(2004)

S e m e s t e r - V

O ptiona l G ro u p P: P ap er 5 5 1

P r o j e c t M a n a g e m e n t

S e m e s t e r - V I

P a p e r - 6 0 1

E n v i r o n m e n t a l E c o n o m i c s

Environm ental Economics is no longer a peripheral area of the discipline of Economics, but

is at the centre in discussions of developm ent economics today. Hence s tu d en ts need to

understand the basic term inology of Environm ental Economics, E nvironm ental valuation,

Accounting Fram ew ork, Regulations, and international environm ental issues. This syllabus

not only provides the basic foundations of Environm ental Economics b u t also equ ips the

students regarding current developm ents in the subject.

UNIT I: EN V IRO N M EN TA L PROBLEM S A N D ISSUES:

1. A n Introduction to Environm ental Economics

2. Environm ent and Elements of ecology

3. M arket Failure Analysis: Public Goods and Externalities

Chapters 2 and 4 -Thom as Callan

C hapter 1-R.N.Bhattacharya

UN IT II: SO LU TIO N S TO EN V IRO N M EN TA L PROBLEMS:

1. Conventional Policy- Environm ental S tandards, Efficiency of Environm ental

standards, C om m and and Control A pproach

2. M arket Based Policy- Pollution Charges and Environm ental Subsidies, Deposit

refund System, Pollution Perm it T rading Systems,

3. Environm ental Regulations in India

Chapters 5 an d 6 Thom as Callan

C hapter 3 (pages 100-119) - R.N. Bhattacharya

U N IT III: ANALYTICAL TO O L S FO R EN V IRO N M EN TA L PLA N N IN G

1. Environm ental Risk Analysis- Concept of Risk, Risk Assessm ent and Risk

M anagem ent.

2. Assessing Benefits for Environm ental Decision M aking- Environm ental Benefits-

Conceptual Issues, A pproaches to M easuring Environm ental Benefits- Physical

Linkage A pproach, Behavioral Linkage Approach- Direct and Indirect

Estimation M ethods.

3. Benefit - Cost Analysis

C hapters 7, 8 and 9 T hom as Callan

U N IT IV: SUSTAINABLE D EV ELO PM EN T A N D EN V IRO N M EN TA L A C C O U N T IN G

1. Sustainable D evelopm ent- Concept and M easurem ent

2. Environm ental Accounting- Concept, C om m on Property Resources and LDCs

C hapter 5-Tom Tietenberg

C hapter 5-R. N. Bhattacharya (Pages 179 to 188 and 198 to 215)

53

U N IT V: G LO BA L E N V IR O N M E N T A L M A N A G E M E N T

1. In ternational T rade and International A greem ents

2. A Case of Global A ir Q uality- Policies for O zone D epletion an d Global W arm ing

C hap te rs 21 an d 14- Thom as Callan

References:

T hom as Callan: E nvironm enta l Economics, 2007 T hom son Learning Inc. Ind ian Edition.

R .N.Bhattacharya: E nvironm enta l Economics, A n Ind ian Perspective (Edited), 2001 Oxford

U niversity Press.

T om Tietenberg: E nv ironm enta l and N atu ral Resource Economics, 2004 (Sixth Edition),

Pearson Education.

54

P a p e r — 6 0 2

B u s i n e s s S t r a t e g y a n d Et h i c s

O bjective:

The course aim s to acquain t the students w ith the nature, scope and form ula tion of Business

Strategies and their supporting organizational policies.

U N IT I OVERVIEW OF STRATEGIC M A N A G EM EN T

(i) Nature and Value of Strategic Management

N atu re and scope, C oncept of Strategy, Levels of Strategy, C orpora te Strategy, S trategy

Planning, Value of Strategic m anagem ent. Benefits of strategic m anagem ent. Risks of

Strategic m anagem ent.

(ii) Strategic M anagem ent Process

Strategic M anagem ent as a Process. C om ponents of Strategic M anagem ent M odel.

C oncept of Vision and Mission. Form ulating a C om pany Mission. Social Responsibility:

G uidelines for a Socially Responsible Firm.

U N IT 2 : EN V IRO N M EN TA L ANALYSIS

(i) External Environment

N eed and Characteristics of environm ental factors. Analysis of rem ote environm ent.

A nalysis of specific environm ent: Michael E. Porter 's 5 Forces M odel.

(ii) Internal Environment

Value of Systematic Internal Assessment. D eveloping the C om pany profile. Profile of

C o m pany 's S trengths an d Weaknesses.

(ii) M ultinational Environment

W hy C om panies Internationalize. Com plexity of the M ultinational Environm ent.

M ultinational Strategic: planning. M NC M ission Statement.

U N IT 3: STRATEGY FORM U LA TION , ANALYSIS A N D CH O ICE

(i) Formulating Long-Term Objectives and Grand Strategies

Long Term Objectives. Types of Strategies. Selection of Long term Objectives and

Strategy. Sequence of Objectives and strategy selection. ^

(ii) Strategic A nalysis and Choice

Strategic A nalysis at the Corporate Level. SWOT Analysis. G rand strategy Selection

Matrix. Contingency A pproach to Strategic Choice.

U N IT 4: STRATEGY IM PLEM EN TA TIO N A N D CO N TRO L

(i) Operationalizing the Strategy

A nnual Objectives. Qualities and Benefits of A nnual Objectives. D eveloping Functional

Strategies. Business policies and their Purpose.

(ii) Institutionalising the Strategy

Structural C onsiderations. Linking structure to strategy. Organizational leadership. Role

of the CEO. O rganizational culture. M anaging the Strategy-Culture relationship.

(iii) Strategic Control and Evaluation

Establishing Strategic Controls. Operational control systems.

S em es te r - VI

U N IT 5 : BUSINESS ETHICS:

Values-Concept, types and formation of values, ethics, values and behaviour, Ethics,

d eve lopm en t of ethics, ethical decision m aking and decision m aking process, re levance of

ethics a n d values in business. M anagem ent of Ethics.

M ain R e a d in g s :

1. J.A. Pearce & R.B Robinson; Strategic m anagem ent, Prentice H all Publications.

2. Ghosh, P. K.; Strategic Planning and Management, Sultan C hand & Sons, N ew Delhi

S u p p le m en ta ry R e a d in g s :

1. T hom pson , A rth u r A. and A. j. Strickland; Strategic Management, M cG raw Hill, N ew

York.

2. Ghosh, P. K.; Strategic Planning and Management, Sultan C hand & Sons, N ew Delhi

3. Prased, L .M ; Business Policy; Strategic m anagem ent., Sultan C hand & Sons, N ew

Delhi.

4. Jauch an d Glueck; Business Policy and Strategic Management, M cGraw-Hill.

56

O p tional G roup F: P a p e r - 611

In t e r n a t i o n a l Fi n a n c e

UNIT 1 : INTRO DUCTIO N TO THE FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKET A N D

FUNDAMENTAL ISSUES

W hat is Foreign Exchange (Forex) Market, Com m unication in Forex M arkets, C urrency

Quotes, types of quotations in forex markets, calculation of forw ard rates using spot

rates, calculation of d iscoun t/p rem ium on spot rate using spot and fo rw ard rates, Spot

Rates w ith and w ith o u t transaction costs, synthetic quotes. Arbitrage: one point, two

point and three poin t arbitrage. Interest rate Parity (explanation of b o rro w in g and

lending criteria, d iagram m atic presentation) PPP Principle (both absolute and relative

versions), In ternational Fischer Effect.

UNIT 2 : DERIVATIVES IN THE INTERNATIONAL FINANCE MARKET

Forw ard vs. Fu tu re contracts, Pay Off profile on currency fo rw ard and fu tu re contracts.

M argin A djustm en t for futures. Currency Options: European and A m erican Options,

Intrinsic Value, p rem ium , at the money, in the m oney and out of m oney options, Pay Off

profile on option contracts.

UNIT 3 : INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL SYSTEM

International Financial System : Past, Present and Future : Gold S tandard , Price

A djustm ent u n d e r the Gold Standard Gold Exchange S tandard , Price A djustm ent under

the Gold Exchange S tandard , European M onetary System, Price A djustm ent u n d e r the

EMS, B rettenw ood System, Creation of SDRs, Sm ithsonian A greem ent and Plaza

Agreem ent.

UNIT 4: FACTORS AFFECTING EXCHANGE RATES A N D EXPOSURES

Currency D em and an d Supply Curves, the '}' Curve Effect. Factors Affecting Exchange

Rate: Inflation (H om e C ountry & H om e C ountry and foreign country), Interest Rates,

Income Levels, G overnm ent Control, Expectations etc. Foreign Exchange Exposure:

Transaction, Economic and Translation Exposure, m anag ing these exposures and

statistical m easurem ent. H edging strategies adop ted in international trade.

UNIT 5 : PAYMENT SYSTEMS

Paym ent Term s a n d Financing International Trade , International Flow of Funds and

Portfolio Investm ent in India, FDI vs. FIIs, Investm ent S trategies of FII in India, FII and

volatility, Im pact of FII investm ent on stock markets and concern of G o v e rn m e n t .

Main R e a d in g s:

1. Apte, P. G., M ultinational Financial M anagem ent, Tata-M cGraw Hill, N ew Delhi, 1998.

2. Levi, M aurice; In ternational Finance M cGraw Hill Inc., N ew York, 1996

3. M adura, Je f f ; : International Financial M anagem ent

4. Seth, A.K., International Financial M anagem ent, Galgotia Publishing Com pany, New

Delhi, 2000.

5. Shapiro, Allen C., Multinational Financial M anagement, Prentice Hall India Pvt Ltd.,

N ew Delhi, 1995.

S em es te r - VI

O p tio n a l G ro u p M: Paper - 621

A d v e r t i s i n g & B r a n d M a n a g e m e n t ,

S e m es te r - VI

UNIT-1 F O U N D A T IO N S O F A D V ERTISIN G

Types of advertising , T he C oncept of IMC, Roles and functions of advertising, The key

players - advertiser, m edia , advertis ing agency, O rganization of agency - how to select

an advertis ing agency, A dvertis ing appropriations - factors influencing advertis ing

budget, m ethods of setting advertising budget.

UNIT-2 PL A N N IN G A N D STRATEGY

Planning fram ew ork, M arketing strategy and situation analysis, The m arke ting plan, The

advertis ing plan, Setting goals and objectives - functions and objectives,The DA G M A R

approach ,Segm enting a n d positioning.

UNIT-3 EFFECTIVE A D V E R T ISIN G M ESSAGE

The creative and m essage strategy - the concept of USP/UVP, them es and appeals,

C opyw riting - the language of advertising, copyw riting for print, radio, T.V. and web,

Illustrating - v isual com m unication, Designing and p roduction - (including the visual

layout), Evaluation of effectiveness, Pre- Testing, Post-Testing

UNIT-4 EFFECTIVE A D V E R T ISIN G M EDIA

Types of m edia, N ew er m ed ia options, M edia objectives, M edia budget, M edia strategies

- M edia mix, M edia buying , M edia evaluation.

UNIT-5 BRA N D M A N A G E M E N T

Brand m anagem en t - w h a i 13 a b rand, b rand developm ent, extension, rejuvenation, re

launch - p ro d u c t vs. b rands, goods and services, retailer and distributors, people and

organization, b ran d challenges and opportunities, the b ran d equity concept, identity and

im age

Brand leveraging and b ra n d perform ance - establishing a b rand equ ity m anagem ent

system, m easuring sources of b rand equity and consum er m indset, co-branding, celcbrity

endorsem ent

Brand positioning and b ran d build ing - b rand know ledge, b rand portfolios and m arket

segm entation - steps o f b ran d building, identifying an d establishing b rand positioning,

defining and establishing b ran d values.

Suggested R e a d in g s :

1. Advertising: Principles and Practice by William Wells, Sandra M oriarty, and John

Burnett, 7th edition, prenctice-Hall of India, 2007

2. A dvertising M anagem en t by Jaishri Jethw aney an d Shruti Jain, Oxford University

press, 2006

3. A dvertising by Akar, M ayor and Batra

58

O p tin a l G roup Q: Paper 621

A D V A N C ED M ATHEM A TICAL TECHNIQUES,

S em es te r - VI

UNIT 1 : LINEAR ALGEBRA

Characteristic equations an d roots. Diagonalisation. Q uadratic forms.

UNIT 2 : F U N C T IO N S OF SEVERAL VARIABLES

Partial derivatives. Generalised Young's theorem and Euler's theorem . C onvex sets.

Convexity, Concavity, quasi convexity, quasi concavity and their inter-relations.

M axim um a n d m in im um values. C onstrained optim isation w ith one and m ore equality

constraints. Envelope results. O ptim isation w ith inequality constraints. N o n linear

p rogram m ing. Applications.

UNIT 3 : LINEAR P R O G R A M M IN G

Duality, C om plem entary Slackness and application of Kuhn Tucker conditions.

UNIT 4: DIFFERENCE EQ U A T IO N S

First o rder w ith constant and variable coefficients. Second order equations. Economic

applications.

UNIT 5 : DIFFERENTIAL EQ U A T IO N S

Definite and indefin ite integr?ls an d their economic applications.

Suggested R ead in g

1. Sydsaeter, Knut & H am m ond , Peter J.: M athematics for Economic A nalysis

[Pearsons Education]

2. Yamane, Taro: M athem atics for Economists - An elem entary survey [PHI]

O p tin a l G ro u p E: Paper 6 4 1

Ec o n o m i c G r o w t h a n d P o l i c y

S em es te r VI

U N IT 1 : E C O N O M IC DEVEI n p M E N T - D E FIN IT IO N S A N D CO N CEPTS

• A Very Short In troduction (AVSI), Characteristics of D evelopm ent p p 1-29

• D evelopm en t Economics, Chapter-2

• D istinction be tw een G row th and D evelopm ent

• Econom ic D evelopm ent, Michael. P. Todaro, C hap ter 1 and 2

U N IT 2 : G R O W T H M O D ELS

• DE, C hapter-3 Economic G row th, Section-3.3.1(pp 51-56) and

Section 3.5 (pp 74-84).

• DE, C hap te r 10, p p 353-371 (LEWIS MODEL)

• In troduc tion to Economic G row th pp20-53 (THE BASIC SOLOW MODEL)

• E ndogenous G ro w th M o d e l : Jones

Note- Solow Model shall be covered before Convergence (Section 3.5)

UNIT 3: H U M A N CAPITAL-EDUCATION, INTELLECTUAL CAPITAL &

POVERTY.

• M eier p p 4 5 0 - 4 5 9 (Education investm ent in H u m an Capital)

• M ichael P Todaro , Economic Development, C hap ter 9 (r iu in a n C a p i ta l : ZUuCaiiur.

& H ea lth n Economic D evelopm ent)

• C oncep t of relative and absolute poverty , Sen

• Incom e inequality and its m easurem ent, w orld experience in th is context

UNIT 4 : TECHNOLOGICAL PROGRESS

• In troduc tion to Economic G row th C hapter 4 & C hapter 5 (up till Page 1 1 0 )

• D evelopm en t Economics, C hap ter 4 , Section 4 . 4 .4 & 4 .4 .5

• G ro w th and Developm ent. A.P T h i r w a l ! C h a n t e r 1 4 fun Hll p a^ e 4 9 9 ) alsox ’ i v r r o /

inc luded are p p 5 2 5 - 5 3 6

» Meier, Section VIII, p p 3 8 1 - 4 0 5 (International T rade and International Inequality)

U N IT 5 : STA TE A N D T H E M ARKET

• F H a y a m i , C hapter-8 (up till page 212) and aiso included are p p 233-239

Experience of South East Asia A nd Latin America C ountries in this context could

be useful.

References:

• Debraj Ray, Development Economics, DE, Princeton University ^ress 1998

• C harles Jones, Introduction to Economic Growth, Second Edition

• Partha D asgupta , Economics: A Very Short Introduction, Oxford U niversity Press,

2007

• Meier, Leading Issues in Economic Development, 5 ,h edition

• Michael.P.Todaro, Economic D eve lo p m en ts edition.

• F H a y a m i , Economics ( a s p e r t h e p r e v i o u s s y l l a b u s )

• A .PT hirw all, Growth and Development ,7'h edition

60

S em es te r - VI

O ptina l G r P: P aper 651

En t r e p r e n e u r s h i p a n d F a m i l y B u s i n e s s

OBJECTIVES : Provide understanding of entrepreneurship, i.e., initiating an innovative new

business venture and developing it into a self-sustaining and profitable enterprise. Family

businesses im pact all our lives. The course shall explore the business, personal, and

in terpersonal issues associated w ith a fam ily-ow ned and m anaged com pany. The objective

of this stream is to p rovide com prehensive know ledge and develop com petencies to start

o w n in d ependen t business.

U N IT 1 : THE ENTREPRENEURIAL DEV ELO PM EN T PERSPECTIVE

Concepts of E n trepreneursh ip D evelopm ent, Evolution of the concept of Entrepreneur,

E ntrepreneur Vs. Intrapreneur, Entrepreneur Vs. E ntrepreneurship , E n trep ren eu r Vs.

M anager, A ttributes and Characteristics of a successful Entrepreneur.

U N IT 2 : CREATIVITY ISSUES AN D IDEA PRO CESSIN G

M anaging Creativity Issues to be addressed in w orking the definition of creativity -

D efinition -Attributes of a creative person - Creative Thinking an d M otivation -M anaging

C reativity - Organisational Actions that enhance and h inder Creativity -Organisational

priorities and Creativity -M anagerial responsibilities in a creative organisation. Search

for business idea, sources of ideas, idea processing , Input requirem ents: sources and

criteria of financing, fixed and w orking capital assessment, technical and m arketing

assistance

U N IT 3 : ENTREPRENEUR A N D E C O N O M IC DEVELOPM ENT

Role of Entrepreneur in Ind ian economy and developing econom ies w ith reference to

Self-Em ploym ent Developm ent, Entrepreneurial Culture, The E ntrepreneuria l m ind-set

in individuals, The Entrepreneurial m ind-set in organizations and corporate

en trepreneursh ip , Entrepreneurial Strategy: generating and exploiting new entries.

W hy do E n trep reneurs fail - T he FOUR E n trep reneu ria l P itfa lls (Peter D rucker)

U N IT 4 : M A N A G E M E N T OF FAMILY BUSINESS

O verview of Family Business Domain, Family capital, Recognize conflict, Decision

m aking and conflict m anagem ent, Governance of the family enterprise, E nduring family

enterprise.

U N IT 5 : SU CCESSIO N PLA N N IN G

Innovation & Change , N agging issues, Succession, D eveloping leadership abilities,

Estate p lanning, Expectations of successors, Self-developm ent and career plan,

P reparing the next generation

61

Suggested R ead ings :

1. V asanth Desai : D ynam ics of Entrepreneurial D evelopm ent & M anagem en t

2. G up ta & Srin ivasan : Entrepreneurial D evelopm ent

3. John Kao : C reativ ity & E n tre p re n e u rsh ip_

4. Carlock, R. S. & W ard, J. Strategic P lanning for Family Business: Parallel P lanning to U nite the

Family and the Business.

5. Poza, E. J. Family Business. 2007.

62

UNIVERSITY OF DELHI

MASTER OF COMMERCE (M.COM)

( To be effective from Academic Year 2014-15 and onwards)

Syllabus

M.Com. Re v i se d Syllabus as approved by Acade mic Council on 21st June, 2014 and

Executive Council on 19th July, 2014

CONTENTS

Pages I Preamble 1 II M.Com. Programme Structure 2-4 III Scheme of Examination, Pass Percentage, Promotion Criteria etc. 5-7 IV Course Contents and Reading Lists of M.Com. Programme 8-72

Department of Commerce, University of Delhi

1

I. PREAMBLE

The Department of Commerce was established in 1967 with the renowned flagship post-graduate programme- Masters in Commerce (M.Com). Apart from the other post-graduate and research courses M.Com is the most exalted two year full time post-graduate programme in commerce. The course provides an extreme and rigorous base for teaching, research and allied business administration. The programme is well received in the industry and for years had been serving the needs of managerial cadre in Indian Inc. The course serves the needs of academics and prepares students for research and teaching. The Alumni of this course are well placed in business, academics and administration in the country as well as abroad. In the year 2009, this course was changed from annualized to semester mode dividing the whole course into 4 semesters. During the semesterization of the course, the then existing curriculum (annual mode) was adopted for semester mode, without any change. Moreover, in the light of augmentation in the field of commerce and business, the syllabi have not been updated since long. Thus, in view of widening the scope and depth of the course and inclusion of research paradigms of commerce stream, the overall structure of the course has been changed. Further, the overall structure has been improved to provide an insight of research in commerce and interdisciplinary areas and to facilitate those students aspiring for direct Ph.D. admissions. In order to facilitate the course revision process, the Departmental Council constituted a Committee which proposed various changes in the structure and content of the course. The committee met about half a dozen times in order to improve and create the new structure and discussed numerous propositions threadbare. Further, a special meeting was arranged with the alumni of the department, who are well placed in industrial sector to seek their valuable inputs for the curriculum. The structure was then presented in and approved by the Department council along with the names of various area convenors as per their specialization for the formulation of course contents. The proposed structure was then vetted by an external member expert committee and their suggestions were incorporated before finalizing the proposed structure. The contents were decided by the working groups formed for various specialized areas such as Finance, Accounting, Marketing, Human Resource and OB, Laws, Economics, etc. The working groups in consultation with the respective convenors proposed the course contents which was presented in the Committee of Courses (Hons., P.G. and Research) meeting held on 5th May, 2014. The Committee of Courses discussed the structure and contents, threadbare and suggested a few changes. After incorporating the changes suggested by Committee of Courses, the draft was then placed for discussion in the Faculty of Commerce and Business. The changes recommended by Faculty of Commerce and Business were adopted and the syllabus was approved in the meeting held on 10th May, 2014. Further, in the Standing Committee meeting on academic affairs held on 20th June, 2014, Academic Council meeting held on 21st June, 2014 and Executive Council meeting held on 19th July, 2014 the syllabus was approved for its course contents. As per the new structure, there are 5 papers in each semester. In the second year, there are 2 compulsory papers in each semester. As per the area of interest, the students are required to choose two optional groups- one major group and one minor group, in the beginning of 2nd year. The major group shall consist of 4 papers and minor group of 2 papers to be studied in 3rd and 4th semester. The structure for the groups has been designed with intent to provide advanced level specialization in the respective field.


2

II: M.Com. Programme Structure

AFFILIATION The programme shall be governed by the Department of Commerce, Faculty of Commerce and Business, University of Delhi, Delhi – 110007

Programme Structure The M.Com. Programme is divided into two parts as under. Each Part will consist of two semesters.

Semester Semester Part - I First Year Semester I Semester II Part – II Second Year Semester III Semester IV

* There will be 4 lecture hours of teaching per week for each paper * Duration of examination of each paper shall be 3 hours. * Each paper will be of 100 marks out of which 70 marks shall be allocated for semester examination and 30 marks for internal assessment.

The schedule of papers prescribed for various semesters shall be as follows: Part I: Semester I

PAPERS Marks Total Marks

Duration (Hrs.)

Credit (Hrs.) Paper

No. Title Written Internal

Assessment 4101 Business Statistics 70 30 100 3 4 4102 Managerial Economics 70 30 100 3 4 4103 Managerial Accounting 70 30 100 3 4 4104 Financial Planning 70 30 100 3 4 4105 Organisational Theory

and Behaviour 70 30 100 3 4

TOTAL 500 20

Part I: Semester II PAPERS Marks Total

Marks Duration

(Hrs.) Credit (Hrs.) Paper


Assessment 4201 Quantitative Techniques

for Business 70 30 100 3 4

4202 Financial management and Policy

70 30 100 3 4

4203 Marketing Management 70 30 100 3 4 4204 Legal Aspects of

Business 70 30 100 3 4

4205 International Business 70 30 100 3 4 TOTAL 500 20


3

Part II: Semester III PAPERS Marks Total

Marks Duration

(Hrs.) Credit (Hrs.) Paper


Assessment 4301 Global Strategic

Management 70 30 100 3 4

4302 Entrepreneurship 70 30 100 3 4 ----- Major Group (Paper 1) 70 30 100 3 4 ----- Major Group (Paper 2) 70 30 100 3 4 ------ Minor Group (Paper 1) 70 30 100 3 4

TOTAL 500 20 Part II: Semester IV

PAPERS Marks Total Marks

Duration (Hrs.)

Credit (Hrs.) Paper


Assessment 4401 Corporate Governance,

Ethics and Social Responsibility of Business

70 30 100 3 4

4402 Business Research 70 30 100 3 4 ----- Major Group (Paper 3) 70 30 100 3 4 ----- Major Group (Paper 4) 70 30 100 3 4 ------ Minor Group (Paper 2) 70 30 100 3 4

TOTAL 500 20 GRAND TOTAL (4 Semesters) 2000 80

Elective Groups Two groups (one Major and one Minor) from the available electives are to be selected at the commencement of M. Com. Part II - Semester III. Notes: 1. The elective groups in the Semester IV will remain the same as the ones selected in Semester III. 2. Once a group has been selected, no change in selected groups will be allowed later. 3. While the first two papers of selected major group and first paper of selected minor group will be taught

in Semester III, the next two papers of selected major group and second paper of selected minor group will be taught in Semester IV.

List of Elective Groups The Department will announce in the beginning of the respective semester, the list of elective groups which will be offered during the semester depending upon the availability faculty members and the demand of electives. Group A: Finance


4

Paper MJ301: Financial Institutions and Markets Paper MJ302: Security Analysis and Portfolio Management Paper MJ403: International Financial System Paper MJ404: International Financial Management Group B: Marketing Paper MJ311: International Marketing Paper MJ312: Advertising and Sales Management Paper MJ413: Consumer Behaviour Paper MJ414: Supply Chain Management and Logistics Group C: Human Resource Management Paper MJ321: Human Resource Development Paper MJ322: Management of Industrial Relations Paper MJ423: Strategic Human Resource Management Paper MJ424: Compensation Management and Employee Welfare Laws Minor Groups Group A: Taxation Paper MN331: Principles and Practice of Taxation and Indian Tax System Paper MN432: Corporate Tax Structure and Planning Group B: Law Paper MN341: Corporate Law Paper MN442: Industrial Law Group C: Accounting Paper MN351: Strategic Cost Management Paper MN452: Accounting Theory and Financial Reporting Group D: International Business Paper MN361: India’s Foreign Trade and Investment Paper MN462: Management of International Business Operation Teaching The faculty of the Department is primarily responsible for organizing lecture work for M.Com. The instructions related to tutorials are provided by the respective registering units under the overall guidance of the Department. Faculty from some other Departments and constituent colleges are also associated with lecture and tutorial work in the Department.


5

III. Scheme of Examinations

1. English shall be the medium of instruction and examination.

2. Examinations shall be conducted at the end of each Semester as per the Academic Calendar notified by the University of Delhi

3. The system of evaluation shall be as follows: 3.1 Each paper will carry 100 marks, of which 30 marks shall be reserved for internal assessment

based on a combination of tutorials, classroom participation, project work, seminar, term papers, tests, and attendance. The weightage given to each of these components in a combination shall be decided and announced at the beginning of the semester by the Department in consultation with the teachers. The system so decided will be communicated by the Department to respective colleges.

3.2 The remaining 70 marks in each paper shall be awarded on the basis of a written examination at the end of each semester. The duration of written exanimation for each paper shall be three hours.

4. Examinations for courses shall be conducted only in the respective odd and even Semesters as per the Scheme of Examinations. Regular as well as ex-students shall be permitted to appear/reappear/improve in courses of Odd Semesters only at the end of Odd Semester and courses of Even Semesters only at the end of Even Semesters.

Pass Percentage & Promotion Criteria a. The minimum marks required to pass any paper in a semester shall be 40% in each paper and

40% in aggregate of a semester. However, a candidate who has secured the minimum marks to pass in each paper but has not secured the minimum marks to pass in aggregate may reappear in any of the paper/s of his choice in the concerned semester in order to be able to secure the minimum marks prescribed to pass the semester in aggregate. No student would be allowed to avail of more than 3 chances to pass any paper inclusive of first attempt.

b. Semester to Semester Promotion: Students shall be required to fulfil the Part to Part promotion criteria. Within the same Part, students shall be allowed to be promoted from a semester to the next semester, provided s/he has passed at least half of the courses of the current semester. Part I to Part II Promotion: Admission to Part- II of the Programme shall be open to only those students who have successfully passed at least 75% papers offered for the Pat-I courses comprising of I and II Semester taken together. However, he/she will have to clear the remaining papers while studying in the 2nd year of the programme.


6

c. Students who do not fulfil the promotion criteria (c) above shall be declared failed in the Part concerned. However, they shall have the option to retain the marks in the papers in which they have secured Pass marks as per Clause (a) above.

d. A student who has to reappear in a paper prescribed for Semester I/III may do so only in the odd Semester examinations to be held in November/December. A student who has to reappear in a paper prescribed for Semester II/IV may do so only in the even Semester examinations to be held in April/May.

Division Criteria Successful candidates will be classified on the basis of the combined results of Part-I and Part-II examinations as follows: Candidates securing 60% and above: I Division Candidates securing 50% or more but less than 60%: II Division Candidates securing 40% or more but less than 50%: III Division

Span Period

No student shall be admitted as a candidate for the examination for any of the Parts/Semesters after the lapse of four years from the date of admission to the Part-I/Semester-I of the M. Com. Programme.

Attendance Requirement Attendance in tutorials, seminars etc. arranged by the Department/ College from time to time, is mandatory according to the Internal Assessment requirement as per University rules.

Guidelines for Award of Internal Assessment Marks for the M.Com course (Semester)

As per the decision of Department Council meeting held on 27th July, 2009, the following are the guidelines for the award of Internal Assessment marks to the students admitted to M.Com Semester-based Course Scheme:-

For each paper, there are 30 marks allocated for internal assessment and 70 marks for the Annual Examination. Out of 30 marks allocated for internal assessment for each paper:

- 20 marks are to be assigned for class test - 5 marks are to be assigned for assignment - 5 marks are to be assigned for attendance

A class test of 20 marks in each paper will be conducted by the teachers teaching the paper at

the Department of Commerce. The date and time of the class test will be notified to the students by the respective teachers-in-charge of (M.Com) course at the Department of


7

Commerce.

Five marks are to be awarded for assignment based work by the college/institution where the students are enrolled. The marks to be awarded on the basis of student’s performance in any one or combination of assignments/activities such as presentation, participation in seminar/workshop, case study discussion, and submission of written assignments as part of their continuous evaluation. The composition of assignments/activities for each paper will be decided by the concerned college/ institution in advance and will be notified to the students.

Five marks are to be awarded for attendance in the assignment/activities mentioned above by

the college/institution where students are enrolled. The marks shall be awarded on the basis of existing norms for award of marks for attendance as per the Internal Assessment Scheme of University. The marks for attendance shall be as follows:

i) More than 67% but less than 70% 1 Marks

ii) 70% or more but less than 75% 2 Marks

iii) 75% or more but less than 80% 3 Marks

iv) 80% or more but less than 85% 4 Marks

v) 85% and above 5 Marks


8

IV: COURSE CONTENTS AND READING LISTS OF M.COM. PROGRAMME

Master of Commerce

Semester I

Course 4101: BUSINESS STATISTICS

Marks: 100 (Theory = 70, Internal Assessment = 30)

Objective: The objective of this paper is to equip students with some of the important statistical techniques for managerial decision making and to provide ground for learning advanced analytical tools used in research. Contents: Unit I: Theory of Probability and Probability Distributions: Approaches to calculation of probability. Marginal, joint and conditional probabilities. Probability rules. Bayes’ theorem. Expected value and standard deviation of a probability distribution. Standard probability distributions - Binomial, Poisson, Hypergeometric, and Normal.

Unit II: Statistical Decision Theory: Decision-making process. Payoff and Regret tables. Decision rules under risk and uncertainty. Expected value approach and EVPI. Marginal analysis. Decision-tree analysis.

Unit III: Sampling Distributions and Estimation: Sampling concepts. Sampling methods. Concept of sampling distribution, its expected value and standard error. Sampling distribution of means and Central Limit Theorem. Sampling distribution of proportions. Point and interval estimation; Properties of a good estimator. Confidence intervals for means (a) when σ is known, and (b) when σ is not known. Sample size determination for a mean. Confidence intervals for proportions.

Unit IV: Hypothesis Testing: One and Two-sample Tests: General methodology of hypothesis testing. One and two-tailed tests. Type I and type II Errors. Power of a test. Calculation and use of p-value. One Sample Tests: Hypothesis testing of means when the population standard deviation is known and when it is not known. Hypothesis tests concerning proportions. Two-sample Tests: Tests for difference between means – when population standard deviations are known, and when they are not known. Inferences about difference between two means for matched samples. Testing of difference between two proportions.

Unit V: Analysis of Variance and Non-parametric Tests: F-test of equality of variances. One-factor ANOVA (Completely Randomised Model) and Two-factor ANOVA without replication (Randomised Block Model).. Chi – square test for Independence and for Goodness-of-fit. Sign test, One-sample runs test and Rank correlation test.


9

Unit VI: Correlation and Regression Analysis: Simple, multiple and partial correlation analysis. Rank correlation. Simple and Multiple linear regression analysis (involving up to three variables). Multiple regression analysis using MS Excel. Suggested Readings: 1.Levin, R.I. and D.S. Rubin, Statistics for Management, Prentice-Hall of India. 2.Aczel, Amir D., and Sounderpandian, J., Complete Business Statistics, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing. 3.Anderson, Sweeny and Williams, Statistics for Business and Economics, CENGAGE Learning, New Delhi 4.Kazmeir Leonard J., Business Statistics, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi 5.Vohra, N. D., Business Statistics, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi 6.Freund, J. E. And F. J. Williams, Elementary Business Statistics – The Modern Approach, Prentice Hall of India Private Ltd., New Delhi. Note: Latest edition of the readings may be used.


10

Master of Commerce Semester I

Course 4102: MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS


Objective: The objective of the course is to acquaint students with the basic principles of micro and macro-economics for developing the understanding of theory of the firm, markets and the macro environment, which would help them in managerial decision making processes.

Contents: Part A: Firm and Market Unit I: Demand and The Firm: Consumer Behaviour: Cardinal and ordinal approaches to the derivation of the demand function. Revealed preference approach. Theory of attributes – Demand for consumer durables. Firm Theory: Objectives of the firm; Theory of the growth of the firm: Marris and Penrose.

Unit II: Production and Cost: Production: Law of variable proportion. Returns to scale. Production function: Concept of productivity and technology. Producer’s Equilibrium. Isoquants ridge lines, Isoclines, Isocost lines. Cost function: Classification of costs, Short run cost functions, Relationship between return to scale and return to a factor, Long run cost functions.

Unit III: Market and Pricing: Market forms: AR-MR. Price taker; Monopoly power. Oligopolistic behavior: Cournot and Stackelberg models. Factor Pricing: Demand and supply of factors of production. Euler’s theorem.

Part B: Macroeconomic environment

Unit IV: Product and Asset Market Equilibrium: Product Market: Derivation of IS function. Demand for real cash balances: Tobin’s Portfolio theory. Endogenous money supply and Asset market equilibrium. Derivation of real LM function. Real IS-LM framework.

Unit V: Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply: Modern aggregate demand function. Demand Management. Philips Curve. Aggregate supply and the price level.

Unit VI: Trade Cycles and The Open Economy: Real Business Cycles. Exchange rate, trade balance, net saving, Macroeconomic movements in an open economy.

Suggested Reading: 1. Koutsyiannis, A., Modern Microeconomics, Macmillan Press Ltd. 2. Varian, Micro-Economic Analysis , Norton. 3. Pindyck Robert S., Daniel L. Rubinfeld and Prem L. Mehta, Micro Economics, Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi.


11

4. Branson William H., Macro Economics Theory and Policy, First East – West Press. 5. Dornbusch, R. and S. Fischer Macro Economics , Publisher Tata McGraw Hill. 6. Oliver Blanchard Macro Economics, Pearson Education, LPE. 7. Mankiw, N. Gregory, Macro Economics, Macmillan. Note: Latest edition of the readings may be used.


12


Course 4103: MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING


Objective: The objective of the course is to enable students to acquire knowledge of concepts, methods and techniques of management accounting and to make the students develop competence with their usage in managerial decision making and control. Contents: Unit I: Management Accounting – Nature and Functions; Financial vs. Management Accounting; Cost vs. Management Accounting; Role of Management Accountant. Cost Concepts and Classifications. Unit II: Activity Based Costing (ABC) – Concept and uses; Flow of Costs in ABC; Emerging Costing Approaches; Traditional Costing System vs. ABC. Unit III: Variable and Absorption Costing - Concept, Comparison, Applications of Variable Costing, Preparation of Income Statements. Cost-Volume-Profit (CVP) Analysis - Contribution Margin; Break – Even Analysis; Profit Volume (P/V) Analysis; Multiple-Product Analysis; Optimal use of Limited Resources. Unit IV: Relevant Information and Short-Run Managerial Decisions – Managerial Decision Making; Decision Making Process; Differential Analysis; Types of Managerial Decisions – Make/Buy, Add/Drop, Sell/ Process Further, Operate/Shutdown, Special Order, Product-Mix, Pricing Decisions. Unit V: Budgeting – Nature and functions; Preparation of Different Types of Budgets, Fixed Versus Flexible Budgeting. Standard Costing – Concept, Advantages; Types of Standards; Variance Analysis; Materials, Labour, Overhead; Managerial Uses of Variances. Unit VI: Responsibility Accounting and Divisional Performance Measurement – Advantages and Disadvantages of Divisionalisation; Concept of Responsibility Accounting; Responsibility Centres – Cost Centre, Revenue Centre, Profit Centre, Investment Centre, Responsibility Performance Reporting, Financial Measures of Performance, Non- Financial Performance Measures. Transfer Pricing: Concept; Objectives; requisites; Methods of Transfer Pricing; Transfer Pricing in Multinational Companies.

Performance Measurement: Traditional Performance Measures; Balanced Scorecard- Meaning, Perspectives in Balanced Scorecard, Weighting Performance Measures; Requisites of Balanced Scorecard.


13

Suggested Readings:

1. Atkinson Anthony A., Rajiv D. Banker, Robert Kaplan and S. Mark Young, Management Accounting, Prentice Hall.

2. Horngreen Charles T., and Gary L. Sundem and William O. Stratton, Introduction to Management Accounting, Prentice Hall of India.

3. Drury Colin, Management and Cost Accounting, Thomson Learning. 4. Garison R.H. and E.W. Noreen, Managerial Accounting, McGraw Hill. 5. Ronald W. Hilton, Managerial Accounting, McGraw Hill Education. 6. Jawahar Lal, Advanced Management Accounting, Text, Problems and Cases, S.Chand & Co., New Delhi.

Note: Latest edition of the readings may be used.


14


Course 4104: FINANCIAL PLANNING


Objective: The objective of this course is to acquaint the students with essentials of finance so that they have requisite knowledge, skills and confidence to take charge of their financial future. Further, this paper intends to foster critical thinking skills for personal financial planning and handling financial market constraints.

Contents: Unit I: Introduction to Financial Planning: Globally accepted six steps financial planning process; General principles of cash flow planning, budgeting, legal aspects of financial planning. Overview of risk management: investments, insurance, retirement solutions, tax and estate planning. Unit II: Investment Environment: Types of investment options available to an individual investor - bonds, equity shares, mutual funds, fixed deposits, PPF, financial derivatives, commodity derivatives, gold and bullion, ETFs, REITs, real estate etc. Objectives and rewards of investing. Investment constraints (tax considerations, unique needs etc.). Impact of inflation and indexation. Sources of financial information. Understanding mutual funds (Schemes, NAV calculation, load structure, Systematic Investment Plans, Systematic withdrawal plan etc.)

Unit III: Return-Risk Assessment: Risk aversion and risk profiling. Concept, types and calculation of returns. Assessment of risks in various financial instruments. Power of compounding and Time value of money. Rupee cost averaging. Concept of Portfolio and Diversification. Basics of Portfolio risk and return (two assets case). Tactical and strategic asset allocation.

Unit IV: Personal Financial Planning: Personal financial planning process. Setting personal financial goals. Life cycle approach to financial planning. Components of financial plan; developing financial plan; Using time value concept to estimate savings. Evaluation of tax saving instruments. Objectives of will and creating a valid will; living will and power of attorney. Planning for life insurance and health insurance. Primary clauses in Insurance agreement. Main contents of healthcare insurance.

Unit V: Credit Planning and Retirement Planning: Assessment of credit - types, advantages, disadvantages. Consumer and housing finance planning. EMI calculations - methods and implications. Reverse mortgage. Education loan. Credit card management; credit limits, overdraft protection, grace period. Credit Bureaus - individual credit history and ranking, identity theft and protection against identity thefts. Retirement planning and pension plans. Impact of taxes and inflation.

Unit VI: Investor Protection: Role of SEBI. Investor grievances and redressal system in India.


15

Note: Some case studies on the above topics are required to be discussed.

Suggested Readings:

1. Madura, Jeff, Personal Finance, Pearson. 2. Kapoor, J R, Dlabay & Hughes R, Personal Finance, McGraw Hill. 3. Keown, A J, Personal Finance – Turning money into wealth, Pearson Publication. 4. Bajtelsmit, Vickie L. & Rastelli Linda G., Wiley Pathways Personal Finance, Wiley. 5. Rachel Siegel & Carol Yacht, Personal Finance, Saylor Foundation, Flat World Knowledge.



16


Course 4105: ORGANISATIONAL THEORY AND BEHAVIOUR


Objective: The objective of the course is to enable students to develop a theoretical understanding about organisation structure and its behaviour over time. The course will also make them capable of realizing the competitiveness for firms. Contents: Unit I- Conceptual Foundations of Organisation Theory and Behaviour: Organisational Theories - Classical, Neo-classical and Contemporary; Authority, Power, status, formal and informal structure; Bureaucratic structure; Boundary Less organisation; Flat and Tall structures; Impact of Environment on Organisational Design . Organisational Behaviour (OB)- concept, determinants, models; challenges and opportunities of OB; Transaction cost; Disciplines contributing to the field of OB; Individual Behaviour- Foundations of individual behaviour, values, attitudes, personality, and emotions ; Perceptual process and Learning ; Management assumptions about people-McGregor’s Theory X and Theory Y, Chris Argyris behaviour patterns. Unit II- Group Decision making and Communication: Concept and nature of decision making process; Individual versus group decision making; Nominal group technique and Delphi technique; communication effectiveness in organisations; Feedback, Improving Inter-personal Communication- Transactional Analysis and Johari Window. Unit III- Motivation: Content Theories- Maslow’s Need Hierarchy, Herzberg’s Two factor theory; Contemporary theories of motivation (ERG, Cognitive evaluation, goal setting, equity, Intrinsic Motivation Theory by Ken Thomas), expectancy model; Behaviour modification; Motivation and organisational effectiveness. Unit IV - Leadership, Power and Conflict: Concept and theories of leadership- Behavioural approach, Situational approach, Leadership effectiveness; Leadership across cultures; Power- Bases of Power, power tactics; Conflicts- sources, patterns, levels and strategies. Unit V- Organisational Culture, Organisational Development and Stress Management: Concept and determinants of organisational culture, creating sustaining and changing organisational culture. Managing misbehaviour at work- Aggression and Violence, Sexual abuse, Substance abuse, Cyberslacking. Organisational Development- concept, values, and intervention techniques; Appreciative Inquiry.


17

Individual and organisational stressors; consequences of stress on individual and organisation; management of stress. Note: Some cases of real business world to supplement learning from the course. Suggested Readings: 1. Robbins, Stephen P. and Timothy A. Judge, Organizational Behaviour, Prentice -Hall, New Delhi. 2. Robins S.P., and Mathew, M.,Organisational Theory: Structure, Design and Application, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. 3. Luthans, Fred, Organizational Behaviour, McGraw-Hill, New York. 4. Sekaran, Uma, Organisational Behaviour: Text and Cases, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. Ltd. 5. Aswathappa, K., Organisation Behaviour, Himalaya Publishing House, New Delhi. 6. Singh, K., Organizational Behaviour: Text and Cases, Pearson. 7. Pareek, U. and Khanna, S., Understanding Organizational Behaviour, Oxford University Press. 8. Newstorm, John W., Organizational Behaviour: Human Behaviour at work, Tata McGraw- Hill Pub. Co. Ltd. New Delhi. 9. Hersey, Paul, Dewey E. Johnson, and Kenneth H. Blanchard, Management of Organisational Behaviour, Prentice-Hall of India, New Delhi. 10. Terrance R. Motchell, People in Organization An Introduction to Organisational Behaviour, McGraw-Hill, New York . Note: Latest edition of the readings may be used.


18

Master of Commerce Semester II

Course 4201: QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES FOR BUSINESS DECISIONS


Objective: The objective of this paper is to acquaint the students with quantitative techniques that play an important role in managerial decision-making.

Contents: Unit I – Fundamental of decision making: Types of decisions; Steps in decision making; Quantitative analysis and decision making; Different types of models and their uses; Model building steps.

Unit II - Linear Programming: Basic concepts; mathematical formulation and applications; Solution of LP problem using graphic and simplex method; Use of artificial variables; Sensitivity analysis and interpretation of solution; Duality in linear programming – formulation and solution; Integer linear programming – solution.

Unit III – Transportation, Assignment and Trans-shipment: Formulation; Solving transportation and assignment problems; Dealing with exceptional cases of transportation and assignment problems.

Unit IV - Inventory and Queuing Management: Concepts of inventory management; Inventory models – classical EOQ, EOQ with price breaks, EOQ model for production runs, planned shortage model- deciding optimum safety stock and reorder level, probabilistic model; Techniques of selective control.

Queuing models: Elements of a queuing system; Models with Poisson arrival and Exponential services rates- single server and infinite and finite population; Cost behavior analysis.

Simulation: Monte Carlo Simulation, Application of simulation in inventory management and queuing situation.

Unit V – Project Scheduling: Concepts of PERT & CPM techniques and their applications; Network analysis- scheduling activities, determining critical path, calculation of floats; Time-cost trade-off; Resource allocation and resource levelling.

Unit VI- Markov Chains and Theory of Games: Markov Chains- decision processes; Market share analysis; Account receivable analysis.

Game Theory- Pure strategy games; Mixed strategy games; Value of the game; Rules of Dominance.

Suggested Readings:

1. Levin, R.I., D.S. Rubin and J.P. Stingson, Quantitative Approaches to Management, McGraw - Hill.


19

2. Vohra N.D., Quantitative Techniques in Management, The McGraw Hill companies 3. Bierman H. Jr, C.P. Bonini and W.H. Hausman, Quantitative Analysis for Business Decisions, Homewood, Ill., Irwin. 4. Anderson, Quantitative Methods for Business, CENGAGE.

5. Gupta and Khanna, Quantitative Techniques for Decision Making, Prentice Hall of India. 6. Kapoor V.K., Operations Research: Concepts, Problems and Solutions, Sultan Chand & Sons.

7. Swarup Kanti, P K Gupta, Manmohan, Operations Research, Sultan Chand & Sons.



20


Course 4202: FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT AND POLICY


Objective: To make students understand various issues involved in financial management of a firm and equip them with advanced analytical tools and techniques that are used for making sound financial decisions and policies.

Contents: Unit I- Introduction: Nature, scope and objectives of financial management. Financial decision making and types of financial decisions. Finance as a strategic function. Role of finance manager. Agency problem. Stock price maximization and agency costs. Alternatives to stock price maximization. Stakeholders’ wealth maximization. Risk-return framework for financial decision making. Unit II- Capital Budgeting: Nature, significance and kinds of capital budgeting decisions. Cash flow estimation. Capital budgeting techniques- ARR, Payback period, Discounted payback period, NPV, Equivalent annual NPV, IRR, Incremental IRR and Modified IRR. Capital budgeting decisions under constraints and with multiple objectives using mathematical programming models (Linear programming and Integer Programming). Capital rationing. Capital budgeting decision under inflation. Capital budgeting decision under uncertainty. Techniques for incorporating risk and uncertainty in capital budgeting decisions- RADR, Certainty equivalent method, DCF Break even analysis, Simulation method, Probability distribution method, Decision tree analysis, Sensitivity analysis and Scenario analysis. Real options.

Unit III- Capital Structure: An overview of cost of capital- Specific and WACC. Financial leverage and evaluation of financial plans (EBIT-EPS analysis). Theories of capital structure- NI, NOI, MM Hypothesis without and with corporate taxes, Merton Miller argument with corporate and personal taxes, Trade off theory, Pecking order theory, Signaling theory and effect of information asymmetry on capital structure. Optimal capital structure. Determinants of Capital structure in practice.

Unit IV- Dividend Policy: Forms of dividends. Theories of relevance and irrelevance of dividend in firm valuation (Walter’s model, Gordon’s Model, MM Hypothesis, Bird-in-hand theory and Dividend signaling theory).Relevance of dividend policy under market imperfections. Traditional and Radical position on dividend. Issues in dividend policy. Types of dividend polices in practice (constant rupee dividend policy, constant dividend payout policy, smooth stream dividend policy etc.) Determinants of dividend policy. Lintner’s Model on corporate dividend behavior.

Unit V- Working Capital Planning and Management: Concept and types of working capital. Operating and cash cycle. Estimation of working capital requirement. Working capital financing. Determinants of working capital. Components of working capital management. Cash management- Baumol’s Model and


21

Miller-Orr Model of managing cash. Receivables management- dimensions of credit policy of a firm and evaluation of credit policies; credit analysis. Inventory management.

Unit VI- Corporate Restructuring and Contemporary Issues in Financial Management: Corporate restructuring. Mergers and Acquisitions- types, sources of takeover gains, valuation and financing of M&As. Leveraged buyouts; Spin offs; demerger. Contemporary issues in financial management.

Note: Use relevant case studies to supplement class discussions.

Suggested Readings:

1. Van Horne, James C., Financial Management and Policy, Prentice Hall of India. 2. Pandey, I. M., Financial Management, Vikas Publishing. 3. Ross S.A., R.W. Westerfield and J. Jaffe, Corporate Finance, McGraw Hill. 4. Brealey R.A. and S.C. Myers, Principles of Corporate Finance, McGraw Hill. 5. Damodaran, A.,Corporate Finance: Theory and Practice, John Wiley & Sons. 6. Chandra, P. Financial Management, Tata McGraw Hill. 7. Khan, M.Y & Jain, P.K Financial Management: Text, Problems and Cases, Tata McGraw Hill. 8. Ehrhardt, M. C. & Brigham E. F, Corporate Finance, Indian Edition, Cengage Learning 9. Srivastava, Rajiv and Misra. Anil, Financial Management, Oxford University Press. 10. Arthur J. Kewon, John H. Martin, J. William Petty &David F. Scott, Financial Management: Principles & Application, Pearson. 11. Meyer. et.al, Contemporary Financial Management, Cengage Learning.



22


Course 4203: MARKETING MANAGEMENT


Objective: To familiarize the students with the basic concepts and principles of marketing and to develop their conceptual and analytical skills to be able to manage marketing operations of a business firm. Contents: Unit I-Introduction: Nature and Scope of Marketing; Core Marketing Concepts; Evolution of modern marketing concept; Modern marketing concepts; Marketing Mix; Marketing management process-a strategic perspective; Customer quality, value and satisfaction; Planning and control. Marketing Environment: Significance of scanning marketing environment; Analyzing macro environment of marketing-economic, demographic, socio-cultural, technological, political and legal segments; Impact of micro and macro environment on marketing decisions. Buyer behaviour: Need for studying buyer behaviour; Consumer vs. business buying behaviour; Consumer buying decision process and influences; Industrial buying process. Market Segmentation, Targeting and Positioning: Bases for segmenting a consumer market; Levels of market segmentation; Factors influencing selection of market segments; Criteria for effective market segmentation; Target market selection and strategies; Positioning – concept, bases and process. Unit II-Product and Pricing Decisions: Product - concept and classification; Major product decisions; New product development; Packaging and labelling; Product support services; Branding decisions; Product life cycle – concept and appropriate strategies adopted at different stages. Pricing- Objectives, Factors affecting price of a product, Pricing policies and strategies. Ethical issues in product and pricing decisions. Unit III-Distribution Decisions: Channels of distribution – concept and importance; Different types of distribution middlemen and their functions; Channel management, selection, motivation and performance appraisal of distribution middlemen; Distribution logistics – concept, importance and major logistics decisions; Channel integration and systems. Ethical issues in distribution decisions. Retailing and Wholesaling: Types of retail formats; Retail theories; Retailing strategies; Non-Store retailing; Wholesaling-nature and importance, types of wholesalers; Developments in retailing and wholesaling in Indian perspective. Unit IV-Promotion Decisions: Role of promotion in marketing; Promotion methods; Integrated Marketing Communication – Concept; Communication process and promotion; Determining promotion mix; Factors influencing promotion mix; Developing advertising campaigns. Ethical issues in promotion decisions. Unit V- Marketing Planning, Organising and Control: Marketing planning process; Different ways of organising marketing department; Sales, cost and profit analysis. Unit VI-Trends in Marketing: Service Marketing, Social Media Marketing, Green Marketing, Customer Relationship Management, Rural marketing, other emerging trends.


23

Note: Class discussions to be supported by relevant case studies.

Suggested Readings:

1. Kotler, Philip; Keller, Kevin Lane; Koshy, Abraham, and Mithileshwar Jha, Marketing Management: A South Asian Perspective, Pearson.

2. Lamb, Charles W.; Hair, Joseph F., and Carl McDaniel, Mktg, Cengage Learning. 3. Etzel, Michael J., Walker, Bruce J., Staton, William J., and Ajay Pandit, Marketing Concepts and

Cases, Tata McGraw Hill (Special Indian Edition). 4. Czinkota, Miachel, Marketing Management, Cengage Learning. 5. Kazmi, SHH, Marketing Management Text and Cases, Excel Books. 6. Kumar, Arun and N. Meenakshi, Marketing Management, Vikas Publishing House. 7. Zikmund, William G. and Michael D’Amico, Marketing: Creating and Keeping Customers in an E-

Commerce World, South-Western College Pub.



24


Course 4204: LEGAL ASPECTS OF BUSINESS


Objective: The course aims to acquaint the students with knowledge and understanding of major business laws. Contents: Unit I-Law relating to Transfer of Property: Important definitions; types of properties; movable and immovable property; properties which cannot be transferred; rule against perpetuities; lis pendens; provisions relating to sale; mortgage, charge, lease, gift and actionable claim. Unit II-Law relating to Societies and Trusts: General concept relating to registration of societies; property of societies; suits by and against societies; enforcement of judgment against societies; dissolution of societies; general concept relating to trusts; creation of a trust; duties and liabilities of trustees; rights and powers of trustees, disabilities of trustees; rights and liabilities of the beneficiary. Unit III-Law relating to Intellectual Property: Concept and development of intellectual property law in India; law and procedure relating to patents, trademarks and copyrights; geographical indications; design act; overview of laws relating to other intellectual property rights; intellectual property appellate board. Unit IV-Law relating to Competition and Consumer Protection: Concept of competition; Competition Act, 2002 - anti competitive agreements, abuse of dominant position, combination, regulation of combinations, competition commission of India; compliance of competition law; Consumer protection in India- Consumer Protection Act, 1986; rights of consumers; consumer disputes redressal agencies. Unit V-Law Relating to Information: Right to Information Act, 2005- Definitions, right to information, obligations of public authorities, request for obtaining information, disposal of request, exemption from disclosure of information, grounds for rejection to access in certain cases, severability; central information commission- its constitution, term of office, conditions of service and removal; powers and functions of Central Information Commissions, appeals and penalties. Unit VI-Law relating to Pollution Control and Environmental Protection: Concept of sustainable development, biodiversity and carbon credit; government policy regarding environment; law relating to prevention and control of air pollution and water pollution; Environment (Protection) Act, 1986; national green tribunal. Suggested Readings:

1. Singh, Avtar, The Principles of Mercantile Law, Eastern Book Company, Lucknow. 2. Sharma J. P., and SunainaKanojia, Business Laws, Ane Books Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi.


25

3. Bhandari, Munish, Professional Approach to Corporate Laws and Practice, Bharat Law House, New Delhi.

4. Handbook of Corporate Laws, Bharat Law House, New Delhi 5. Sir Dinshaw Fardunji Mulla, revised by Dr. Poonam Pradhan Saxena, Mulla's The Transfer of

Property Act 6. Sanjiva Row, revised by Justice K. Shanmukham & Shrinivas Gupta, Transfer of Property Act (with

Model Forms of Sale Deed, Agreement to Sell, Mortgage, Lease Deed, Gift Deed, Partition Deed, Assignment of Actionable Claim etc.) (in 2 Vols)

7. Bare Acts on Societies and Trusts 8. Bare Act on Competition Law 9. Bare Act on Consumer Protection Law 10. Bare Act on Pollution Control and Environmental Protection 11. Bare Act on Right to Information Act Law



26


Course 4205: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS


Objective: The purpose of this course is to acquaint the students with nature, scope, structure and operations of international business and familiarize them with trends and developments in International Business Environment and policy framework. Contents: Unit I – Introduction: International Business - Importance, nature and scope; Globalization; Drivers of Globalization. Basic Entry Decisions; Modes of entry into international business, selecting an Entry Strategy; IT and international business, India’s involvement in International Business Unit III - International Business Environment: Political, Legal, Economic, and Cultural environment and associated risks; Framework for analyzing international business environment. Unit II - International Trade: Reasons for international trade; Theories of international trade; Foreign trade multiplier; World trading environment – Pattern and structure of world trade in goods and services; Government intervention in International Trade: Arguments for Government intervention; Instruments of Commercial Policy: Tariffs, quotas and other measures and their effects. World Trade and Protectionism: GATT, The Uruguay Round, WTO, Evaluation of WTO, Important Agreements of WTO – Agriculture Agreements; SPS, TBT, GATS, TRIPS; WTO and Developing Countries, WTO and India. Unit IV - Balance of Payment Account: Components of BOP: Current Account, Capital Account, Official Reserve Account; Disequilibrium in BOP; Correction of Disequilibrium. Unit V - International Economic Institutions and Financial Environment: IMF, World Bank, UNCTAD, International commodity trading and agreements - India’s involvement and consequences; International Financial Environment: International Monetary System; Exchange rate mechanism and arrangement; Types of Exchange rate systems in the world; International money and capital markets; Movements in foreign exchange and interest rates. Foreign Direct Investment: Types of FDI; Theories of FDI, Cost and Benefit of FDI to Host and Home Countries, Government Policy Instruments and FDI, Trends in FDI. Unit VI - Regional Economic Integration: Levels of Regional Economic Integration: Free trade area, customs union, economic union, common market, political union; Trade creation and diversion effects; Regionalism vs. Multilateralism; Structure and functioning of EU and NAFTA, SAARC. Unit VII - Contemporary Issues in International Business: Environmental and Labour issues in International Business.


27

Suggested Readings: 1.Daniels, John D., Radebaugh, Lee H., Sullivan, Daniel P. and Salwan, P., International Business: Environment and Operations. 2.Griffin, Ricky W. and Pustay, Michael W, International Business: A Managerial Perspective , Prentice Hall. 3.Hill, Charles, W.L., International Business, McGraw Hill Company, New York. 4.Cherunilam, F., International Business Text and Cases, PHI. 5.Bhasin, N., Foreign Direct Investment in India: Policies, Conditions and Procedures, New Century Publications. 6.Ball, Donald, Wendall H. McCulloch, Miachel Geringer, Michael S. Minor and Jeanne M. McNett, International Business: The Challenge of Global Competition, McGraw Hill Co. Note: Latest edition of the readings may be used.


28

Master of Commerce Semester III

Course 4301: GLOBAL STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT


Objective: To help students understand strategy making process that is informed integrative and responsive to rapid changes in an organization’s globally oriented environment and also to help them understand tasks of implementing strategy in a global market. Contents: Unit I-Introduction: Concept and Role of Strategy; The Strategic Management Process; Approaches to Strategic Decision Making; Strategic Role of Board of Directors & Top Management. Strategic Intent; Concept of Strategic Fit, Leverage and Stretch; Global Strategy and Global Strategic Management; Strategic flexibility and learning organization.

Unit II-Environmental Analysis: Analysis of Global Environment- Environmental Profile; Constructing Scenarios; Environmental scanning techniques- ETOP, PEST and SWOT (TOWS) Matrix; Michael Porter’s Diamond Framework; Analysis of Operating Environment - Michael Porters Model of Industry Analysis; Strategic Group Analysis; The International Product Life Cycle (IPLC) Analysis of Internal Environment– Resource Audit; Resource Based View (RBV), Global Value Chains Systems; Core and Distinctive Competencies; From Sustainable Competitive Advantage to Transient Competitive Advantage. Unit III-Strategic Choice: Strategic options at Corporate Level – Growth, Stability and Retrenchment Strategies; Corporate Restructuring; Strategic options at Business Level- Michael Porters’ Competitive Strategies and Cooperative Strategies. Evaluation of Strategic Alternatives – Product Portfolio Models (BCG matrix, GE Matrix, etc.)

Unit IV-Situation Specific Strategies: Strategies for situation like competing in emerging industries, maturing and declining industries, fragmented industries, hyper –competitive industries and turbulent industries; Strategies for industry leaders, runner -up firms and weak businesses. Unit V-Strategic Issues and Alternatives in Globally Competitive Markets: Why & how firms internationalize; International entry options; Joint Ventures, Foreign Technology Agreements, Mergers and Acquisitions; Multi-country and global strategies; Outsourcing strategies. Unit VI-Strategy Implementation and Control: Interdependence of Formulation and Implementation of Strategy; Issues in global strategy implementation- Planning and allocating resources; Organisation Structure and Design; Budgets and support system commitment; culture and leadership. Strategy evaluation and control. Unit VII-Ethical and Social considerations in Global Strategic Management: The Global Context of Corporate Governance.


29

Note: Case studies and problems involving issues in global strategy are required to be discussed. Suggested Readings

1. Hill, Charles W.L. and Gareth R. Jones, Strategic Management: An Integrated Approach, Cengage

Learning, India. 2. Ungson, G.R. and Yim-Yu-Wong, Global Strategic Management, M.E. Sharpe. 3. Davidson, W.H., Global Strategic Management, John Wiley, New York. 4. Thompson, Arthur A. and A. J. Strickland, Strategic Management, McGraw Hill, New York. 5. Hitt, Michael A., Ireland, R. D., Hokisson, Robert E. and S. Manikutty, Strategic Management: A

South- Asian Perspective, Cengage Learning, India 6. Bartlett, C.A., Ghoshal, S. and P. Beamish, Transnational Management: Text, Cases, and Readings

in Cross-Border Management, McGraw Hill. 7. Porter, Michael E., Competition in Global industries, Harvard University Press, New York, 1986. 8. Porter, Michael E., The Competitive Advantage of Nations, Macmillan, London, 1990. 9. Frynas, J.G. and K. Mellahi, Global Strategic Management, Oxford University Press. 10. Henry, Anthony E., Understanding Strategic Management, Oxford University Press, New York. 11. Wheelen, Thomas L., Hunger, J. David, Hoffman, Alan N. and Charles E. Bamford, Strategic

Management and Business Policy: Globalization, Innovation and Sustainability, Prentice Hall, New Jersey.

12. Sengupta, N. and J.S. Chandan, Strategic Management: Contemporary concepts and Cases, Vikas Publishing.

13. Ghosh, P.K., Strategic Management- Text & Cases, Sultan Chand & Sons. 14. Nag, A., Strategic Management- Analysis, Implementation, Control, Vikas Publishing.



30


Course 4302: ENTREPRENEURSHIP


Objective: This Course Aims at Instituting Entrepreneurial skills in the students by giving an overview of who the entrepreneurs are and what competences are needed to become an entrepreneur.

Contents: Unit I-Introduction: Concept and Definitions, Entrepreneur v/s Intrapreneur; Role of entrepreneurship in economic development; Entrepreneurship process; Factors impacting emergence of entrepreneurship; Managerial versus entrepreneurial Decision Making; Entrepreneur v/s Investors; Entrepreneurial attributes and characteristics; Entrepreneurs versus inventors; Entrepreneurial Culture; Women Entrepreneurs; Social Entrepreneurship; Classification and Types of Entrepreneurs; EDP Programmes; Entrepreneurial Training; Traits/Qualities of an Entrepreneurs.

Unit II- Creating Entrepreneurial Venture: Generating Business idea- Sources of Innovation, methods of generating ideas, Creativity and Entrepreneurship; Challenges in managing innovation; Business planning process; Drawing business plan; Business plan failures; Entrepreneurial leadership- components of entrepreneurial leadership; Entrepreneurial Challenges; Legal issues – forming business entity, considerations and Criteria, requirements for formation of a Private/Public Limited Company, Intellectual Property Protection- Patents Trademarks and Copyrights – importance for startups, Legal Acts Governing Business in India. Unit III-Functional plans: Marketing plan– for the new venture, environmental analysis, steps in preparing marketing plan, marketing mix, contingency planning; Organizational plan – designing organization structure and Systems; Financial plan – pro forma income statements, pro forma cash budget, funds Flow and Cash flow statements; Pro forma balance sheet; Break Even Analysis; Ratio Analysis. Unit IV- Entrepreneurial Finance: Debt or equity financing, Sources of Finance- Commercial banks, private placements, venture capital, financial institutions supporting entrepreneurs; Lease Financing; Funding opportunities for Startups in India. Unit V- Enterprise Management: Managing growth and sustenance- growth norms; Factors for growth; Time management, Negotiations, Joint ventures, Mergers & acquisitions.


31

Suggested Readings:

1. Kumar, Arya, Entrepreneurship: Creating and Leading an Entrepreneurial Organization,

Pearson, India. 2. Hishrich., Peters, Entrepreneurship: Starting, Developing and Managing a New Enterprise, Irwin 3. Taneja, Entrepreneurship, Galgotia Publishers. 4. Barringer, Brace R., and R. Duane Ireland, Entrepreneurship, Pearson Prentice Hall, New

Jersy (USA) 5. Hisrich, Robert D., Michael Peters and Dean Shephered, Entrepreneurship, Tata McGraw

Hill, New Delhi 6. Lall, Madhurima, and Shikha Sahai, Entrepreneurship, Excel Books, New Delhi 7. Charantimath, Poornima, Entrepreneurship Development and Small Business Enterprises, Pearson

Education, New Delhi 8. Natarajan., K and E. Gordon, Entrepreneurship Development, Himalya Publication, India. 9. Vasant, Desai., Small- Scale Industries and Entrepreneurship, Himalya Publication, India. 10. Kuratko, D.F., and T. V. Rao, Entrepreneurship: A South-Asian Perspective, Cengage

Learning



32

Master of Commerce Semester IV

Course 4401: CORPORATE GOVERNANCE, ETHICS AND SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY OF

BUSINESS


Objective: To familiarize the students with the knowledge of ethics, emerging trends in good governance practices and corporate social responsibility in the global and Indian context. Contents: Unit I-Business Ethics: The concept of ethics; ‘ethics’ and related connotations; business values and ethics; concept of business ethics; various approaches to business ethics; ethical theories; ethical governance; social responsibility–an extension of business ethics; the concept of corporate ethics; benefits of adopting ethics in business; ethics programme; code of ethics; ethics committee. Unit II-Conceptual Framework Of Corporate Governance: Evolution of corporate governance; developments inIndia; regulatory framework of corporate governance in India; SEBI guidelinesand clause 49; reforms in the Companies Act; secretarial audit; class action; NCLT; insider trading; rating agencies; green governance/e-governance;shareholders’ activism; corporate governance in PSUs and banks;legislative framework of corporate governance –an international perspective (United Kingdom, USA, Australia, China, Russia, South Africa). Unit III-Corporate Management: Management vs. Governance; internal constituents of the corporate governance; key managerial personnel (KMP); chairman- qualities of a chairman, powers, responsibilities and duties of a chairman; chief executive officer (CEO), role and responsibilities of the CEO; separation of roles of chairman and CEO; CFO; manager; company secretary; auditor. Unit IV-Role and Functions of Board Committees: Standing committees, ad-hoc committees, task force committees, advisory committees; powers, functions and duties of board committees; enhanced performance of board committees; limitations of board committees; statutory committees of board- audit committee, remuneration committee, nomination committee, compliance committee, shareholders grievance committee, investors relation committee, investment committee, risk management committee, other committees. Unit V-Major Corporate Failures –Bank of credit and commerce international (UK), Maxwell communication corporation and Mirror group newspapers (UK), Enron (USA), World.com (USA), Andersen worldwide (USA), Vivendi (France), News of the world (UK); Satyam computer services ltd (India); Sahara (India); Kingfisher ltd (India); common governance problems noticed in various corporate failures; policy actions including major codes and standards. Unit VI-Whistleblowing and Corporate Governance – The Concept of Whistle-Blowing; Types ofWhistle-blowers; Whistle-blower Policy; the Whistle-Blower Legislation across Countries; developments in India.


33

Unit VII-Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) –Meaning; corporate philanthropy; CSR-an overlapping concept; corporate sustainability reporting;CSR through triple bottom line;CSR and business ethics; CSR and corporate governance; environmental aspect of CSR; CSR models; drivers of CSR; global reporting initiatives;major codes on CSR; initiatives in India. Suggested Readings:

1. Mallin, Christine A., Corporate Governance (Indian Edition), Oxford University Press,New Delhi. 2. Blowfield, Michael, and Alan Murray, Corporate Responsibility, Oxford UniversityPress. 3. Francesco Perrini, Stefano, and Antonio Tencati, Developing Corporate Social Responsibility-A

European Perspective, Edward Elgar. 4. Sharma, J.P., Corporate Governance, Business Ethics & CSR, Ane Books Pvt Ltd, New Delhi. 5. Sharma, J.P., Corporate Governance and Social Responsibility of Business, Ane Books Pvt. Ltd,

New Delhi.



34


Course 4402: BUSINESS RESEARCH


Objective: The objective of the course is to acquaint the students with the process and techniques of conducting research. The course is expected to train the students to plan and execute the research studies in business. Contents: Unit I: Introduction to Business Research: Meaning and role of business research; Business research and scientific method; Scope of business research; Organisation of business research: Outsourcing and in-house research; Business research process: An overview; Ethics in business research. Unit II: Problem Specification: Management problem specification, Formulating research problem, Developing research proposal – research objectives, research hypotheses, information needs; Determining research design: Explorative research – major techniques and their evaluation; Descriptive researches – case study, survey method and observation method; Causal research – major experimental designs and their evaluation; Reliability validity in experimentation; Quantitative vs qualitative research. Unit III: Determining Data Sources: Secondary data sources and their usefulness; Primary data collection – Observation and questioning methods; Questionnaire preparation; Scaling techniques and attitude measurement; Reliability and validity assessment. Unit IV: Survey Design: Census and survey methods; Designing sample survey – Defining universe, Determining sampling frame, sampling unit, sampling method and sample size. Unit V: Data Collection: Organising fieldwork – selection, training, supervision and evaluation of fieldworkers, Survey errors – sampling vs. non-sampling errors; Types of non-sampling errors and ways to deal with them; Data analysis and interpretation: Data editing and coding, Univariate analysis; Bivariate analysis; Multivariate data analysis – Interdependence and dependence analyses and their basic assumptions; Time series analysis. Unit VI: Major Multivariate Data Analysis Techniques: Basic concepts and applications of multivariate analysis of variance, multiple regression, factor analysis, cluster analysis, discriminant analysis and conjoint analysis.

Unit VII: Communicating Research Results: Research report preparation, presentation and follow-up.


35

Suggested Readings:

1. Cooper, Donald R., and Schindler, Pamela S. Business Research Methods: Tata McGraw Hill 2. Emory, C. William, Business Research Methods, Richard D. Irwin .Inc. Homewood, Illinois. 3. Kerlinger Fred N, Foundations of Behavioral Research, Surjeet Publications, Delhi. 4. Sekaran Uma, and Bougie Roger, Research Methods for Business, A Skill Building Approach,

Wiley India. 5. Srivastava, T. N. and Rego, Shailja, Business Research Methodology, Tata McGraw Hill. 6. William G. Zikmund, Business Research Methods ,Thomson. 7. Damodar Gujarati, Dawn, C. Porter and Sangeetha Gunasekar, Basic Econometrics, Publisher

Tata McGraw Hill. 8. Harper W. Boyd, Ralph Westfall and Stanley F. Stasch, Marketing research, Text and Cases,

Homewood, I11: Irwin.



36


(Major Group- Finance)

Course MJ 301: FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS & MARKETS


Objectives: The purpose of this course is to equip the students with an understanding of the financial system, its constituents, the principles on which it operates, inter linkages and regulatory concerns. Contents: Unit I - Introduction: Overview of financial markets& securities, Role of financial institutions, depository and non-depository institutions, consolidation & competition among financial institutions, financial conglomerates. Overview of the Indian financial system including financial sector reforms. Other contemporary issues in finance. Unit II- Interest Rate: Loanable Funds Theory, economic forces affecting interest rates, factors affecting yield differentials of debt instruments. Term structure of interest rates: Pure Expectations Theory, Liquidity Premium Theory, Segmented Markets Theory & Preferred Habitat Theory, Yield Curve. Unit III- Financial Markets: Money markets-organization, economic role, instruments & regulation. Capital Markets- Primary & Secondary markets and their organization. Security market regulation and stability. Role of SEBI. Unit IV- Banking: An overview of the banking industry, balance sheet of a bank, sources & uses of funds of banks, fee based & off balance sheet activities. Securitization. Bank earnings & bank performance, investment banking. Bank failure & regulation; Reasons for banks being heavily regulated, bank run, deposit insurance, capital adequacy regulation, bank examination etc. The problem of moral hazard & too big to fail institutions. RBI and its policy evolution. Unit V- Financial Services and Non Depository Institutions: Various fund based and fee based financial services- Leasing, Factoring, Forfaiting, Merchant Banking, Credit rating, Custodial services etc. Mutual Funds: Types of mutual funds schemes, ETFs, hedge funds, venture capital funds, private equity funds and regulation. An overview of Indian Mutual Funds Industry. Pension Funds: Issues in saving for retirement & role of the financial system; Defined benefit & defined contribution pension plans, Pension funds as financial intermediaries and their regulation. An overview of Indian pension fund industry including NPS. Insurance: Incentive problems in insurance-moral hazard & adverse selection, pure premium, premium smoothing etc. Reinsurance, catastrophe insurance. Regulation. An overview of the Indian insurance industry. Role of SEBI.


37

Unit VI- Financial Inclusion: Extent of exclusion, financial inclusion initiatives including SHG-Bank linkage Model. Micro finance- emerging issues & regulation. Suggested Readings:

1. Kohn Meir, Financial Institutions and Markets, Oxford University Press. 2. Madura Jeff, Financial Markets and Institutions, South Western Cengage Learning. 3. Mishkin, Fredrick S. and Stanley G. Eakins, Financial Markets and Institutions, Pearson Education India. 4. Kidwell, David S., Backwell, David W., Whidbee, David A. and Sias Richard W.,‘Financial Institutions, Markets and Money’, Wiley. 5. Reserve Bank of India – Various publications.



38



Course MJ 302: SECURITY ANALYSIS AND PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT


Objective: To equip the students with advanced analytical tools, models and financial theory necessary for making sound investment decisions and optimum portfolio choice as well as understanding the paradigms by which financial securities are valued. Contents: Unit I- Introduction: Investment environment, various asset classes and financial instruments. Investment process. Return-risk analysis and impact of taxes and inflation. Types and sources of risks. Risk Aversion. Diversification and Hedging. Contemporary issues in investment management- Socially responsible investing (SRI), Ethical investing etc. Unit II- Analysis of Fixed Income Securities: Bond fundamentals; Types of bonds; valuation of bonds; bond yields; bond price- yield relationship; analysis of risks in bonds-duration and convexity. Bond portfolio management- passive bond management and active bond management including bond immunization strategies. Unit III- Equity Analysis: Measurement of return and risk of equity shares. Approaches to equity analysis. Fundamental Analysis- Economy, Industry, Company Analysis; Equity Valuation Models ( DDM, P/E Ratio model and Free Cash Flow Valuation approach).Forecasting P/E ratio. Technical Analysis – Market indicators and specific stock indicators including Bollinger bands. Efficient market hypothesis. Tests of market efficiency and empirical evidence. Assumption of Investor’s rationality and its critique. Behavioural Finance- behavioural biases (Framing, Mental accounting, Regret avoidance and Prospect theory). Unit IV- Portfolio Analysis, Selection and Management: Risk aversion and capital allocation to risky assets and risk free asset; Risk tolerance and asset allocation; Optimal risky portfolio- Markowitz portfolio selection model. Sharpe’s single Index Model and optimal portfolio construction. Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM) and Market Anomalies ( Size effect, Value effect, Seasonality effect, Overreaction effect etc) . Extensions of CAPM (Zero beta CAPM and Merton’s Inter temporal CAPM).Arbitrage Pricing Theory and Multifactor Asset Pricing Models. Active and Passive portfolio management. Investment strategies- value investing, momentum and contrarian strategies etc. Portfolio performance evaluation (Sharpe index, Treynor Index, Jensen’s alpha, Information ratio, Fama’s decomposition measure).Portfolio revision. Unit V- Financial Derivatives: Futures-types and payoffs. Pricing of financial futures and commodity futures (Cost of carry model). Options- types and valuation using Black and Scholes Model. Put call parity. Options trading strategies. Exotic options, Portfolios of futures and options synthetics. Financial engineering.


39

Note: Some case studies related to above topics are required to be discussed.

Suggested Readings:

1. Bodie, Zvi., Kane Alex and Alan J. Marcus, Investments, McGraw Hill. 2. Reilly, Frank K, and Brown, Keith C., Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management, Cengage Learning. 3. Chandra, P., Security Analysis and Portfolio Management, Tata McGraw Hill. 4. Vishwanath, R and Krishna Murthi C., Investment Management, Springer 5. Fischer, Donald E. and Ronald J. Jordan, Security Analysis and Portfolio Management, PHI Learning. 6. Elton, E. and Gruber, M, Modern Portfolio Theory and Investment Analysis, John Wiley and Sons. 7. Damodaran, A., Investment Valuation, John Wiley & Sons. 8. Sharpe William F, and Bailey Jeffery V, Alexander Gordon J, Investments, PHI Learning. 9. Hull, J.C., Options, Futures and Other Derivatives, Prentice Hall. 10. Bhalla, V. K., Investment Management, S. Chand & Company Ltd.



40



Course MJ 403: INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL SYSTEM


Objective: The objective of this paper is to equip the students with an understanding of the international financial system, its evolution and growing importance as well as challenges thrown up by increasing globalization of finance. Contents: Unit I - Introduction: Growing importance of international finance, costs of international investment- crisis & contagion. Balance of Payments-current account, capital account, official reserve account, the J curve, forex reserves-costs and benefits. BOP trends in major countries, persistent current account deficits & surpluses among nations (Global Imbalances) & their repercussions. Shifting global dominance of the U.S.A., growing importance of a unified Europe and emerging Asia. Unit II- International Monetary System: Evolution of the international monetary system, bimetallism, Gresham’s Law, classical gold standard, its strengths and weaknesses, inter war period, Bretton woods system, Triffin’s Paradox, special drawing rights, flexible exchange rate regime, present arrangements including dollarization. The European Monetary Union & its costs & benefits. Fixed versus floating exchange rate systems. Unit III- Exchange Rate Determination & Forecasting: Measuring exchange rate movements & volatility, factors influencing exchange rates, Government intervention-direct & indirect intervention and sterilized & non-sterilized intervention. Interest Rate Parity, covered and uncovered interest arbitrage, Purchasing Power Parity-absolute & relative, Fisher Effect & International Fisher Effect. Forecasting Exchange Rates- Technical Approach, Fundamental Approach & Efficient Market Approach. Unit IV- International Financial Markets: Forex Markets; spot market, direct & indirect exchange quotations, bid ask spread, cross exchange rates, forwards, futures & options market. International money markets, international credit markets, international bond markets & international stock markets. Regulatory asymmetry & its implications. Unit V- International Banking: Offshore banking & offshore currency trading, factors contributing to the growth of international banking & Eurocurrency trading, regulatory asymmetry, shadow banks. Bank failure & safety nets, the problem of moral hazard & systematically important financial institutions. Problems in regulating international banking, regulatory arbitrage. BIS & Basel Committee-issues & challenges. Unit VI- Financial Crisis: Financial flows to developing countries, the problem of original sin, crisis in the Latin American countries, growth & crisis in Asia, contagion. Capital mobility-the trilemma of the


41

exchange rate regime. Lessons from the crisis. Role of International financial institutions like IMF & World Bank. Securitization and the financial crisis of U.S.A. (2008-09), role of credit rating agencies. Euro zone crisis and other contemporary issues. Suggested Readings: 1. Levi D, Maurice, International Finance, Routledge. 2. Krugman, Paul R., Obstfeld, Maurice and Melitz, Marc, International Economics, Pearson Education. 3. Madura, Jeff, International Corporate Finance, South-Western/Cengage learning. 4. Eun, Cheol S. and Resnick, Bruce G., International Financial Management, Tata McGraw- Hill.



42



Course MJ 404: INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT


Objective: The objective of this course is to provide the students with a deep understanding of financial management issues in a multinational enterprise (MNE). It equips the students with analytical tools and techniques for sound financial decision making in a global setting.

Contents: Unit -I: Introduction: Globalisation and the multinational enterprise (MNE).Complexities and issues in financial decision making of MNEs. Decisions in a global setting. Foreign Exchange Market- Spot and Forward market. Participants in foreign exchange market. Arbitrage, hedging and speculation. Covered interest rate arbitrage. Contemporary issues in international financial management. Unit -II: Cross- Border Investment Decision: Types of and issues in cross border investment decision. Green field investment Vs. Cross border M&As. Estimation of cash flows from cross border investment projects. Valuation techniques including Adjusted Present Value method. Risks in cross border investment decision- currency risk, political risk, country risk, inflation risk etc. Techniques for incorporating risks in cross border investment decision. Assessment and management of political risk. Country risk analysis.

Unit-III: Financing Decision, Dividend decision and Working Capital Management in MNEs: International capital structure and cost of capital. Determinants of capital structure of MNEs. Financing of foreign subsidiaries or projects- Internal and External sources, Parent Debt and Parent Equity, Bank Guarantees, Parallel loans, credit swaps etc. New instruments of raising finance by MNEs- Eurobonds, Euro notes, Euro-commercial papers, fixed and floating rate notes, euro syndicated credits etc. Dividend policies of MNEs. Working capital management in an MNE- International Cash management, International Inventory management and International receivables management. Financing of foreign trade.

Unit-IV: Managing currency Risk and Interest rate Risk: Types of risk exposure- Transaction exposure, Economic exposure and Translation exposure. Measurement of risk exposure. Management of currency risk using currency forwards and futures, currency options and currency swaps. Assessment of interest rate risk. Management of interest rate risk using Interest rate futures, interest rate swaps and other financial swaps.

Unit- V: International Diversification and Portfolio Investment: Global markets for equities. Risk factors in international investing. International diversification- risk and return aspects. International CAPM assuming no differences in consumption and no barriers to investment as well as assuming such differences. Identification of optimum portfolio.


43

Unit-VI: International Tax environment and International Accounting: International accounting and tax considerations in financial decision making of MNEs. International tax environment; bilateral tax treaties and tax heavens. Impact of international taxation on cross border investment decision. Transfer pricing and consolidated financial statements. Relevant Indian and International accounting standards.

Note: Some case studies related to above topics are required to be discussed.

Suggested readings:

1.Eun, Cheol S. and Resnick, Bruce G., ‘International Financial Management’, Tata McGraw- Hill. 2. Apte P.G., ‘Multinational Financial Management’, Tata -McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 3. Bekaert, Greet and Hodrick, Robert J., ‘International Financial Management’, Prentice Hall. 4. Madura, Jeff, ‘International Financial Management’, Cengage Learning. 5. Shapiro, Alan C., ‘Multinational Financial Management’, John Wiley. 6. Levi D, Maurice, ‘International Finance’, Routledge. 7. Sharan, V., International Financial Management, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.



44


(Major group- Marketing)

Course MJ 311: INTERNATIONAL MARKETING


Objective: To familiarize the students with the concept and issues of international marketing and enable them to be able to analyze the foreign market environment and develop international marketing strategies for a business firm. Contents: Unit I-Introduction: Nature, importance, and scope of international marketing; International market- orientation and involvement; International marketing management process- an overview, International marketing information system. International Marketing Environment: Influence of physical, economic, socio - cultural, political and legal environments on international marketing decisions; Global trading environment and developments. International Market Segmentation, Selection and Positioning; Screening and selection of markets; International market entry strategies –Exporting, licensing, contract manufacturing, joint venture, setting -up of wholly owned subsidiaries aboard. Unit II-International Product Planning and Pricing decisions: Major Product decisions-product design, labeling, packaging, branding and product support services; Product standardization vs. adaptation; Managing product line; International trade product life cycle; New product development. Pricing decisions for International Markets: Factors affecting international price determination; International pricing process and policies; Delivery terms and currency for export price quotations; Transfer pricing; Pricing in the context of counter trade. Unit III-International Distribution Decisions: Distribution channel strategy- International distribution channels; their roles and functions; selection and management of overseas agents; International distribution logistics- inventory management, transportation, warehousing, and insurance.

Unit IV-International Promotion Strategies: Communications across countries-complexities and issues; Country-of-origin effect; International promotion tools and planning; Advertising, personal selling, publicity, and sales promotion; International public relations, Developing international promotion campaign; Standardization vs. adaptation issue; Planning for direct mail, sales literature, trade fairs, and exhibitions. Unit V-Emerging trends in International Marketing: International Marketing through Internet; Ecological concerns and international marketing ethics.

NOTE: Class discussions to be supported by relevant case studies.


45

Suggested Readings:

1. Keegan, Warran J. and Mark C. Green, Global Marketing, Pearson. 2. Cateora, Phillip R. ;Grahm, John L. and Prashant Salwan,International Marketing,Tata McGraw Hill. 3. Czinkota, Michael R. and Illka A. Ronkainon, International Marketing, Cengage Learning. 4. Terpstra, Vern; Foley, James and Ravi Sarathy, International Marketing, Naper Press. 5. Jain, Subash C., International Marketing, South-Western. 6. Kotabe, Masaaki and Kristiaan Helsen, Global Marketing Management, John Wiley & Sons. 7. Onkvist, Sak and John J.Shaw, International Marketing; Analysis and Strategy, Psychology Press. 8. Rajagopal, International Marketing, Vikas Publishing House.



46



Course MJ 312: ADVERTISING AND SALES MANAGEMENT


Objective: To develop an in -depth understanding of the modern concepts and latest techniques of advertising and personal selling and sales force management which constitute a fast -growing area of marketing. Contents: Section A: Advertising Unit I-Communication Basics: Communication and marketing; Communication process; Communication response hierarchy models; Cognitive processing of communication; EKB model; Marketing communication mix; Integrated marketing communication – an introduction; Advertising - Its importance and nature; Advertising and publicity; Advertising management process; Advertising objectives; DAGMAR Approach; Determination of Target Audience and positioning; Advertising budget – factors influencing budget decision and methods . Unit II- Advertising Message and Media Decisions: Creativity and advertising; Creative process; Creative appeals and execution styles; Developing advertising copy for print ad - headline, body copy, logo, illustration and layout. Media Decisions –Types of media, Advertising through Internet and interactive media; Developing media plan; media selection and scheduling. Unit III-Organization and Evaluation of Advertising Efforts: Centralized and decentralized systems; In-house agency arrangements; Advertising agencies – selection, compensation and appraisal of advertising agency; managing advertising agency relations; IMC services; Reasons for evaluating Advertising Effectiveness; Advertising testing process - Before and after advertising tests and techniques. Unit IV-Advertising in India: Social and regulatory aspects of advertising in India. Recent developments and issues in advertising. Section B: Sales Management Unit V-Fundamentals of Personal Selling: Nature and importance of selling; Types of selling; Personal selling, salesmanship and sales management; Process of effective selling; Sales management process; Environmental factors impacting selling; Managing ethics in selling environment; Role of personnel selling in customer relationship management Unit VI-Sales Planning and Organization: Setting personal selling objective; Market analysis and sales forecasting; Sales budget; Sales territory; Sales quota; Role of IT in sales planning.


47

Sales Organization: Organization structure; Relationship of sales department with other departments; Distribution networks relationship. Unit VII-Sales Force Management: Recruitment and selection; training and development- Objectives, techniques and Evaluation; Sales persons compensation and techniques – straight salary, straight commission, sales contests; rewards and expense accounts; motivating, and supervising sales personnel; Evaluation and Control of the sales effort – Evaluation of sales personnel performance, Sales and cost analysis.

Suggested Readings:

1. Aaker, David A., Rajeev Batra and John G. Mayers, Advertising Management, Prentice Hall of India. 2. Belch. George and Michael Belch, Advertising and Promotion: An Integrated Marketing

Communications Perspective, McGraw Hill Education. 3. Still, Richard R., Sales Management: Decisions, Strategies and Cases, Pearson Education India 4. Anderson B. Robert, Professional Selling, Universe. 5. Johnston, Mark W. and Greg W. Marshall, Sales Force Management: Leadership, Innovation,

Technology, Routledge. 6. Spiro, Rosann, William J. Stanton and Gregory A. Rich, Management of a Sales Force, McGraw Hill

Education. 7. Hair, Sales Management, Cengage Learning. 8. Johnston, mark W. and Greg W. Marshall, Contemporary Selling: Building Relationships and Creating

Value, Routledge. 9. Sharma, Kavita, Advertising: Planning and Decision Making, Taxmann. Note: Latest edition of the readings may be used.


48



Course MJ 413: CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR


Objective: To provide an in-depth understanding of the consumer and industrial buying processes and their determinants as relevant for marketing decision making.

Contents: Unit I-Consumer Behaviour: Importance and nature of consumer behaviour; Types of consumers and their role; Consumer behaviour and marketing concept; Changing profile of Indian consumers and impact of technology. Conducting consumer research – overview of process, complexities and issues Unit II-Consumer Decision Making Process: Buying Motives; Buying Roles; Consumer Buying Process; Levels of Consumer Decision Making. Unit III-Individual differences in consumers: Needs and motivation; Perception; Attitude and attitude change; Learning and learning theories; Personality and life style analysis. Unit IV-Socio-Cultural Determinants of consumer behaviour: Family and household influence on consumer buying behaviour; Group and their influences-WOM and opinion leaders, Social class; Culture and sub-culture. Cross-cultural dimensions of consumer behaviour Unit V-Models of Consumer Behaviour and Business buying behaviour: An overview of contemporary models. Note: Use relevant case studies to support learning in the class. Suggested Readings:

1. Schiffman, L.G. and L.L.Kanuk, Consumer Behaviour, Prentice Hall. 2. Engel, J.F., Roser D. Blackwell and Paul W. Miniard, Consumer Behaviour, Cengage Learning. 3. Peter, J. Paul, and Jerry C. Olson, Consumer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy, McGraw Hill. 4. Assael, H., Consumer Behaviour and Marketing Action; Cengage Learning. 5. Hawkins, Dal I., Roger J. Best and Kenneth A. Coney, Consumer Behaviour Implication for Marketing

Strategy, McGraw Hill. 6. Hawkins, Del I, Mothersbaugh, David L, Mookerjee A, Consumer Behaviour: Building Marketing

Strategy, McGraw Hill, Indian Edition.



49



Course MJ 414: SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT AND LOGISTICS


Objective: To acquaint the students with the concepts and tools of supply chain management and logistics as relevant for a business firm. Contents: Unit I-Introduction: Concept of supply chain management (SCM) and trade logistics; Scope of logistics; Logistic activities – an Overview; Contribution of logistics at macro and micro levels; SCM and trade logistics; Business view of SCM; Concept, span and process of integrated SCM; Demand management – methods of forecasting; Supply chain metrics (KPIs), performance measurement and continuous improvement; Product development Process and SCM; Strategic role of purchasing in the supply chain and total customer satisfaction; Types of purchases; Purchasing cycle. Unit II-Managing Relationship: Role of Relationship marketing in SCM; Managing relationships with suppliers and customers; Captive buyers and suppliers; Strategic partnerships; Supplier-retailer collaboration and alliances. Unit III- Focus Areas of Logistics and Supply Chain management: Transportation-Importance of effective transportation system; Service choices and their characteristics; inter-modal services; Transport cost characteristics and rate fixation; In-company management vs. out-sourcing; World sea borne trade; International shipping- characteristics and structure; Liner and tramp operations; Liner freighting; Chartering-Types, principles and practices; Development in sea transportation-Unitization, containerisation, inter and multimodal transport; CFC and ICD. Air transport: Set up for air transport and freight rates; Carriage of Goods by sea -Role and types of cargo intermediaries. Warehousing and inventory management: Reasons for warehousing; Warehousing evaluation and requirements; Warehousing location strategies; Inventory management principles and approaches; Inventory categories -EOQ, LT, ICC; Material management systems and techniques – JIT purchasing, manufacturing and in-bound logistics; Packing and marking; Control and communication. Unit IV-IT Enabling Logistics and Supply Chain: Technology in logistics – EDI, bar Coding, RFID etc., data warehousing, electronic payment transfers; Business management systems; TRADITIONAL ERP, SPECIAL ERP, MR, DRP, PDM, EIP, CPFR, WMS, TMS; Re-engineering the supply chain- Future directions. Unit V-Trends and Challenges in logistics and supply chain management: Third party logistic outsourcing –challenges and future directions. Note: Use relevant case studies to support learning in the class.


50

Suggested Readings:

1. Ballau, R.H., Business Logistics Management, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs. 2. Christopher, M., Logistics and Supply Chain Management, Prentice Hall. 3. Murphy, Paul R. and Donald F. Wood, Contemporary Logistics, Prentice Hall. 4. Shapiro, R., Logistics Strategy: Cases and Concepts, West Publishing, St. Paul. 5. Coughlan, A.,Anderson, E. and Louis W. Stern, Marketing Channels, Prentice Hall. 6. Handfield and Nicholas, Jr., Introduction to Supply Chain Management, Prentice Hall. 7. Jhon J Coyle, C. Jhonand Langley,Brian J Gibs, Logistics approach to Supply Chain Management,

Cengage Learning.



51


(Major Group- Human Resource Management)

Course MJ 321: HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT


Objective: The objective of the course is to make student aware of the concepts, techniques and practices of human resource development. This course intends to make students understand the applicability of these principles and techniques in an organization.

Contents: Unit I-Introduction to Human Resource Development: Concept and evolution; Relationship between human resource management and human resource development; HRD mechanisms, processes and outcomes; HRD matrix; HRD interventions; Roles and competencies of HRD professionals. Unit II-HRD Process: Assessing HRD needs; Designing and developing effective HRD programs; Implementing HRD programs; Evaluating HRD programs. Unit III-Learning and HRD: Maximizing learning; Individual differences in learning process; Learning strategies and styles; Principles of learning; Learning and motivation; HRD culture and climate. Unit IV-HRD Activities and Applications: HRD for Workers; HRD mechanisms for workers; Role of trade unions; Employee training and development- Process, methods, and types; Coaching, counselling and performance management; Career management and development; Organization development. Unit V-HRD in Organisations, Trends and Practices: Select cases for HRD Practices in Government organisations, defence, police, private sectors and public sectors units; HRD audit; Balanced scorecard; People capability maturity model; Integrating HRD with technology; Employer branding and other recent trends; Future of HRD. Note: Lectures should be supplemented with the case studies.

Suggested Readings: 1. Werner J. M., DeSimone, R.L., Human resource development, South Western. 2. Nadler, L., Corporate human resources development, Van Nostrand Reinhold. 3. Blanchard, P.N., Thacker, J.W., Anand Ram, V., Effective training, systems, strategies, and practices, Pearson Education. 4. Raymond, N. and Kodwani, A.D., Employee training and development, McGrawHill Education India. 5. Mankin, D., Human resource development, Oxford University Press India. 6. Haldar, U. K., Human resource development, Oxford University Press India. 7. Rao, T.V., Future of HRD, Macmillan Publishers India. 8. Rao, T.V., HRD score card 2500: Based on HRD audit, Response Books, SAGE Publications.


52

9. Rao, T.V., Hurconomics for talent management: Making the HRD missionary business-driven, Pearson Education. 10. Curtis, B., Hefley, W. E., Miller, S. A., The people capability maturity model: Guidelines for improving workforce, Pearson Education. 11. Kaplan, R.S., and Norton, D.P. 1992, The Balanced Scorecard: Measures that drive performance, Harvard Business Review.



53


(Major Group-Human Resource Management)

Course MJ 322: MANAGEMENT OF INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS


Objective: The objective of the course is to make student practically equipped to manage the industrial relations in the light of numerous augmentations in the area of Industrial relations. The course will make them understand the importance of industrial relations for an organisation and the ways and means to create industrial harmony at different levels of organisation.

Contents: Unit I- Structure and Evolution of Industrial Relations: Concept, Nature and models of IR: Unitarist, Pluralist, Dunlop’s and Marxist perspectives of IR, Industrial relations system in India: Structure and its evolution. Major contemporary developments in global economy and polity and their impact on industrial relations scenario in India. Unit II- Industrial Conflict and Disputes Resolution: Industrial Relations Machinery in India, Provisions under the Industrial Disputes Act, 1947; Authorities under the Act, Reference of disputes to boards, courts or Tribunals, Procedures, Powers and duties of Authorities, Strikes, Lockouts, Layoff and retrenchments, unfair labour Practices, Penalties. Disputes resolution methods, Forms of industrial conflicts, Labour turnover, workplace practices and cooperation. Dynamics of conflict and collaboration. Trends in industrial conflict. Nature, Causes and Types of industrial disputes: handling interest and rights disputes––Statutory and Non-statutory––Linking IR Strategy and HRM strategy. Unit III- Trade Unionism, Negotiations and Collective bargaining: Provisions of Trade Union Act, 1926, Definitions, Legislations of Trade unions, rights and Liabilities of Registered Trade Union, Regulations, Penalties and procedure. Management of labour, management control strategies, business strategies and industrial relations, Role of market conditions, Structure for management of Industrial relations; Collective bargaining: Nature and functions; Types of bargaining; Collective bargaining in the Indian context; Negotiating a collective bargaining agreement.

Unit IV- Industrial Relations and HRM performance: Unions and productivity; Industrial relations climate and performance; the conciliation and arbitration system and performance; labour market and economic performance; Nature of grievances and grievance procedure. Handling employee grievances-Model grievance procedures. Industrial indiscipline. Disciplinary enquiries: an overview. Salient features of Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act, 1946.Disciplinary action and termination of employment contract.


54

Unit V- Industrial Democracy: Concept and scope of industrial democracy, Workers’ participation: Strategy, practices, behavioural science input/contribution and models. Rationale for participation, Issues in participation, strategies for making participation effective. Emerging trends in Union-Management relations. Technology and industrial relations. Principles of comparative analysis, variables of comparative analysis (culture, values, ideologies, politico -economic structure) Experience of UK, Yugoslavia, West Germany, Scandinavian countries and Japan.

Note: Cases to supplement learning from the course.

Suggested Readings:

1. Venkataratnam, C. S. Industrial Relations: Text and Cases. Delhi. Oxford University Press. 2. Michael Salamon, Industrial Relations––Theory & Practice. London. Prentice Hall. 3. Bray, M, Deery.S, Walsh.J, and Waring P, Industrial Relations : A Contemporary Approach, Tata Mc Graw Hill. 4. Dwivedi, R.S., Managing Human Resources: Industrial Relations in Indian Enterprises, New Delhi, Galgotia Publishing Company. 5. Edwards, P. Industrial Relations: Theory and Practice in Britain. U.K. Blackwell Publishing. 6. Kaufman, B. The global evolution of industrial relations: events idea and the IIRA. Geneva: International Labour Office. 7. Singh, P., & Kumar, N. Employee Relations Management. New Delhi: Pearson Education India. 8. Ramaswamy, E.A. The Rayon Spinners ––Strategic Management of Industrial Relations, New Delhi. Oxford University Press. 9. Mamoria C.B. & S. Mamoria: Dynamics of Industrial Relations in India. Mumbai. Himalaya Publishing House. 10. Niland R. et. al . The Future of Industrial Relations, New Delhi. Sage. 11. Sen, R. Industrial relations: text and cases, New Delhi. Macmillan Publishers. 12. Rowley, C., & Warner, M. Globalizing international human resource management. New York: Routledge. 13. Zeytinoglu, I. U. Effects flexibility in workplace on workers: Work environment and the unions. Geneva: International Labour Office. 14. www.workersparticipation.eu 15. www.ilo.org



55



Course MJ 423: STRATEGIC HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

Marks: 100 (Theory = 70, Internal Assessment = 30) Objective: To impart knowledge about the strategic aspect of human resource management. This paper also intends to make the students understand the linkage between human resource strategies and corporate strategies. Contents: Unit I-Introduction: Concept and context of strategic human resource management (SHRM); Corporate strategy and SHRM; Evolution of SHRM; SHRM & HR; Challenges in SHRM; Resource based view of a firm; Competencies of HR professionals. Unit II-HR Strategies: Strategic HR planning and acquisition: Recruitment and selection; Strategic training and development; Reward and compensation strategy; Corporate strategy and career systems; Employee separation and retention management, retrenchment; Strategic approach to industrial relations; Managing workforce diversity. Unit III-Implementing Strategic Human Resource Management: Identifying strategic positions; Human resource analytics; Employee engagement; Matching culture with strategy; Behavioural issues in strategy implementation. Unit IV-Linking SHRM to Competitive Success and Corporate Strategy: SHRM for competitive advantage; HC Bridge Model and Decision science model; Tools for work analysis and talent strategies; HR implications of mergers and acquisitions; Outsourcing and its HR implications. Unit V- Trends and Issues in SHRM: Alignment of HR strategies and the impact on business performance; HR metrics; Human resource strategy in international context; Future of SHRM. Note: Lectures should be supplemented with the case studies.

Suggested Readings: 1. Das P., Strategic human resource management: A resource driven perspective, Cengage Learning India. 2. Greer, C.R., Strategic human resource management: A general managerial approach, Pearson Education. 3. Paul B., Strategic human resource management, McGrawHill Education. 4. Armstrong, M., Armstrong's handbook of strategic human resource management, Kogan Page. 5. Mello J. A., Strategic management of human resources, South Western. 6. Schuler, R. S., and Jackson, S. E., Strategic human resource management, Wiley India. Note: Latest edition of the readings may be used.


56



Course MJ 424: COMPENSATION MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEE WELFARE LAWS

Marks: 100 (Theory= 70, Internal Assessment=30)

Objective: The course is designed to promote understanding of issues related to compensation management in corporate sector and public services and to impart skill in designing compensation management system, policies and strategies, apart from promoting understanding of legal issues in the administration of compensation, welfare and social security.

Contents: Unit I- Compensation Management and Employees Welfare: Compensation management process, Forms of pay, Financial and non-financial compensation. Compensation Strategies, Assessing job values & relativities; Pay structures; Designing pay levels, mix and pay structures, construction of optimal pay structure. Paying for performance, skills and competence. International pay systems: comparing costs and systems; Strategic market mind set; Expatriate pay. Concept and Rationale of Employees Welfare. Unit II-The Payment of Bonus Act, 1965: Objects; Scope and Application; Definitions; Calculation of amount payable as Bonus; Eligibility and Disqualifications for Bonus; Minimum & maximum Bonus; Set on & Set off of Allocable Surplus; Application of Act in Establishment in Public Sector; Bonus linked with Production or Productivity

Unit III- The Payment of Wages Act, 1936: Objects; Application; Responsibility for payment of wages; Fixation of wage periods; time-limits; Deduction from wages; Remedies available to worker, Powers of authorities, Penalty for offences.

Unit IV-The Minimum Wages Act, 1948: Objects; Application; Minimum Fair and Living Wages; Determination of minimum wage; Taxation of minimum wage; Advisory Board; Remedy to worker for non-payment of minimum wages.

Unit V-The Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1923: Objects; Employer’s liability for compensation; Amount of compensation; Distribution of compensation; Notice and claims, remedies of employers against stranger; Procedures in proceedings before Commissioner.

Unit VI- The Maternity Benefit Act, 1961: Definitions, Employment of, or work by, women prohibited during certain periods, right to payment of maternity benefits, notice of claim of maternity benefit and payment thereof, Leaves, Dismissal during absence of pregnancy, forfeiture of maternity benefits.


57

Note: Case laws in respect of recent trends and administration of the Acts are required to be done in all units.

Suggested Readings:

1. Belchor, David W. “Compensation Administration”, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs. NT. 2. Henderson, R.I. Compensation Management in a Knowledge Based World. New Delhi: Pearson Education 3. Milkovich.G; Newman.J and Ratnam, C.S.V, Compensation, Tata Mc Graw Hill, Special Indian Edition. 4. Armstrong, M. & Murlis, H. Reward Management: A Handbook of Salary administration, London: Kegan Paul 5. Sharma, J.P. An Easy Approach To Company And Compensation Laws. New Delhi: Ane Books Pvt Ltd. 6. Malik, P.L. Handbook of Labourer and Industrial Law, Eastern Book Company. 7. Government of India Report of the National Commission on Labour Ministry of Labour and Employment, New Delhi.

Relevant bare Acts and Rules.



58


(Minor Group- Tax)

Course MN 331: PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF TAXATION AND INDIAN TAX SYSTEM

Marks: 100 (Theory = 70, Internal Assessment = 30) Objective: To familiarize and update the students with the basic principles of taxation, Structure of Indian Taxation system and provisions of indirect tax. Contents: Unit I-Introduction: Canons of taxation, Tax-GDP Ratio: Meaning, Significance & Determinants. Trends in Tax- GDP Ratio. Features of a good taxation system, Tax Equity: Benefit Principle of Taxation; Ability-to-pay principle of taxation. Tax Capacity & Tax Effort, Tax bases and tax policy – Determinants of tax yield – Classification of taxes: Direct and indirect taxes (Relative Roles of Direct and Indirect Taxes in Indian Economy) OECD classification; Progressive, proportional and regressive taxes; Ad-valorem and specific taxes. Unit II- International Double Taxation: Assignment Rules of Foreign Income- Source Versus Residence; Methods to alleviate international tax duplication: Exemption, Tax Credit Method, Bilateral Tax Treaty, Multilateral Tax Treaty, OECD Model & United Nations Model- Tax Convention, International Tax Avoidance and Evasion; Transfer Pricing; Tax Heavens, Tax Treaty Shopping – Anti Avoidance Measures. Indian Law on Double Tax Relief. Unit III- Incidence of Taxation: Types of tax incidence, Factors determining extent of tax shifting-taxation and efficiency: Excess Burden of Taxation; Administrative Costs; Compliance Costs. Distribution of Tax Burden, - Buoyancy and elasticity of tax revenue-Tax evasion in India, causes and consequences of tax evasion, Methods to curb tax evasion, Tax Incentives: Rationale, benefits and costs of tax incentives, forms of tax incentives: Tax Holidays, investment allowance, deductions, reinvestment incentives etc. Unit IV- Constitutional Provisions Pertaining to Taxes: Rationale for constitutional arrangements. Distribution of taxation powers between the Center and States in the constitution of India; Restrictions on the taxation powers of the States; sharing of Central taxes. Recommendations of the Thirteenth Finance Commission. Unit V- Tax Reforms in Direct and Indirect Taxes: Issues & Challenges, Value Added Tax, Goods & Service Tax, Direct Tax Code. Unit VI- Tax treatment of capital gains: exemption, presumptive tax, Tax amnesties. Note: Some case studies involving the learning from the course.


59

Suggested Readings:

1. Musgrave. Richard and Peggy Musgrave, Public Finance in Theory and Practice, New York: McGraw Hill Book Company. 2. Sury, M.M. Fiscal Policy Development in India: 1947 to 2007, Indian tax foundation in association with New Century publications, New Delhi. 3. Peerzode, Sayal Afzal, Economics of Taxation, Atlantic Publishers& Distributors Pvt. Ltd. 4. Goode. Richard, Government Finance in Developing Countries, New Delhi. Tata –McGraw Hill publishing Company Ltd. 5. Government of India, Ministry of Finance, Report of the Indirect Taxation Enquiry Committee (Chairman, L. K. Jha). 6. Government of India, Ministry of Finance, Speeches of Union Finance Ministers, 1947-48 to 1984-85 (New Delhi, 1984). 7. Singhania. Vinod K, Direct Taxes: Law and Practice (Delhi: Taxmann Publications (p)



60


(Minor Group- Tax)

Course MN 432: CORPORATE TAX STRUCTURE AND PLANNING


Objective: To familiarize the student with latest provisions of the Indian Corporate tax laws and related judicial pronouncements having implications for corporate tax planning. Contents: Unit I- Introduction of Tax Planning: Meaning of tax planning and management, tax evasion and tax avoidance; Nature and scope of tax planning and management in the corporate sector; Justification of corporate tax planning and management. Unit II- Assessment of Companies: Residential Status and incidence of Tax, Computation of corporate tax: Carry forward and set off of losses in the case of certain companies under Sec. 79 of Income-tax Act, 1961; Deductions available to corporate assessee, Computation of taxable income of companies; Computation of amount of corporate tax liability; Minimum Alternate Tax; Tax on distributed profits of domestic companies; Tax on income distributed to unit holders. Unit III- Tax Planning and Specific Management Decisions: Implications of Tax concessions and incentives for corporate decisions in respect of setting up a new business, location of business and nature of business. Unit IV-Tax Planning and Financial Management Decisions: Capital structure decisions; Dividend Policy; Bonus Share; Investments and Capital Gains. Owning or leasing of an asset; purchase of assets by installment system or Hire System; Purchase of an asset out of own funds or out of borrowed capital; manufacturing or buying; Repairing, replacing, renewing or renovating an asset; Sale of assets used for scientific research; Shutting down or continuing operations. Private equity Unit V- Business Reorganisation: Tax Planning in respect of amalgamation or de-merger of companies, Slump sale, conversion of a firm into a company. Conversion of Sole Proprietorship into Company, Conversion of company into Limited Liability Partnership. Unit VI- Transfer Pricing: Overview of Indian transfer pricing Unit VII– Foreign Collaboration and Double Taxation Relief: Foreign collaborations and incidence of taxation on domestic companies; provisions for relief in respect of double taxation. Note: Relevant case studies to be discussed in the class.


61

Suggested Reading: 1. Srinivas.E.A, Corporate Tax Planning, Tata McGraw Hill, 2. Singhania,Vinod. K,Taxmann’s Direct Taxes, Law & Practice. 3. Ahuja. Girish&Ravi Gupta, Bharat’s Professional Approach to Direct Taxes, Law & Practice, Bharat Law House Pvt. Ltd. 4. Lal. B. B & N. Vashisht, Direct Taxes Income Tax, Wealth Tax and Tax Planning. 5. Taxman, The Tax and Corporate Law Weekly. 6. Bhagmati Prasad, Direct Taxes And Laws And Practice, Wishwa Prakashan,



62


(Minor Group- Law)

Course MN 341: CORPORATE LAWS

Marks: 100 (Theory = 70, Internal Assessment = 30) Objective: To acquire knowledge and develop understanding of the regulatory framework of companies with reference to various provisions of the Companies Act, 2013 and a number of other corporate laws. Contents: Unit I- Historical Background of Company Law: Origin and Growth of Company Law in England: Commendas and Societas; Formation of East India Company; Enactment of the Bubble Act, 1719; Joint Stock Companies Act, 1844 (Joint Stock Companies Act, 1850 in India); Limited Liability Act, 1855; Companies Act, 1862 (Companies Act, 1866 in India); Companies Act, 1908 (Indian Companies Act, 1913); Companies Act, 1948 (Companies Act 1956 in India). Unit II- Company and Its Formation: Lifting of corporate veil; types of companies; one person company, producer company; association not for profit; illegal association; formation of company – promoters, their legal position, pre-incorporation contract and provisional contracts; memorandum of association; articles of association; doctrine of constructive notice and indoor management; prospectus and book building; postal ballot; issue, allotment and forfeiture of shares, transmission of shares, buyback and provisions regarding buyback; issue of bonus shares; online registration of a company. Unit III- Management and Control of Companies: Directors; classification of directors, women directors, independent directors; disqualifications, director identity number (DIN); appointment, legal positions, powers and duties, removal of directors; key managerial personnel, managing director, manager; managerial remuneration; meetings of shareholders and board- kinds, convening and conduct of meetings. Unit IV-Accounts and Audit: Books of accounts; online filing of documents; dividend provisions, declaration and payment of dividend, treatment of unpaid and unclaimed dividend, transfer of unpaid and unclaimed dividend to investor education fund; auditors-appointment, resignation and removal; qualification and disqualification; auditor's report; inspection, inquiry and investigation, compromises, arrangements and amalgamations; prevention of oppression and mismanagement; concept and modes of winding up. Unit V- Depositories Act 1996: Definitions; rights and obligations of depositories; participants, issuers and beneficial owners; inquiry and inspections; penalty. Unit VI- SEBI Act, 1992: Formation and meetings of the SEBI; functions and powers of SEBI in relation to securities markets; prohibition of manipulative and deceptive devices; insider trading and substantial acquisition of securities or control; guidelines for securities issues. Note: Case Studies involving issues in corporate laws are required to be discussed.


63

Suggested Readings:

1. Hicks, Andrew & Goo S.H., Cases and Material on Company Law, Oxford University Press. 2. Kershaw, David, Company Law in Context, Oxford University Press, UK. 3. Gowar, LCB, Principles of Modern Company Law, Stevens & Sons, London. 4. Hanningan, Brenda, Company Law, Oxford University Press, UK. 5. Sharma, J. P, Corporate Laws, Ane Books Pvt Ltd, New Delhi. 6. Bhandari, Munish, Professional Approach to Corporate Laws and Practice, Bharat Law House,

New Delhi 7. Ramaiya, A Guide to Companies Act, Wadhwa and Company Nagpur 8. Kannal, S., & V.S. Sowrirajan, Company Law Procedure, Taxman’s Allied Services (P) Ltd., New

Delhi 9. Course material of the Institute of Company Secretaries of India on Company Laws. 10. Bharat’s Companies Act 2013, Bharat Law House, New Delhi



64


(Minor Group-Law)

Course MN 442: INDUSTRIAL LAWS

Marks: 100 (Theory = 70, Internal Assessment = 30) Objective: The purpose of this course is to enable the students to acquire knowledge and understanding of prominent labour and industrial laws. Contents: Unit I-Employees Provident Fund & Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952: Definitions; schemes under the Act – Employees’ Provident Fund Scheme, Employees’ Pension Scheme, 1995; Employees’ Deposit Linked Insurance Scheme; case laws. Unit II-Employees State Insurance Act, 1948: Objects and applicability of the scheme; definitions- personal injury, factory, manufacturing process, wages, partial and permanent disablement; ESI corporation; standing committee and medical benefit council; contributions; adjudication of dispute and claims, benefits; case laws. Unit III-Factories Act, 1948: Definitions; authorities under the Factories Act; health; safety; provisions relating to hazardous processes; welfare; working hours of adults; employment of young persons; annual leave with wages; penalties and procedure; case laws. Unit IV- The Industrial Disputes Act, 1947: Objects; authorities for settlement of industrial disputes; reference of industrial disputes, procedure, powers and duties of authorities; settlements and awards; strikes, lock-outs, lay-off, retrenchment, transfer and closure; unfair labour practices. Unit V-Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972: Applicability and non- applicability of the Act; definitions-employee, employer, continuous service; payment of gratuity; forfeiture of gratuity; employer’s duty to determine and pay gratuity; recovery of gratuity; penalties; case laws. Unit VI-Trade Unions Act, 1926:Objects; registration of trade unions; rights and liabilities of registered trade unions; privileges of a registered trade union; immunity from criminal and civil proceedings; penalties; case laws. Unit VII-Employee’s Compensation Act, 1923: Definitions- dependent, employer, partial and total disablement, workmen, injury, accident; employer’s liability for compensation; amount of compensation; contracting; commissioner; case laws. Note: Cases and problems involving issues in industrial laws are required to be discussed in the class. Suggested Readings:

1. Malik, K.L., Industrial Laws and Labour Laws, Eastern Book Company, Lucknow.


65

2. Kumar, H.L., Digest of Labour Cases, Universal Law Publishing Co P Ltd, New Delhi. 3. Srivastava, S.C., Industrial Relations &Labour Laws, Vikas Publishing House (P) Ltd. 4. Sharma, J.P., Simplified Approach to Labour Laws, Bharat Law House (P) Ltd., New Delhi. 5. Sharma, J.P., Industrial Laws, Ane Books Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi.



66


(Minor Group -Accounting)

Course MN 351: STRATEGIC COST MANAGEMENT


Objective: The objective of this course is to provide students the adequate knowledge of modern cost management techniques and to enable them apply these techniques for managing a profitable and competitive enterprise. Contents: Unit I: Cost Management-Nature; Cost Management System; Strategic Cost Management (SCM); SCM and Strategy; Components of SCM. Activity-Based Management [ABM]: Concept and Uses; Relationship between Activity – Based Costing and ABM; Operational ABM and Strategic ABM; Techniques of ABM; Implementation Steps in ABM. Unit II: Life Cycle Costing-Meaning and Benefits; Product Life Cycle and Pricing Decisions; Life Cycle Budgeting. Target Costing: Concept; Target Costing and Target Pricing; Key Principles of Target Costing; ABC and Target Costing; Target Costing Process; Market Driven Costing, Product Level Costing, Component Level Costing, Chained Target Costing; Target Costing and Cost Management; Role of Value Engineering in Target Costing. Unit III: Kaizen Costing- Meaning; Implementation Steps in Kaizen Costing; Target Costing and Kaizen Costing; General Kaizen Costing and Item Specific Kaizen Costing; Bench Marking. Total Quality Management(TQM): Meaning and Characteristics; Types of Quality Costs; Traditional and Modern View of Quality, Measuring Quality Costs; Reporting Quality Costs; Success Factors for TQM; Implementing TQM; Quality Cost Information and Managerial Decision Making. Unit IV: Pricing Strategies- Factors Influencing Pricing Decisions; Short run Vs. Long Run Pricing Strategy; Cost-Based Pricing; Economic Approach to Pricing; Pareto Analysis in Pricing Decisions. Activity-Based- Budgeting (ABB): ABB and Traditional Budgeting; ABB Process; Capacity Utilization; Role of ABB in Cost Management. Unit V: Productivity and Business Process Re-Engineering (BPR)- Measuring Productivity; Partial Productivity Measurement; Total Productivity Measurement; Measuring Changes in Activity and Process Efficiency; Productivity in Service Firms and Not-For-Profit Organizations. Process Reengineering (PR): Concept; Importance; Issues in PR. Value Chain Analysis: Concept; Value Chain Linkages; Internal Linkages; Supplier Linkages; Customer Linkages; Role of Value-Chain in Decision Analysis. Unit VI: Just-In-Time (JIT) Inventory Management- Traditional (Push) Approach to Inventory Management; JIT (Pull) Approach; JIT Purchasing; JIT and Quality Control; JIT and Cost Management;


67

Performance Evaluation in JIT Environment; Changes needed to Implement JIT Manufacturing ; Accounting Implications of JIT; JIT Limitations. Theory of Constraints (TOC): Concept; Operational Measures; Steps for Improving Performance; Internal Constraint; External Constraint; TOC and Cost Management; Uses of TOC; ABC and TOC.

Suggested Readings:

1. Edward J. Blocher, Kung H. Chen, Gary Cokins and Thomas W. Lin, Cost Management: A Strategic Emphasis, McGraw Hill Education (India) Ltd.

2. Don R – Hansen and Maryanne M. Mowen, Cost Management, Accounting and Control, Cengage Learning (India) Ltd.

3. Ronald W. Hilton, Michael W. Maher and Frank A. Selto, Cost Management: Strategies for Business Decisions, McGraw Hill Irwin.

4. Robert S. Kaplan and Robin Cooper, Cost and Effect, Harvard Business School Press. 5. John K. Shank and Vijay Govindarajan, Strategic Cost Management, The Free Press. 6. Leslie G. Eldenburg and Susan K. Wolcott, Cost Management, John Wiley and Sons.



68


(Minor Group -Accounting)

Course MN 452: ACCOUNTING THEORY AND FINANCIAL REPORTING


Objective: The course aims to provide knowledge to the students about developments in accounting theory and financial reporting, and understanding of accounting and reporting issues at the national and international level. Contents: Unit I- Accounting Theory: Nature; Classifications of Accounting Theory; Different Approaches to Theory Construction; Factors Influencing Accounting Environment; Measurement in Accounting. Accounting Principles: Generally Accepted Accounting Principles; Selection of Accounting Principles; AS-1 Disclosure of Accounting Policies; Indian Accounting Standards.

Unit II- Income Concepts: Different Concepts of Income Measurement; Recipients of Net Income. Accounting Standard Setting: Benefits; Standard Setting By Whom; Comparison of Standard Setting in India, USA and U.K. Unit III- Financial Reporting: Nature and Objectives; Benefits; General purpose and Specific Purpose Report; Qualitative Characteristics of Accounting Information; Conceptual Framework- FASB and IASB.

International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs): Role of IASB; Arguments for Global Convergence; Required Disclosure as per IFRSs; Achievements of IASB and Obstacles in Convergence; Difference between IFRSs and Indian Accounting Standards; US GAAP.

Unit IV- Issues in Corporate Financial Reporting: Accounting for Changing Prices; Segment Reporting

Unit V- Interim Reporting; Foreign Currency Translation.

Unit VI- Human Resource Accounting; Social Reporting; Financial Reporting in Not-For-Profit and Public Sector Organizations.

Suggested Readings:

1. E.S. Hendriksen, Accounting Theory, Richard D. Irwin. 2. M.W.E. Glautier and B. Underdown, Accounting Theory and Practice. 3. Ahmed Riahi Belkaoui, Accounting Theory, Thomson Learning. 4. Henry I- Wolk, Jere R. Francis and Michael G- Tearney, Accounting Theory: A Conceptual and

Institutional Approach, South Western Publishing Co. 5. Robert Bloom and Pieter T. Elagers, Accounting Theory and Policy, Harcourt Brace Joranovich. 6. L.S. Porwal, Accounting Theory, McGraw Hill Education (India) Ltd. 7. Jawahar Lal, Accounting Theory and Practice, Himalaya Publishing House, New Delhi.



69


(Minor Group-International Business)

Course MN 361: INDIA’S FOREIGN TRADE AND INVESTMENT


Objective: The objective of this course is to acquaint the students with structure and policy framework of India’s foreign trade and investments. Contents: Unit I – Introduction to India’s Foreign Trade and Investment: Pattern and Structure of India’s foreign trade; India’s trade in service; Terms of trade; India on the world trading map; Analysis of thrust export products and markets. India’s foreign investment policy and flows: India as an investment destination; India’s investments abroad – pattern and structure; Indian Joint ventures in foreign countries and their operations. Unit II - Foreign Trade Policy and Economic Relations: Policy making body and regulatory framework; Trends and developments in India’s foreign trade policy; Bilateralism and Multilateralism in India’s trade relations; India’s trade and economic relations with EU and other regional groupings; India and regional economic cooperation in South Asia; India’s Bilateral Investment Treaties and DTAAs (Double Taxation Avoidance Agreements). Unit III - Export Promotion Measures and Institutional Arrangements: Export promotion measures and schemes; Export and trading houses, Import facilities for exports; Export processing/special economic zones (EPZs/SEZs) and 100% EOUs – Policy framework and operational aspect. Export promotion councils, DIPP; Commodity boards/export development authorities; Infrastructure Support – Transportation and warehousing infrastructure, Indian ports and shipping system; Foreign Trade Finance and Insurance; Sources and Schemes of Foreign Trade Finance. Unit IV - Foreign Exchange facilities and Regulations: Foreign exchange facilities and exchange rate mechanism; Regulatory framework – FEMA and its objectives and provisions; Other acts and regulations. Unit V - Balance of Payment Account: India’s Balance of Payment account and adjustment policies; foreign reserves and debt situation.

Suggested Readings: 1. Ministry of Commerce, Export Import Policy, Government of India, New Delhi. 2. Ministry of Commerce, Handbook of Procedures, Vols. I and II, Government of India, New Delhi. 3. Customs and Excise Laws, Various issues. 4. Nayyar Deepak, Foreign Trade Sector, Planning and Industrialisation in India, in Terance J. Byres, The State Development Planning and Liberalisation in India, Delhi, 1997.


70

5. Meier G.M., Trade Policy and Development, in Scott Maurice and Deepak Lal, Public Policy and Economic Development – Essays in Honour of lan Little, Oxford. 6. Nayyar Deepak, India’s Export Performance 1970-85, Underlying Factors and Constraints, in Robert E.B. Lucas and Gustav F. Pipanek (ed.), Indian Economy Recent Development and Future Prospects, New Delhi. 7. Economic Survey– Compiled by the Government of India, Ministry of Finance, Department of Economic Affairs – Latest Edition. Note: Latest edition of the readings may be used.


71


(Minor Group- International Business)

Course MN 462: MANAGEMENT OF INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS OPERATIONS

Marks: 100 (Theory = 70, Internal Assessment = 30) Objective: The course intends to acquaint the students with the management of international business operations of a business firm. Contents: Unit I – The Strategy of International Business: Global Expansion, Profitability and Growth; Complexities and issues in International Business Management; Approaches to international management; Cross-cultural values and business management; International management orientation; International business management -A strategic perspective. Unit II – Planning for Global Expansion: Environmental scanning and monitoring; Resource allocation and portfolio compositions of a global firm; Linkages and synergies among business units across borders; Locus of decision making; Headquarter – subsidiary relationships in international business enterprises; International management information system. Unit III - International Production, Outsourcing and Location Decisions: Procurement for international operations – international quality standards; Logistics and Supply chain management. Unit IV - International Marketing Management: Globalization of Markets and Brands; International Market segmentation, targeting and positioning; International marketing mix planning – Product, price, promotion and distribution decisions. Unit V - Management of International Financial Operations: International capital budgeting and portfolio investment decisions; International capital structure decision, International working capital management. Unit VI - International Human Resource Management: Selection, training and development of people in international firms; Compensation and reward systems among international firms; Motivation and leadership in international firms; International Labour Relations. Unit VII – Accounting and Tax Issues in International Business: Evolution of International Accounting Standards (IFRSs); Issues and Challenges; International Double Taxation; Transfer Pricing; Tax Treaty Shopping; Tax havens.

Suggested Readings:

1. Danoes, John D. Radebaugh, Lee H., and Daniel P. Sullivan, International Business: Environment and Operations, Prentice Hall.


72

2. Griffin, Ricky W. and Pustay, Michael W, International Business: A Managerial Perspective, Prentice Hall. 3. Hill, Charles, W.L., International Business, McGraw Hill Company, New York. 4. Cherunilam, F., International Business Text and Cases, PHI. 5. Ball, Donald, Wendall H. McCulloch, Michael Geringer, Michael S. Minor and Jeanne M. McNett, International Business: The Challenge of Global Competition, McGraw Hill Co. Note: Latest edition of the readings may be used.